Home

English Manual Template - FOR

1. The Analog audio signals are embedded to AUDIO CH 1 through 4 of output signals from SDI OUT1 and 2 Settings that need to be checked e Set FS1 IN SEL to SDI1 in the FS INPUT SELECT menu see section 5 6 1 e Set SDI 1 2 to FS1 in the OUTPUT ASSIGN menu see section 5 7 1 e Set CH1 through CH4 to ANALOG CH1 through CH4 respectively in the EMB1 OUT REMAP menu see section 6 5 1 NOTE See section 12 Analog Audio Connection for the ANALOG AUDIO connector connection Change audio settings if necessary in the ANALOG AUDIO Settings ANALOG menu section 6 3 25 3 5 Connecting a Computer The FA 9520 can be controlled from a computer through a Web browser Connect a computer to the FA 9520 as shown below Connection using a crossover LAN cable ANALOG AUDIO REMOTE S OB Cerra JO Oye so le a S NOUT LAN1 a SER NO H ON A Crossover LAN cable Connection using a hub A B ANALOG AUDIO REMOTE Ob OK vy C 6 feg NN E y AS CERE 9 zi Na le FAN2 g E Sun 5 Flan 058 a n E C S p TOM ENLOCKW DIST OINTOUT
2. No Name Description Ref Used to turn the unit ON OFF Pressing the side turns on the 1 POWER switch power 4 1 In FA 9500 mode Lit when pressed and the buttons and controls on the front panel except this LOCK button are disabled To enable the disabled buttons and controls press and hold this button LOCK button down for several seconds FA 9500 mode In FA 9520 mode 2 Used to select FS1 or FS2 There are linked menus that can be FS1 LOCK changed simultaneously by pressing the FS1 LOCK and FS2 LOCK buttons simultaneously See 4 2 8 2 channel frame synchronizer FA 9520 mode switching for details Disables operation only for FS1 when pressed and held down Press and hold this button down again to unlock operation Both FS1 and FS2 LOCKs can be set simultaneously to disable all other buttons except themselves In FA 9500 mode Ineffective In FA 9520 mode Used to select FS1 or FS2 There are linked menus that can be changed simultaneously by pressing FS1 LOCK and FS2 LOCK 3 FS2 LOCK buttons simultaneously See 4 2 8 Switching Between 2 Channel 4 2 8 FA 9520 mode Frame Synchronizers for details Disables operation only for FS2 when pressed and held down Press and hold this button down again to unlock operation Both FS1 and FS2 LOCKs can be set simultaneously to disable all other buttons except themselves 4 EVENT button Used to save and load events
3. Video Audio System GPI Utility Status Network Unit Video Audio FAN 1 SDI 1 In SDI 1 2 Out CH 1 SDI 3 4 Out CH 1 AES Out CH 1 FAN 2 SDI 2 In SDI 1 2 Out CH 2 SDI 3 4 Out CH 2 AES Out CH 2 SDI 1 2 Out CH 3 SDI 1 2 Out CH 4 SDI 1 2 Out CH 5 SDI 1 2 Out CH 6 SDI 1 2 Out CH 7 SDI 1 2 Out CH 8 SDI 1 2 Out CH 9 SDI 1 2 Out CH 10 SDI 1 2 Out CH 11 SDI 1 2 Out CH 12 SDI 1 2 Out CH 13 SDI 1 2 Out CH 14 SDI 1 2 Out CH 15 SDI 1 2 Out CH 16 SDI 3 4 Out CH 3 SDI 3 4 Out CH 4 SDI 3 4 Out CH 5 SDI 3 4 Out CH 6 SDI 3 4 Out CH 7 SDI 3 4 Out CH 8 SDI 3 4 Out CH 9 SDI 3 4 Out CH 10 SDI 3 4 Out CH 11 SDI 3 4 Out CH 12 SDI 3 4 Out CH 13 SDI 3 4 Out CH 14 SDI 3 4 Out CH 15 SDI 3 4 Out CH 16 AES Out CH 3 AES Out CH 4 AES Out CH 5 AES Out CH 6 AES Out CH 7 AES Out CH 8 L Composite In v v 1 Power 1 v Power 2 Reference In SDI 1 2 Out SDI 3 4 Out Composite Out FA 95AIO Option A In FA 95AIO Option A Out FA 95AIO Option B In FA 95AIO Option B Out Analog Out CH 1 Analog Out CH 2 Analog Out CH 3 Analog Out CH 4 Unit Trap Allows you to select whether to send fan and power unit alarm
4. Menu button CH SEL CH1 GAIN SET 0 0d8 CC MASTER 0 0dB AES AUDIO Parameter Default cippus Description Steps CH SEL CH1 CH1 CH8 Selects an AES audio channel for which to adjust the gain from channels CH1 through 8 20 0 20 0 dB Sets the input gain for the AES audio channel GAIN SET TUDJE 0 1 dB thatis selected under CH SEL 20 0 20 0 dB Sets the offset to the input gain for all channels MASTER 0 0 dB 0 1 dB CH1 to 8 of AES inputs 1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range If the range is exceeded the alert will be displayed as 20 0 dB or 20 0 dB 6 2 2 AES HYSTERESIS Menu button CH AS EL eC HY 2 HYS SET OFF CC AES AUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description E ur Synchronizes the AES input signals in CH SEL CH 1 2 CH 5 6 group A or B per group CH 7 8 These settings are effective when using OFF dg audio Smar to E HYS SET OFF GROUP A SA sun P vide E END IS GROUP B The channel pair with the smallest channel numbers within a group is used as the reference pair and other channel pairs are synchronized to it If there is no audio signal in the channel pair the next channel pair will be the reference Audio signals with a phase difference relative to the reference within 0 25 of a sample period can be synchronized Setting Examples When setting all channel
5. sssssssssssseeneeee eene 267 20 3 AFD Supported Video Formats ccccccccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeceecceeeeeeeeeesenccneeeeeeeeseseneseeaees 271 20 4 AFD Based Auto Aspect Conversion Settings coconciccnococcccocicccnnnononcnnoccnnnnnnanoncnnno 271 20 5 How to Insert AFD Data to Output Video Signals c ccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeteeeenneeeees 272 20 6 AFD Code Abbreviations nenir neren a o eiae a E eda aaa 273 21 About Closed Captioning ccccccccceeeeeeeeenneeeceeeeeeeceneeaeeceeeeesesecceeaeeeeeeeeeseseneaeeeeeeeetsees 275 21 1 Closed Captioning Setting Procedure cc cccceceeeeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeenceneaeeeeeeeeeeenenneneeees 275 22 Verification After Option Card Removal Replacement e ccececceceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeenees 276 22 1 Alert note ete e oeste ama atus 276 22 2 Verification After Dolby Option Removal Replacement sssssssssssss 276 22 3 Verification After FA 95AIO Removal Replacement ssssssessssseeee 276 22 4 Verification After FA 95ALA Removal Replacement sssssesesseseeeee 277 23 Expansion Slots A B Alert eene en nennen nen nnne 277 24 Specifications and Dimensions 2 cee ceeeecee cece cece een eeeeeeeeeeeecenaaeeeeeeeeeeeeecensaeeeeeeeeteneeeas 278 24 1 Unit Specifications leote conse seen E 278 13 14 1 Prior to Starting 1 1 Welcome Congratul
6. Parameter Default Setting range Description Left Left EMB CH1 EMB1 CH1 16 z d AES CH1 8 Selects audio signals to be Center Center EMB CH3 Left Surround Left Surround EMB CH5 Right Surround Right Surround EMB CH6 ANALOG CH1 4 downmixed Dolby DECA CH1 8 Dolby DECB CH1 8 If the same audio signal is selected for multiple CH SEL channels or a NON PCM signal is assigned to an audio channel the menu will be indicated with an i e FEMB1 CH1 and DOWNMIX L and DOWNMIX R will be muted The downmixed audio signals are output as Down Mix L and R To embed downmixed audio signals Down Mix L and R see section 9 3 10 SDI Audio Output Setting To output downmixed audio signal from AES connectors see section 9 3 11 AES Audio Output Setting To output from the analog audio output connectors see section 9 3 12 Analog Audio Output Setting 190 9 3 10 SDI Audio Output Settings Clicking block 14 or 15 on the audio block diagram opens the SDI 1 2 or 3 4 Audio Output Setting dialog box 2 SDI 1 2 Audio Output Setting Mozilla Firefox E i 2 SDI 3 4 Audio Output Setting Mozilla Firefox 192 168 0 10 htmljemb_out2a cgi emb1 192 168 0 10 html emb_out2b cgizemb2 SDI 1 2 Audio Mono Sum SDI 1 2 Output Clock Select SDI 3 4 Audio Mono Sum SDI 3 4 Output Clock Select CH 1 2 O Disable Enable Group 1 Reference CH 1 2 O Disable Enable Group 1 Reference CH 3 4 9 Disable Enabl
7. 5 10 5 VIDEO OPTION OUTPUT This menu is accessible only if the FA 95AIO option is installed in slot A or B Menu button OP 25 6 ce es ae MOD B PbPr SMPTE OTHER Parameter Display Description 525 60 625 50 1080 59i Devt Displays the output video format of the FA 95AIO OPA p installed in slot A 720 50p i 23 l 1080 23PsF Displays DISABLE if there is no signal output 1080 24PsF BY PASS DISABLE YPbPr SMPTE Displays the output signal format of the FA 95AIO MODE A YPbPrBETACAM installed in slot A RGB See section 5 7 2 AIO A ASSIGN for details on YIC signal format settings Displays the output video format of the FA 95AIO OP B Same as OP A installed in slot B Displays DISABLE if there is no signal output Displays the output signal format of the FA 95AIO installed in slot B MODE Same as MODE A See section 5 7 2 AIO A ASSIGN for details on signal format settings 1 The output video format for Y C mode is either 525 60 625 50 or PAL M 84 5 10 6 AUDIO IN DETECT 1 0 D Menu button EMBI SDI N1 CH1 16 PPPP NNNN SSSS STATUS EMB2 SDI N 2 CH1 16 PPPP NNNN SSSS ETHER Parameter Display Description Displays information on EMB1 audio input signals CH1 through 16 in 16 characters on the 2nd line from top P PCM Normal audio signal S Silence Mute signal N NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 No audio
8. Displays the name of the optional device that is NAME 2 installed in OPTION SLOT B Displays NONE if no device is installed Displays the FPGA1 version information in FPGA1 OPTION SLOT B Displays if the version is not supported Displays the FPGA2 version information in FPGA2 OPTION SLOT B Displays if the version is not supported Displays the version information of SOFT in SOFT OPTION SLOT B Displays if the version is not supported 148 7 11 OTHER OPTION OTHER OPTION 301 Menu button FA 95PS INSTALLED STATUS OTHER Parameter Default Setting range Description FA 95PS INSTALLED FA 95PS option is installed NONE FA 95PS option is not installed 7 12 SOFT OPTION1 SOFT OPTION1 302 Menu button FA 95AVO NONE FA 95S8SCNV I NSTALLED STATUS FA 95 36 NONE FA 95FRC NONE OTHER Parameter Default Setting range Description x INSTALLED FA 95AVO is installed EISE NONE FA 95AVO is not installed INSTALLED FA 95SCNV option is installed PA NONE FA 95SCNV option is not installed FA 95 3G 7 9 INSTALLED FA 95 3G option is installed NONE FA 95 3G option is not installed INSTALLED FA 95FRC option is installed soe NONE FA 95FRC option is not installed FA 95AVO comes standard optional in Japan FA 953G comes standard
9. EMB2 OUT GAIN 133 CH SEL CH 1 Menu button GAIN SET 0 0d8B MASTER 0 0dB oe MUTE OF F Parameter Default Setting range Description Steps Selects an audio channel from among FS2 embedded audio CH SEL CH1 CH1 16 channels CH1 through 16 for which to set audio gain 20 0 20 0 dB Sets audio output gain for the eo PET 2008 0 1 dB signal selected under CH SEL Sets the offset to audio output MASTER dBi dB gain for all audio channels CH1 i through 16 in FS2 OFF ON Mutes all embedded audio MUTE OFF ON channels in FS2 1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range If the range is exceeded the alert will be displayed as 20 0dB or 20 0dB 6 4 4 AES OUT GAIN Menu button CONV2 MASTER Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description Selects an AES audio channel for CH SEL CH1 CH1 8 which to set audio gain from channels CH1 to CH8 20 0 20 0dB Sets audio output gain for the CAN SEL 0 0d8 0 1 dB signal selected under CH SEL _ 20 0 20 0dB Sets the offset to audio output MASTER 0 1 dB gain for all AES audio channels OFF ON Mutes all AES audio MUTE OFF ON channels 1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range If the range is exceeded the alert will be displayed as 20 0dB or 20 0dB 109 6 4 5 ANALOG OUT GAIN ANALOG OUT GAIN
10. 1 The total value of Master and individual channel cannot exceed the setting range The setting value will stop at the end of the range AES Audio Delay Analog Audio Delay 2 Audio Delay AES Mozilla Firefox 2 Audio Delay Analog Mozilla Firefox BEE 192 1680 10 htmi adly2 aes cei B i a 1921680 10 html adly2 anacei 5 Y Audio Delay Audio Delay Master 4 ms bk El Master 4 ms B Cony dms j El sms j E Cni Cdm HB ame p B ua 4 ms j El 4 ms E unity 4 alms j El 4 ams jj unity i 4 ms gt 4 ms j El 4 ms HH El JEJE SIE E 183 9 3 5 SRC Mode SDI AES Clicking block 6 on the audio block diagram opens the SRC Mode dialog box SDI1 SDI2 SRC Mode I SRG Mode SDI Mozilla Firefox 92 168 01 17 stc2 embl c SRC Mode CH1 CH2 Auto CH3 CH4 Auto CH5 CH6 Auto CH7 CH8 Auto CH9 CH10 Auto CH11 CH12 Auto CH13 CH14 Auto CH15 CH15 Auto OBY PASS O SRC In OBY PASS SRCIn OBYPASS SRCIn OBY PASS 9 SRC In OBY PASS 9 SRC In OBYPASS SRCIn OBY PASS SRCIn OBY PASS 9 SRC In I SRG Mode SDI2 Mozilla Firefox 192168 0 10 htmi sro2 emb cei e SRC Mode CH1 CH2 OdAuto OBYPASS OSRC In CH3 CH4 OdAuto OBY PASS SRCIn CH5 CH6 OAuto OBY PASS SRCIn CH7 CH8 OAuto OBYPASS OSRC In CH9 CH10 OAuto OBY PASS 9 SRC In CH11 CH12 OAuto OBY PASS 9 SRC In CH13 CH14 OAuto OBYPASS GO
11. IMPORTANT Note that the allowed current for each GPI output circuit is 10mA and the external power supply should be 5VDC 243 15 How to Install the FA 95DACBL This section describes how to install the optional FA 95DACBL If you have purchased the FA 95DACBL with the FA 9520 this procedure is unnecessary since the FA 95DACBL has been factory installed 15 1 Procedure 1 Turn off the power of the FA 9520 and disconnect the power cord 2 Remove the 3 screws from the top panel and 4 screws each from the right and left sides of the unit Remove the top panel See the below picture 3 Remove the 2 screws from the blank panel on OPTION SLOT B Keep these screws in a safe place to use later to secure the FA 95DACBL To install the FA 95DACBL in slot A remove the screws from the blank panel on OPTION SLOT A 4 Connect the white connector of the FA 95DACBL to CN34 See the below picture 244 5 Install the BNC connector panel of the FA 95DACBL into the slot from inside the unit Secure the connector panel with the screws that were removed from the blank panel See the below picture 6 If you have install the FA 95DACBL in slot A set switch 5 in the S2 DIP switch to OFF If you have installed it into slot B set switch 5 in the S2 DIP switch to ON 7 Return and secure the top panel onto the unit with the 3 screws on top and 4 screws each on the right and left sides of the unit 15 2 Installation
12. Menu button CoH SEL 6 1 CONV1 GAIN SET 0 0dB MASTER 0 0dB ANALOG MUTE OFF Setting range ae Parameter Default Steps Description Selects an analog audio output CH SEL CH1 CH1 CH4 channel for which to set the input gain from channels CH1 to CH4 E Sets the output gain for the analog GAIN SET 0 0dB ax 145 dB audio output signal that is selected i under CH SEL Sets the offset to the output gain MASTER 0 0 dB 20 0 200 dB for all analog audio channels CH1 0 1 dB to CH4 OFF ON Mutes all analog audio MUTE OFF ON channels 1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range If the range is exceeded the alert will be displayed as 20 0dB or 20 0dB 110 6 5 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING Allows you to assign embedded audio AES audio and analog audio signals to output channels 6 5 1 EMB1 OUT REMAP Menu button PROCESS EMB1 OUT Ta mI som TI Qm are Co rn co ear Tip p 1 SDI AUDIO om me c 7 PAN Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an FS1 audio channel to CH SEL CH1 CH1 CH16 embed audio signal from CH1 through 16 EMB1 CH1 16 EMB2 CH1 16 AES CH1 8 ANALOG CH1 4 DOWN MIX1 L DOWN MIX1 R DOWN MIX2 L DOWN MIX2 R 500Hz TONE 1KHz TONE SILENCE Dolby DECA CH1 8 Selects an audio signal to embed ASSIGN EMB1 CH1 16 Dolby DMA L into the FS1 audio channel Dolby DMA R selec
13. 20 2 3 Internal Settings IMPORTANT Note that internal switch settings should not be changed from factory defaults If you have accidentally changed the settings return them to the factory default settings as shown in this section Be sure to have qualified technical personnel perform the settings and adjustments in the interior or contact your dealer CAUTION Do not access any internal cards while the unit is powered ON Always power OFF all connected units disconnect power cords prior to accessing the interior To protect boards from electrostatic damage do not touch the components on the boards 2 3 1 Dipswitch Settings The following settings can be made at the dipswitches on MAIN CARD inside the unit Dipswitch S1 Settings Pin No Default setting Setting 1 OFF Do not change 2 OFF Do not change 3 OFF Do not change 4 OFF Do not change 5 OFF Do not change 6 OFF Do not change 7 OFF Do not change 8 OFF Do not change Dipswitch S2 Settings Pin No Default setting Setting 1 OFF Do not change 2 OFF Do not change 3 OFF Do not change 4 OFF Do not change If the FA 95DACBL is installed in SLOT A OFF 5 OFF If the FA 95DACBL is installed in SLOT B ON If the FA 95DACBL is not installed OFF 6 OFF Do not change 7 OFF Standard FA 9520 OFF without FA 95PS If the FA 95PS is installed ON 8 OFF Do not cha
14. Audio Emb2 Assign Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded20utAssignCh12 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded20utAssignCh13 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded20utAssignCh14 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded20utAssignCh15 INTEGER Ditto ffa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh16 INTEGER adadaa OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 3 2 3 fa952AudioAesOutAssign Audio Audio AES Audio AES Out Assign 0 emb1Ch1 1 emb1Ch2 2 emb1Ch3 3 emb1Ch4 4 emb1Ch5 5 emb1Ch6 6 emb1Ch7 7 emb1Ch8 8 emb1Ch9 9 emb1Ch10 10 emb1Ch11 11 emb1Ch12 12 emb1Ch13 13 emb1Ch14 14 emb1Ch15 15 emb1Ch16 16 emb2Ch1 17 emb2Ch2 18 emb2Ch3 19 emb2Ch4 20 emb2Ch5 21 emb2Ch6 22 emb2Ch7 23 emb2Ch8 24 emb2Ch9 25 emb2Ch10 26 emb2Ch11 27 emb2Ch12 28 emb2Ch13 29 emb2Ch14 30 emb2Ch15 31 emb2Ch16 32 aesCh1 33 aesCh2 34 aesCh3 35 aesCh4 36 aesCh5 37 aesCh6 38 aesCh7 39 aesCh8 40 analogCh1 41 analogCh2 42 analogCh3 43 analogCh4 44 downMix1 L 45 downMix1 R 46 downMix2 L 47 downMix2 R 48 tone500Hz 49 tone1kHz 50 silence 51 dolbyDecodeOpACh1 52 dolbyDecodeOpACh2 53 dolbyDecodeOpACh3 54 dolbyDecodeOpACh4 55 dolbyDecodeOpACh5 56 dolbyDecodeOpACh6 57 dolbyDecodeOpACh7 58 dolbyDecodeOpACh8 59 dolbyDownMixOpA L 60 dolbyDownMixOpA R 61 dolbyEncodeOpACh1 162 dolbyEncodeOpBCh2 163 dolbyDecodeOpBCh1 64 dolbyDecodeOpBCh2 165 dolbyDecodeOpBCh3 166 dolbyDecodeOpBCh4 67 dolbyDecodeOpBCh5
15. Event 11 20 EVENT 11 EVENT 12 EVENT 13 EVENT 14 EVENT 15 EVENT 16 EVENT 17 EVENT 18 EVENT 19 EVENT 20 Unit Name Enter a name for the FA 9520 within 15 characters The name will be displayed on the front panel under NAME in the NETWORK INFO menu sec 7 4 The factory default is FA 9520 Event Name Select a group of 20 events to be displayed by clicking on the event group in section D Enter a name in the setting box next to respective events within 15 alphanumeric characters After entering name s click Submit The factory default values are Event 1 to 100 The entered event names will be displayed when performing Event Load or Event Save They will also be displayed on the front panel menu display while opening menus described in section 8 Event Memory 218 9 6 2 Backup Parameter The FA 9520 settings can be saved to a file and the saved settings in a file can be loaded Saving the FA 9520 Settings to a File Click Submit next to Save File under Backup Parameter The File Download dialog appears File Download Security Warning Do you want to open or save this file I Name fa9520 csv 9x Type Unknown File Type From 192 168 0 10 F While files from the Internet can be useful this file type can Y potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or save this software What s the risk Click OK to start saving IMPORTANT Some versions of Int
16. GNormal O Invert ONormal Olnvert CH2 Normal Ol Invert GNormal Olnvert CH3 GO Normal Ol Invert GNormal Ol Invert CH4 GO Normal Olnvert GNormal Ol Invert CHS GNormal Olnvert Normal Ol Invert CH6 Normmal Olnvert Normal Ol Invert CH7 GNormal Olnvert GNormal O Invert CH8 GNormal O Invert GNormal Ol Invert CH9 GNormal Ol Invert CH10 Normal Ol Invert CH10 Normal Ol nvert CH it Normal Olnvert CH1 Normal Ol Invert CH12 Normal Ol Invert CH12 Normal Ol Invert CH13 Normal Olnvert CH13 GNormal Ol Invert CH14 Normal Ol Invert CH14 Normal Ol Invert CH15 Normal Ol Invert CH15 Normal Ol Invert CH16 Normal Ol Invert CH16 Normal Ol Invert Polarity AES Analog Polarity AES Mozilla Firefox EBR E 192168 010 Html polZ aescgi Polarity CH1 Normal Olnvert CH2 Normal Olnvert CH3 Normal O Invert i polarity Tukia Mozilla Firefox AR 192 168 0 10 html pol2_anacei CH4 Normal O Invert Pol CH5 Normal Olnvert CH1 Normal Olnvert CH6 Normal Olnvert CH N Olnvert CH Normal Olnvert RE m CH8 9 Normal Olnvert Gk Nomai Oed CH4 S Normal Olnvert After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Polarity Parameter Default Setting rang
17. MODE YPbPr SMPTE 155 lt Video Loss Mode gt Video Loss Mode allows you to select what to output when the input signal selected under Input is lost e Back Color Displays a screen in a color selected under Back Color Auto Freeze Freezes the last image before loss of signal Freezes progressive signals such as 720p in frame freeze mode and other signals in field freeze mode e Color Bar Outputs SMPTE color bars e Output Disable No outputs from SDI OUT1 2 3 4 or COMPOSITE OUT1 2 9 2 2 Auto Video Optimizer AVO Clicking block 6 on the video block diagram opens the Auto Video Optimizer dialog box AWO settings are effective on FS1 video signals 2 Auto Video Optimizer Mozilla Firefox laica 192168010 html avo2cei fs 1 B AVO Control Mode Off O Auto Hold Level Standard v Sample Area Full Screen v Area Display off O On AVO Setup Response Level 3 Scene Cut Det Off Gamma Mode Off After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings 156 AVO Control Parameter Default Setting range Description Auto Enables automatic level adjustment Hold Stops auto level adjustment When MODE selection is changed from AUTO to HOLD the signal levels stop and remain as they are Off Disables automatic level adjustment When MODE selection is changed from AUTO to Off Off the signal leve
18. OPB COMPOSITE KEYER LOAD 1 7 7 EXT AUDIO DEFAULT EVENT1 100 Assigns a function to the 8 GPI pin that is selected ASSIGN NONE BT 9 under GPI1 7 SEL LOUD1 B START LOUD2 A CLEAR according to the selection B CLEAR 9 under IN OUT SEL BY PASS OP A BY PASS OP B In case IN OUT SEL is set to OUTPUT NONE REF IN FAN ALARM DC POWER1 DC POWER2 FREEZE VIDEO IN SDI1 SDI2 OPB COMPOSITE KEYER LOUD 1 A CTRL l LOUD 2 B CTRL Selects a logo ID for the LOGO ID 1 7 1 256 selected FS1 LOAD 1 7 or FS2 LOAD 1 7 1 Whenever the IN OUT SEL setting is changed ASSIGN is reset to NONE Reset ASSIGN 2 The input functions consist of pulse mode and level mode functions See the following INPUT FUNCTION for details 3 Details of the output functions are shown in the 4DUTPUT FUNCTION on the next page Power 1 and 2 are selectable if the FA 95PS option is installed 144 4 Effective if the FA 95AIO option is installed in option slot A 5 Effective if the FA 95AIO option is installed in option slot B 6 Shown if the FA 95PS option is installed 7 FS1LOGOs 1 7 and FS2 LOGOs 1 7 will be displayed if selected as LOGO ID 1 Logo ID can be assigned to any number 1 through 256 In the following cases the logo will not be inserted to the FS output signals although data will be loaded to the FA 9520 No logo is registered under the selected Logo ID The registered l
19. SDI 1 2 OutCH1 16 Check to send a trap for SDI 1 2 audio output channels SDI 3 4 OutCH1 16 Check to send a trap for SDI 3 4 audio output channels AES Out CH1 8 Check to send a trap for AES audio output channels Analog Out CH1 4 Check to send a trap for analog audio output channels 234 9 8 5 USER SETTING This page allows you to set the user name and password for accessing the FA 9520 The default settings are User Name fa9520 Password foranetwork INFORMATION NETWORK SETTING SNMP SETTING TRAP SETTING RESTART FA 9520 Password eeeeeeeccce Re enter Password User Account Setting User Name fa9520 15 Max char 15 Max char 15 Max char Setting Range Item Alphanumeric and Description symbolic characters User Name 15 char max Allows you to set the user name Password 15 char max Allows you to set the password Re enter l Password 15 char max Allows you to confirm the password The authentication dialog box will not appear at the next login if the User Name and Password setting boxes are left empty Changes will be applied after rebooting or 9 8 6 Restart is performed 9 8 6 Restart Click Restart to reboot the FA 9520 The FA 9520 performs the same operation as when it is on Note that the video and audio signals will be distorted while rebooting the FA 9520 INFORMATION NETWORK SETTING SNMP SETTING TRAP SETTING EEJ ME Restart FA
20. o a EY Straight through LAN cable A a 7000000000 gt The FA 9520 network settings must be adjusted for your network after purchase The FA 9520 s LAN1 IP address is set to 192 168 0 10 at the factory Set the IPaddress and subnet mask of the computer IP address 192 168 0 1 to 192 168 0 254 except 192 168 0 10 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 In Windows open the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box and open the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window The settings must be made in the window See the user s manual of your computer for details Start a web browser on your computer and enter the address as http 192 168 0 10 Enter the default user name fa9520 and the default password foranetwork The FA 9520 control window appears on the web browser window See section 9 8 Network Settings for details on changing the FA 9520 s IP address See section 9 Control via WEB Browser for details on the FA 9520 web browser control window NOTE The FA 9520 s IP address can be checked on the front panel display See section 7 7 NETWORK INFO for details 26 3 6 Connecting to the REMOTE GPI Connector Easy control over the FA 9520 from an external device is also possible by connecting the device to the REMOTE connector Seven ports are provided on the connector Assign functions to the re
21. CH 4 in the AES OUT REMAP menu Sec 6 5 3 ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 4 in the ANALOG OUT REMAP menu Sec 6 5 4 ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 4 in the LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT menu Sec 6 10 2 4 Reset the following menu items if the FA 95DE E option is removed ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 16 in the EMB1 OUT REMAP menu Sec 6 5 1 ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 8 in the EMB2 OUT REMAP menu Sec 6 5 2 ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 8 in the AES OUT REMAP menu Sec 6 5 3 OUTPUT settings in the Dolby AUX OUT menu Sec 6 10 1 1 ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 8 in the LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT menu Sec 6 10 2 4 22 3 Verification After FA 95AIO Removal Replacement Reset the following menu items if the FA 95AIO option card is removed or moved IN SEL settings in the FS INPUT SELECT menu Sec 5 6 1 e INPUT BY PASS settings in the GPI SETTING menu Sec 7 6 276 22 4 Verification After FA 95ALA Removal Replacement Reset the following menu items if the FA 95ALA option card is removed or moved ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 16 in the EMB1 OUT REMAP menu Sec 6 5 1 ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 8 in the EMB2 OUT REMAP menu Sec 6 5 2 ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 8 in the AES OUT REMAP menu Sec 6 5 3 ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 4 in the ANALOG OUT REMAP menu Sec 6 5 4 ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 4 in the Dolby ENCODER INPUT menu Sec 6 10 1 6 23 Expansion Slots A B Aler
22. Ditto Fa952Analog OutAudioCh4StatusChangeTrap Co h5 NOTIFICATION TYPE ggg Change OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 01 6 7 Dolby OpA AUX Input 0 Loss 1 PCM 2 NON PCM 3 Unknown fa95DolbyOpAAuxInputChangedTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change Reference Input 00 Loss 01 525 60i 102 625 50i 04 1080 59i 105 1080 50i 09 1080 24PsF 10 1080 23 98PsF 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59p 21 720 50p 29 Unknown 30 BY PASS 31 Disable 32 none fa95DolbyOpARefInputChangedTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 6 8 Dolby OpB AUX Input 0 Loss 1 PCM 2 NON PCM 3 Unknown fa95DolbyOpBAuxInputChangedTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change Reference Input 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50i 104 1080 59i 05 1080 50i 09 1080 24PsF 10 1080 23 98PsF 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59p 21 720 50p 29 Unknown 30 BY PASS 31 Disable 32 none fa95DolbyOpBRefInputChangedTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change 261 19 FA 9520 Ancillary Data Packet Name List DID SDID DEM FA 9520 Indication hexadecimal Description S353MMPEG V 08 08 MPEG recoding data VANC space Picture rate information S353M MPEG H 08 0C MPEG recoding data HANC space Other part of recording data set S305M SD SDTI 40 01 ARIB STD B
23. Parameter Default Setting range Description Freeze On Off Off Off On Sets FREEZE ON OFF Freeze Mode Frame jae Select an operation mode for FREEZE Sets the interval to refresh the images by the Strobe Freeze 0 0 255 number of fields for the field or frame freeze 0 will not refresh the image 1 Changing the FS Mode or Synchro Mode setting while Freeze On Off is set to On will turn freeze Off Freeze On Off cannot be set to On if Synchro mode is set to Line Sync or AVDL Freeze is always set to Off at startup These settings are not stored in the event memory 2 Freeeze Mode is automatically set to Frame for progressive and progressive segmented frame input signals and cannot be changed See the below Freeze Mode Setting Chart for details Freeze Mode Setting Chart Input signal Sync Format 525 60 625 50 1080 59i 1080 50i 720 59p 720 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF 1080 59p 1080 50p settings AUTO OE OE OE OE F F F F F F 525 60 OE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE 625 50 NOE OE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE 1080 59i NOE NOE OE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE 1080 50i NOE NOE NOE OE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE 720 59p NF NF NF NF F NF NF NF NF NF 720 50p NF NF NF NF NF F NF NF NF NF 1080 23PsF NF NF NF NF NF NF F NF NF NF 1080 24PsF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF F NF NF 1080 59p NF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF F NF 1080 50p NF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF
24. Sets the SRC circuit to pass signals However NON PCM audio signals will be by passed BY PASS Sets the SRC circuit to by pass signals Set to By pass to output asynchronous audio signals To embed the asynchronous audio signals to SDI video signals an audio clock must be selected under 6 1 4 EMB1 OUT CLOCK for the respective audio groups SRC IN Sets the SRC circuit to pass both PCM or NON PCM signals Useful for the irregular PCM signal with the NON PCM audio channel status indication However real NON PCM signals cannot be output properly 6 9 4 EMB1 POLARITY Menu button OUT SEL MODE Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a channel from among FS1 CH SEL CH1 CH 1 16 embedded audio channels for which to set polarity Sets the polarity for the channel that is POLARITY NORMAL NORMAL selected under CH SEL INVERT Reverses the polarity 6 9 5 EMB2 POLARITY TY NORMAL Menu button OUT SEL MODE Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a channel from among FS2 CH SEL CH1 CH 1 16 embedded audio channels for which to set polarity Sets the polarity for the channel that is POLARITY NORMAL NORMAL selected under CH SEL INVERT Reverses the polarity 122 6 9 6 AES POLARITY Menu button OUT SEL MODE Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a channe
25. Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type Write Read Audio Audio Analog Audio Analog Out Assign 6 emb1Ch7 7 emb1Ch8 8 emb1Ch9 9 emb1Ch10 10 emb1Ch11 11 emb1Ch12 12 emb1Ch13 13 emb1Ch14 14 emb1Ch15 15 emb1Ch16 16 emb2Ch1 17 emb2Ch2 18 emb2Ch3 19 emb2Ch4 20 emb2Ch5 21 emb2Ch6 22 emb2Ch7 23 emb2Ch8 24 emb2Ch9 25 emb2Ch10 26 emb2Ch11 27 emb2Ch12 28 emb2Ch13 29 emb2Ch14 30 emb2Ch15 31 emb2Ch16 32 aesCh1 33 aesCh2 34 aesCh3 35 aesCh4 36 aesCh5 37 aesCh6 38 aesCh7 39 aesCh8 40 analogCh1 41 analogCh2 42 analogCh3 43 analogCh4 44 downMix1 L 45 downMix1 R 46 downMix2 L 47 downMix2 R 48 tone500Hz 49 tone1kHz 50 silence o 51 dolbyDecodeOpACh1 52 dolbyDecodeOpACh2 fa952AudioAnalogOutAssignCh1 53 dolbyDecodeOpACh3 54 dolbyDecodeOpACh4 55 dolbyDecodeOpACh5 57 dolbyDecodeOpACh7 56 dolbyDecodeOpACh6 58 dolbyDecodeOpACh8 59 dolbyDownMixOpA L l60 dolbyDownMixOpA R l61 dolbyEncodeOpACh1 l62 dolbyEncodeOpBCh2 63 dolbyDecodeOpBCh1 64 dolbyDecodeOpBCh2 65 dolbyDecodeOpBCh3 166 dolbyDecodeOpBCh4 67 dolbyDecodeOpBCh5 69 dolbyDecodeOpBCh7 68 dolbyDecodeOpBCh6 70
26. ffa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch12 INTEGER CH13 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch13 INTEGER CH14 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch14 INTEGER CH15 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch15 INTEGER CH16 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch16 INTEGER agadadadaa aaa aaa 256 Object group Front TITLE Item name Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type Write Read OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 5 3 3 AES input audio status 0 Loss O 1 PCM 48kHz 2 PCM 44 1kHz 3 PCM 32kHz 4 PCM Other CH1 e lfao52StatusAesInCh1 INTEGER 7 Silence 32kHz 8 Silence Other AUDIO INPUT AES IN AUDIO 9 NON PCM 10 Unknown 11 notinputSetting ICH2 Ditto a952StatusAesInCh2 2 NTEGER CH3 Ditto a952StatusAesInCh3 3 NTEGER CH4 Ditto a952StatusAesInCh4 4 NTEGER CH5 Ditto a952StatusAesInCh5 5 NTEGER O ICH6 Ditto a952StatusAesInCh6 6 NTEGER O CH7 Ditto a952StatusAesInCh7 7 NTEGER O CH8 Ditto a952StatusAesInCh8 8 NTEGER O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 5 3 4 ANALOG input audio status CH1 ie in 5 a952StatusAnaloginCh1 4 INTEGER lo AUDIO INPUT ANALOG IN AUDIO CH2 Ditto a952StatusAnalogln
27. 150 0 Adjusts the width of the video Horizontal Size c 0 196 displayed on the monitor V SIZE 100 0 50 0 150 0 Adjusts the height of the video Vertical Size ue 0 1 displayed on the monitor H POS 0 Pixel Variable Adjusts the horizontal position of Horizontal Position 2 Pixel the video displayed on the monitor ariable justs the vertical position of the V POS 0 Line Variable Adj h ical iti f th Vertical Position 1 Line video displayed on the monitor Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively 1 If the size is made smaller than the original size set the background color under CONV SIDE RGB see section 5 3 6 2 The following parameters interact with each other When you change one of their setting values setting ranges of other parameters will also change SYNC FRMT Parameter in FS MODE SET see section 5 9 1 CONV parameter in CONV MODE see section 5 3 1 If the CONV mode is set to BY PASS the CONV SIZE POS setting cannot be changed Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV Conversion Table see section 5 3 2 In both cases the menu as shown below will be displayed 43 5 3 4 CONV CROPPING CONV CROPPING 8 Menu button MEET OPIXEL CONV1 RIGHT OPI XEL TOP OLINE ANALOG FS1LOCK FS2 LOCK BOTTOM OLINE Setting range NE Parameter Default Steps Description LEFT 0
28. 1921680 10 htnl ccorrect cei fs l 192168010 5tnl ccorrecto ceris Correction Mode Balance Differential Sepia _FS1 gt FS2 Correction Mode Balance Differential O Sepia _FS2 gt FS1 Group Adjust off Oon Group Adjust O or Oon White Level White Level FS1 gt FS2 100 0 FS2 gt FS1 100 0 FS1 gt FS2 100 0 FS2 gt FS1 100 0 FS1 gt FS2 100 0 amp FS2 gt FS1 100 0 Black Level Black Level FS1 gt FS2 100 0 FS2 gt FS1 100 0 FS1 gt FS2 100 0 FS2 gt FS1 100 0 Gamma Level Gamma Level FS1 gt FS2 100 0 FS2 gt FS1 100 0 FS1 gt FS2 100 0 FS2 gt FS1 100 0 El B B B El El E E FS1 gt FS2 100 0 El FS2 gt FS1 100 0 El El El El E E E E E FS1 gt FS2 100 0 O Center OBlack Owhite FS1 gt FS2 O Center OBlack Owhite FS2 gt FS1 Sepia Sepia FS2 gt FS1 100 0 Level 25 0 Level 25 0 Color 160 0 Color 160 0 FS1 Color Corrector dialog box FS2 Color Corrector dialog box After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps Correction Mode Parameter Default eee Description Selects a correction mode from Balance RGB Differential YPbPr or Sepia Bal
29. 3 SYNC SDI should be selected only if audio data cannot pass through as AUTO or asynchronous audio data is never input 4 AUD CLK may be effective in the case audio data cannot properly pass through as AUTO or Sync SDI IMPORTANT Use this Alignment enable disable function only if the audio output has noise or is HD SDI ACLK muted Do not change the setting for normal audio output Note that the audio output will be temporally muted when ALIGNMENT is changed from DISABLE to ENABLE while audio signal phases are aligning 99 6 1 4 EMB1 OUT CLOCK EMB1 OUT CLOCK Menu button GROUP1 REFERENCE GROUP2 REFERENCE PROCESS GROUP3 REFERENCE GROUP4 REFERENCE SDIAMBIG Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an audio clock signal per group AUTO for SDI embedded audio output from REFERENCE FSf GROUP 1 REFERENCE INPUT CH 1 2 INPUT CH 3 4 AUTO Automatically selects audio clock input in the NON PCM signal channel if an input NON PCM signal is in the selected SDI embedded audio group REE RENBE Automatically selects audio clock signal GROUP 2 REFERENCE in the smallest numbered channel if all INPUT CH 5 6 signals in the audio group are NON PCM INPUT CH 7 8 Automatically selects audio clock signal synchronized to the output video signal if all signals in the audio group are PCM AUTO REFEFENCE Audio clock signal REFERENCE synchronized to the output video signal G
30. CONV1 2 Ancillary Output Status Displays the status of CEA608 CC BT 1119 2 WSS and RP186 VI ancillary data in the output luminance signals of Converters 1 and 2 and the line number where the data is inserted Status Displays Present if ancillary data is inserted Displays Absent if no ancillary data is inserted If ANC Mode under Converter1 Ancillary Setting in the FS1 FS2 Video System menu Sec 9 4 1 is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting Pass or Blank will be displayed In such case the line number display appears as Line See section 9 4 1 FS1 FS2 Video System for details on ANC Mode and V ANC setting 229 CONV1 2 S2016 3 Output Status Displays the status of S2016 3 in Converter 1 and 2 output signals Status Displays Present if ancillary data is inserted Displays Absent if no ancillary data is inserted If ANC Mode under Converter1 Ancillary Setting in the FS1 FS2 Video System menu Sec 9 4 1 is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting Pass or Blank will be displayed AFD Displays Active Format Description code in binary format AR Displays the aspect ratio as 4 3 or 16 9 and the inserted AFD type Data Displays the detected 8 byte data in hexadecimal format CONV1 2 VI Output Status Displays the status of RP186 VI in Converters 1 and 2 output signals Status Displays Present if ancillary data is inserted Displays Absent if no ancillary data is inserted If ANC Mode under Conver
31. DISABLE ENABLE channel groups DISABLE ENABLE Automatic adjustment DISABLE No adjustment normal setting Selects audio clock signal to use for de embedding and processing audio data in HD SDI input signal AUTO De embeds HD SDI embedded audio data using the audio clock phase data in the embedded audio Synchronous and asynchronous embedded audio signals from 4 audio groups can be de embedded separately HD SDI iis ACLK AUTO SYNC SDI Audio data will be processed as synchronous AUD CLK data if the audio clock phase data is incorrect or jitter is too great SYNC SDI All audio data in 4 audio groups are always processed as synchronous data without refering to the respective audio clock phase data AUD CLK Always uses audio clock phase data in HD SDI embedded audio data to de embed the audio data 1 Embedded audio signal groups are automatically phase adjusted when they are input to the FA 9520 If there is an abnormal audio signal in an audio group whether the audio group is in use or not audio streams may be obstructed by the auto phase adjustment In such cases audio stream obstruction can be avoided using this Alignment enable disable function 2 Embedded audio signals in SD SDI video inputs are always processed as synchronous signals 3 SYNC SDI should be selected only if audio data cannot pass through as AUTO or asynchronous audio data is never input 4 AUD CLK may be effective in the case audio data c
32. FA 10DCCRU connection 1 Allows you to set the TCP port number for the Lodo Bon Nome 30020 FA 95LG GUI connection Allows you to set the time seconds for refreshing Refresh Time 10 the web screen 231 After you are sure that all settings are appropriate click Submit After clicking Submit restart the FA 9520 through the NETWORK RESTART page Otherwise the settings will not be applied 1 The Remote Port Number must match that of the FA 95RU 2 Logo Port Number settings in the FA 9520 and the FA 95LG GUI must match 9 8 3 SNMP SETTING This page allows you to set the SNMP settings After you are sure that all settings are appropriate click Submit After clicking Submit restart the FA 9520 through the NETWORK RESTART page Otherwise the settings will not be applied SNMP System sysName 31 Max char sysLocation 31 Max char sysContact 31 Max char Enable Authen Trap Access Community Read Only 1 public 19 Max char Read Only 2 19 Max char Read Write 1 private 19 Max char Read Write 2 19 Max char Trap Setting Address Community Trap 1 trap 19 Max char Trap 2 19 Max char Trap 3 19 Max char Submi SNMP System Setting Range Item Alphanumeric and Description symbolic characters sysName 31 char max Allows you to set the device name sysLocation 34 char max Allows you to enter comments regarding the device location Allows you to enter
33. LEFT EMB2 CH1 RIGHT EMB2 CH2 EMB1 CH1 16 Selects an audio signal f EMB2 CH1 16 to be assigned to the ASSIGN CENTER EMB2 CH3 LEFT SRRND EMB CH5 AES CH1 8 channel that is selected E under CH SEL RIGHT SRRND EMB2 CH6 DADO CRIS If the same audio signal is selected for multiple CH SEL channels or a NON PCM signal is assigned to an audio channel the menu will be indicated with an i e EMB1 CH1 and DOWNMIX L and DOWNMIX R will be muted To output downmixed audio signals see sections 6 5 1 EMB1 OUT REMAP to 6 5 4 ANALOG OUT REMAP 120 6 9 AUDIO MODE SET MODE 6 9 1 EMB1 SRC MODE Menu button OUT SEL MODE Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a stereo pair of FS1 embedded audio CH SEL CH1 2 CH1 2 CH15 16 signals to be set to pass or by pass the SRC circuit Sets the SRC circuit to pass or by pass the audio channel pair selected under CH SEL AUTO Sets the SRC circuit to pass signals However NON PCM audio signals will be by passed BY PASS Sets the SRC circuit to by pass signals Set to AUTO By pass to output asynchronous audio SRC MODE SRC IN BY PASS signals To embed the asynchronous audio SRC IN signals to SDI video signals an audio clock must be selected under 6 1 4 EMB1 OUT CLOCK for the respective audio groups SRC IN Sets the SRC circuit to pass both PCM or NON PCM signals Useful for the irregular PCM signal with the NON P
34. NTEGER Loudness1 OpA Mesure aoo 09009000 TOP TART a952Loudness1 OpAMesure NTEGER Loudness1 OpA Mesure Clear Q LEAR a952Loudness1 OpAMesureClear NTEGER Loudness2 OpA Control N o 0o 20 o OO a952Loudness2 OpAControl 11 NTEGER O O O O opojojo 254 Object group Front TITLE Item name Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type Write Read Audio Loudness OpA Loudness2 OpA Mesure 0 STOP 1 START a952Loudness2 OpAMesure INTEGER O O Loudness2 OpA Mesure Clear 1 CLEAR a952Loudness2 OpAMesureClear 13 INTEGER o O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 2 175 1 307 3 10 2 fa952LoudnessOpB Audio Loudness OpB Loudness1 OpB Control OFF ON a952Loudness1 OpBControl INTEGER Loudness1 OpB Mesure OFF ON a952Loudness1 OpBMesure INTEGER Loudness1 OpB Mesure Clear clear a952Loudness1 OpBMesureClear NTEGER Loudness2 OpB Control OFF ON a952Loudness2 OpBControl NTEGER Loudness2 OpB Mesure OFF ON a952Loudness2 OpBMesure INTEGER Loudness2 OpB Mesure Clear ajaga aaa clear a952Loudness2 OpBMesureClear O O Oj O O O ofpojojojojo NTEGER OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 4 SYST EM System BY PASS BY PASS SDI OUT1 isable nable a952SDIIn1 Out1Bypass NTEGER BY PASS SDI OUT3 isable na
35. Y white clip level setting range SMPTE 100 color bar when 100 white 2 Y Black Clip Level Setting range 7 5 50 Default 7 5 Y Black clip level setting range SMPTE 100 color bar when 100 black 75 56 3 C White Clip Level Setting range 50 111 Default 111 SMPTE 100 color bar when color 700mVp p RGB CLIP To adjust the RGB clipping select the RGB CLIP under CLIP MODE and then set RGB White Clip and RGB Black Clip Once the RGB CLIP is selected the YPbPr input video signal is converted into an RGB signal in the unit The converted RGB signal is processed so as not to exceed the RGB gamut range set under the RGB White Clip and RGB Black Clip parameters in the menu Then the processed RGB signal is converted again to YPbPr format This correction is used to eliminate out of RGB gamut problems COMPOSITE CLIP To adjust the COMPOSITE clip set WHITE and BLACK Once the COMPOSITE CLIP mode is turned ON YPbPr input video signal is converted to composite signal in the unit The converted composite signal is processed so as not to exceed the composite gamut range set at WHITE and BLACK in the menu The processed composite signal is then reconverted to YPbPr format This correction is used to eliminate out of composite gamut problems This correction is applied to composite output signals 57 300 100 50 0 200 RGB Clip Processing 150 100
36. 0 0 dB Silence Level 72dBFS Y Ch 2 0 0 dB Ch 3 0 0 dB Ch 4 0 0 dB Close i iC Bow After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps Analog Audio Input Gain Setting range Be Parameter Default Steps Description Sets the offset to the input gain for Master 0 0dB 20 0 20 0 dB all analog audio channels CH1 to 20 0 20 0 dB Sets the input gain for the Ch1 Ch4 0 0 dB 0 1 dB individual Analog Audio channel 1 The total value of Master and indivual channel cannot exceed the setting range The setting value will stop at the end of the range Analog Audio Input Level Setting range m Parameter Default Steps Description 10 dBm 0 dBm Sets the signal level for the enti a 4 dBm individual Analog Audio channel 8 dBm Analog Audio System Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description Selects how to terminate the 6000 analog inputs 1 2 and 3 4 LN E Hi Z 6000 6000 termination Hi Z High impedance 1 10 sec Sets the duration to determine Silence Time 2sec 4 whether the input analog audio is 1 sec silent 79 Sets the audio level to determine Silence Level 72dBFS te i E
37. 02 625 50i 04 1080 59i 05 1080 50i 09 1080 24PsF 10 1080 23 98PsF 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59p 21 720 50p 29 Unknown 30 BY PASS 31 DISABLE 32 none 33 cannotdetection fa952OutpA 102 INTEGER O fa9520utpA 102 INTEGER O Option B IN 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50i 04 1080 59i 05 1080 50i 09 1080 24PsF 10 1080 23 98PsF 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59p 21 720 50p 29 Unknown 30 BY PASS 31 DISABLE 32 none 33 cannotdetection fa952InOpA 201 INTEGER O Option B OUT 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50i 04 1080 59i 05 1080 50i 09 1080 24PsF 10 1080 23 98PsF 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59p 21 720 50p 29 Unknown 30 BY PASS 31 DISABLE 32 none 33 cannotdetection fa9520utpA 202 INTEGER O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 2 175 1 307 5 3 1 EM 1 input audio status AUDIO INPUT EMB1 IN AUDIO CH1 Loss PCM Silence NON PCM POM Async Silence Async NON PCM Async Unknown Bypass Blank 10 Disable Oo0 ogRON O fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch1 INTEGER CH2 Ditto fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch2 INTEGER CH3 Ditto fa952StatusSdiEmbiniCh3 INTEGER CH4 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch4 INTEGER CH5 Ditto fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch5 INTEGER CH6 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbiniCh6 INTEGER CH7 Ditto ffa952Sta
38. 232 SOFT OPTION1 149 SOFT OPTION2 149 Specifications 278 SRC Mode Web 184 Status Display Web 999 Switching Between 2 Channel Frame Synchronizers 35 System Requirements 248 SYSTEM Settings Web 202 T TARGET WHITE and TARGET BLACK 51 TEST SIGNAL TT TRAP List 259 TRAP SETTING Web 234 285 U UNIT ALARM 81 Unit Information Web 227 UNIT Ver 147 Unit Video Status Web 222 Unpluging the AC cord 6 User 1 5 LEVEL SET Web 159 User Area 1 2 Web 161 USER SETTING Web 235 USERI1 5 Default Settings 50 USERI 5 LEVEL SET 50 USER1 2 AREA SET 53 Utility Settings Web 217 V VALIDITY 139 Various Signal Status Display STATUS 81 Verification After Dolby Option Removal Replacement 276 Verification After FA 95AIO Removal Replacement 276 Verification After FA 95ALA Removal Replacement 277 VI OUT 96 VIDEO CLIP Setting ranges 56 VIDEO IN STATUS 82 VIDEO INPUT SELECT IN SEL 58 VIDEO INPUT SET 59 Video Loss Mode 156 VIDEO Menus 37 VIDEO OPTION VIDEO OP 68 VIDEO OPTION INPUT 83 VIDEO OPTION OUTPUT 84 VIDEO OUT SELECT OUT SEL 62 VIDEO OUT STATUS 84 VIDEO POSITION 73 VIDEO PROC AMP PROCESS 37 VIDEO Settings Web 154 VIDEO SYSTEM VIDEO SYS 70 Video System Web 202 Video Test Signal Web 172 W WHITE LEVEL 37 WSS AFD ERROR 76 WSS OUT 96 Y Y C Output format 63 64 175 YPbPr CLIP 56 YPbPr RGB Clip Web 173 YPbPr RGB CLIP 55 YPbPr RGB Output Format 68 64 175 286 Warning This equip
39. 525 60 30 position of output videos 625 50 36 1080 59i 68 1080 50i 68 1080 23PsF 68 V POS 0 1080 24PsF 68 720 59p 90 720 50p 90 1080 59p 135 1080 50p 135 LINE Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively 5 9 5 FREEZE SET Allows you to set an operation mode for FREEZE Menu button 65 VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Parameter Default Setting range Description FREEZE OFF OFF ON Turns FREEZE ON OFF MODE FRAME GOD EVEN Selects an operation mode for FREEZE OFF Sets the interval to refresh the images by the STROBE OFF 1 255 number of fields for the field or frame freeze OFF Images are not refreshed Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively 1 Changing the SYNCHRO setting in section 5 9 1 FS MODE SET while FREEZE is set to ON will turn FREEZE OFF FREEZE cannot be set to ON if SYNCHRO is set to LINE FREEZE is always set to OFF at startup These settings are not stored in the event memory When FREEZE is ON VIDEO SYS button flashes AUDIO SYS 73 2 If the input signal is a PSF signal MODE is automatically set to FRAME and the setting cannot be changed See the following FREEZE MODE table for details FREEZE Mode Table Input signal SYNC FRMT setting 525 60 625 50 1080 59i 1080 50i 720 59p 720 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF 108
40. 68 dolbyDecodeOpBCh6 169 dolbyDecodeOpBCh7 70 dolbyDecodeOpBCh8 71 dolbyDownMixOpB L 72 dolbyDownMixOpB R 73 dolbyEncodeOpBCh1 74 dolbyEncodeOpBCh2 75 Loudness1 OpA L 76 Loudness1 OpA R 77 Loudness1 OpA C 78 Loudness1 OpA LFE 79 Loudness1 OpA LS 80 Loudness1 OpA RS 81 Loudness2 OpA L 82 Loudness2 OpA R 83 Loudness2 OpA C 84 Loudness2 OpA LFE 85 Loudness2 OpA LS 86 Loudness2 OpA RS 87 Loudness1 OpA L 88 Loudness1 OpA R 89 Loudness1 OpA C 90 Loudness1 OpA LFE 91 Loudness1 OpA LS 92 Loudness1 OpA RS 93 Loudness2 OpA L 94 Loudness2 OpA R 95 Loudness2 OpA C I96 Loudness2 OpA LFE 97 Loudness2 OpA LS 98 Loudness2 OpA RS 000000000000000000000000 fa952AudioAesOutAssignCh1 INTEGER O Ditto a952AudioAesOutAssignCh2 NTEGER O Ditto a952AudioAesOutAssignCh3 NTEGER O Ditto a952AudioAesOutAssignCh4 NTEGER Ditto a952AudioAesOutAssignCh5 NTEGER Ditto a952AudioAesOutAssignCh6 NTEGER Ditto a952AudioAesOutAssignCh7 oo o oy 2 NTEGER Ditto a952AudioAesOutAssignCh8 NTEGER OJQJO OO OO OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 2 175 1 307 3 3 3 fa952AudioAnalogOutAssign Audio Audio Analog Audio Analog Out Assign 0 emb1Ch1 T emb1Ch2 2 emb1Ch3 3 emb1Ch4 a952AudioAnalogOutAssignCh1 4 emb1Ch5 5 emb1Ch6 NTEGER O 253 Object group Front TITLE Item name
41. 8 Lit green Input signal is present in FS1 or FS2 Es VIDEO IN 56 1 Unlit No input signal is present in FS1 or FS2 5 10 2 One or more assigned audio output signals Lit green FS1 FS2 embedded AES and or analog 6 5 audio are present AUDIO IN No assigned audio signal FS1 FS2 Unlit embedded AES and or analog audio is 6 5 present 5 Status indicator IGENLOCK Lit green Genlock signal input is prosedi 5 10 2 Unlit No genlock signal input is present 5 10 2 Lit green CONTROL SETTING is set to REMOTE REMOTE 7 3 Unlit CONTROL SETTING is set to LOCAL A power failure has occurred Turn the power ES POWER Lit red of the unit OFF and contact your supplier 5 10 1 Unlit Power supply is normal 5 10 1 One or more fans have failed Turn the power Lit red of the unit OFF and replace the failed fans if 5 10 1 FAN ALARM REA j Unlit All fans are operating normally 5 10 1 6 Menu display Used to display menus and make operational settings 4 2 16 Controls F1 F4 Used to change operational settings Turn and select values UNITY buttons The Unity buttons return the settings to the default values e Used to move between parameters Single arrow buttons Indicators light up to indicate the accessible 4 2 direction Arrow buttons Double arrow Used to move between menus same as the buttons menu buttons Indicators light up to indicate the 4 2 accessible direction Menu buttons Used to selec
42. CH16 PCM Async Non PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 PCM Async Normal audio signal asynchronous Silence Async Silence Async Mute signal asynchronous Non PCM Async Non PCM Async Compressed audio data such Unknown as AC3 asynchronous Unknown Unidentifiable o SDI2 Input Audi Item Display Description Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 CH16 of the SDI2 input signal Loss um PCM Loss No audio signals 1 PCM Normal audio signal Silence A Non PCM Silence Mute signal CH1 CH16 PCM Async Non PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 Silence Async PCM Async Normal audio signal asynchronous Non PCM Async Silence Async Mute signal asynchronous Unknown Non PCM Async Compressed audio data such as AC3 asynchronous Unknown Unidentifiable 225 SDI1 2 Output Audio Silence 44 1kHz Silence 32kHz Silence Other Item Display Description PCM Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 through CH16 of the SDI 1 2 output Silence PCM Normal audio signal CH1 CH16 Non PCM Silence Mute signal Unknown Non PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 Blank Unknown Unidentifiable a Blank No audio signal embedding PUTAS BY PASS By passed through SDI3 4 Output Audio Item Display Description PCM Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 j through CH16 of the SDI 3 4 output Silence PCM Norma
43. EMB1 EMB2 SRC BY PASS Treats audio signals as CH1 2 CH15 16 SRC BY PASS NON PCM By passes audio signals through SRC PCM SRC and selects audio clock input in the BY PASS NON PCM signal channel for SDI AUDIO AES Mute CH1 2 CH7 8 SEE j PCM Treats audio signals as PCM standard audio signal By passes audio signals through SRC and select REFERENCE for SDI AUDIO CLOCK Mute Treats audio signals as mute signals 1 Channel status and Validity Bit of input audio channel status can be checked using a wave form monitor 2 Processes the audio signal as described if 9 3 5 SRC Mode is set to Auto 3 Processes the audio signal as described if 9 3 10 SDI Audio Output Settings is set to Auto e CH STATUS FA 9520 determins whether the input audio signal is PCM or NON PCM by the NON PCM flag in the Audio Channel Status ACS If ACS is incorrect the audio signal may cause inproper processing For such case this setting may effective processing the audio signal normally IMPORTANT Use this setting only if there is audio noise or the audio is muted Otherwise do not change the setting from the default setting Validity Bit Mask Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects audio error sensor mode for each stereo channel pair of SDI and AES input audio signals whose channel status Validity Bit flag is 1 EMB1 EMB2 SRC BY PASS Treats audio signals as CH1 2 CH15 16 SRC BY PASS NON PCM By
44. FS2 SDI2 Option Slot A dit Option Slot B Back Color Auto Freeze Selects an operation for the time the signal Loss Mode Back Color Color Bar input selected under Input is lost Output Disable Off Black Blue Back Col Off Ree acK olor Magenta Select a background color Green Cyan Yellow Selects the aspect ratio for SD input signals This setting is used for fixed aspect ratio 4 3 conversions that are performed when SD Aspen 16 9 ASPECT in the CONV menu is set to other than AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 AFD 16 9 AFD ALT 16 9 AFD AFD ALT 1 If Synchro Mode under FS Mode in section 9 4 1 FS1 FS2 Video System is set to Line AVDL or Input Lock the selected Auto Freeze functions the same as Back Color In such case the Auto Freeze display will be grayed out 2 Selectable only if FA 95AIO option is installed in option slot A 3 Selectable only if FA 95AIO option is installed in option slot B AIO Slot A Input Mode Parameter Default Setting range Description YPbPr SMPTE Selects the input signal format of the YPbPr BETACAM FA 95AIO in option slot A Not shown if MOBE MEDHISSME TIS RGB no FA 95AIO is installed in option slot Y C A AIO Slot B Input Mode Parameter Default Setting range Description YPbPr SMPTE Selects the input signal format of the YPbPr BETACAM FA 95AIO in option slot B Not shown if RGB no FA 95AIO is installed in option slot Y C B
45. The status of S334 1 CC SD or CEA708 CC HD can be verified in the ANC1 IN STATUS 1 2 menu see Sec 5 10 22 To insert closed caption data into output video signals enter the following settings which can be separately set for converters 1 and 2 Set ANC MODE to DETAIL in ANC SET Sec 5 9 6 Select the converter output signal to which the data is to be inserted under EMBED in ANC DATA EMBED Sec 5 7 4 Whether closed caption data has been inserted can be verified in ANC OUT Sec 5 10 23 a for CEA608 CC ANC OUT1 Sec 5 10 27 for S334 1 CC SD and CEA708 CC HD e Closed caption data auto conversion If CEA608 or S334 1 CC closed caption data is detected in SD SDI input video signals and the FS1 and or FS2 output format is 1080 59i and or 720 59p the detected closed caption data will be converted to CEA708 CC HD If EMBED is set to ENABLE for CEA708 CC HD in the ANC DATA EMBED menu sec 5 7 4 the converted closed caption data will be automatically inserted into the output video signal Meanwhile if CEA708 CC HD closed caption data is detected in the 1080 59i or 720 59p input signal and the FS1 and or FS2 output format is 525 60 the detected caption data will be converted to CEA608 and S334 1 CC The converted closed caption data will be inserted into output video signals selected under EMBED in ANC DATA EMBED Sec 5 7 4 275 22 Verification After Option Card Removal Replacement An alarm message described in section
46. Y White Clip 109 0 eae Sets the Y signal upper threshold Y Black Clip 7 5 59 Sets the Y signal lower threshold CHROMA 111 0 50 0 111 0 Sets both the upper and lower YPbPr Chroma Clip see 0 5 thresholds of PbPr signals RGB CLIP 25 Parameter Default S Description WHITE 300 0 50 PS Sets the upper threshold of RGB RGB White Clip i 0 5 color space BLACK 200 0 200 50 Sets the lower threshold of RGB RGB Black Clip Soe 0 5 color space 55 5 5 2 COMPOSITE CLIP COMPOSITE CLIP 2 6 Menu button MODE COMPOSITE CLIP WHITE 150 0 CLIP BLACK 50 0 BELA FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Setting range Xam Parameter Default Steps Description COMPOSITE CLIP enables CLIP MODE OFF iid OFF clipping on the composite output Clip Mode COMPOSITE CLIP signals WHITE 150 0 50 150 Sets the upper threshold of Composite White Clip TES 0 596 analog composite color space BLACK 50 0 50 50 Sets the lower threshold of Composite Black Clip ee 0 5 analog composite color space The COMPOSITE CLIP settings are effective only on the analog composite outputs The settings are not effective on the SDI1 2 and SDI3 4 outputs To enable the COMPOSITE CLIP menu set YPbPr RGB CLIP to OFF 5 5 3 VIDEO CLIP Setting Ranges YPbPr CLIP Y Signal Settings D Y White Clip Level Setting range 50 109 Default 109 109 100
47. ccococcncccnooccccncoconncononnnononcnnoncnnnnnnonnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnincnnns 180 9 3 3 Analog Audio Input sssssssssseee HH eene 182 9 3 4 Audio Delay SDI AES Analog eene 183 9 3 5 SRC Mode SDI AES ooooocococococccccoconnnnnoncnncnccnonnnnnonnnncnnononnnnnnnncnnnnennnnnnnnnnnncnncnnanas 184 9 3 6 Audio Output Polarity SDI AES Analog ssssssseee 185 9 3 Audio Mappingisss ee ea tb bata 186 9 3 8 Audio Master Gain Settings ssssssssssssssssssseeeeeenme enn 188 9 3 9 Down Mix Setting ssssssssssseeeeneeemeenen ener n enne nnns 189 9 3 10 SDI Audio Output Settings sssssssssssssseemeeeeeenene eee 191 9 3 11 AES Audio Output Settings ssssssssssssssseseseeeenenene eere 192 9 3 12 Analog Audio Output Settings sssssssssssssssseeeeneeeennn 192 9 3 13 Dolby E Digital Decoder sssssssssssseeeeeee eene 193 9 3 14 Dolby AUX Output Select eene 196 9 3 15 Dolby E Encoder oce ede Rete dest AAA A 197 9 3 16 Automatic Loudness Adjustment FA 95ALA ssssssesssssee 199 9 4 SYSTEM SENGS ciento eh aa Pto toot A aed a date oe th dened 202 9 4 1 FS1 FS2 Video System sssessssssssssssssseeeee e enne eterne nenne nennen 202 924 2 Audio SyStE Me iere ii 207 934 3 ANC Seltlnigsii a ioci Manat e ier ee te py ed ase eire edad a drerit exe 210 9 4 4 Composite Setting
48. optional in Japan 7 13 SOFT OPTION2 0 0 Menu button FA 95L6 NONE FA 95C0 INSTALLED STATUS OTHER Parameter Default Setting range Description INSTALLED Logo Generator is installed posso NONE Logo Generator is not installed INSTALLED FA 95CO option is installed as g g NONE FA 95CO option is not installed 149 8 Event Memory The FA 9520 can store 100 event memories as well as sets of settings each of which are stored for each format Every press of the EVENT button alternates the menus EVENT LOAD lit green EVENT SAVE lit red and EVENT SETUP lit orange To go to the desired page press the EVENT button a few times or press the EVENT button once and the up or down single arrow button to move between EVENT pages 8 1 EVENT LOAD Menu button EVENT Parameter Default Setting range Description 1 DEFAULT Selects the number of an event you NO EVENTIS want to load EVENT100 Selects the event loading mode LOAD ALL Loads all setting data LOAD ALL stored in events MODE LOAD ALL LOAD FS1 ONLY LOAD FS1 ONLY Loads only FS1 LOAD FS2 ONLY setting data stored in events LOAD FS2 ONLY Loads only FS2 setting data stored in events Loads the event that is selected eer F3 R under MODE when the F3 UNITY button is pressed 1 DEFAULT loads the default settings 2 Only the FS1 or FS2 settings that are shown with or in the men
49. 0 0 dB TE 008 08 008 08 008 008 08 Cue tud After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Dolby Decoder Input Select Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects source audio signals to input to the Dolby decoder AUX Input Input signal in optional Dolby Emb do 15 16 input connector Dolby IN Dolby Input AUX Input E ece j Embeded 1 Ch 1 2 15 16 Embeded 2 Ch 1 2 15 16 Embedded FS1 audio signal AES 1 2 7 8 Embeded 2 Ch 1 2 15 16 Embedded FS2 audio signal AES 1 2 7 8 AES input audio signal Dolby Digital 32bit Dolby Digital 16bit 1CH Dolby Digital 16bit 2CH Displays signal type and bit width of Dolby Digital 16bit 1 2CH signal selected under Dolby Input Bit Stream Dolby E 24bit PCM Normal audio signal Dolby E 20bit Loss Nosianal Dolby E 16bit 9397 50 Signa PCM Error Unidentifiable Loss Error 193 Parameter Default Setting range Description Program Config Dolby E 5 1 2 Dolby E 5 1 2x1 Dolby E 4 4 Dolby E 4 2x2 Dolby E 4 2 2x1 Dolby E 4 4x1 Dolby E 4x2 Dolby E 3x2 2x1 Dolby E 2x2 4x1 Dolby E 2 6x1 Dolby E 8x1 Dolby E 5 1 Dolby E 4 2 Dolby E 4 2x1 Dolby E 3x2 Dolby E 2x2 2x1 Dolby E 2 4x1 Dolby E 6x1 Dolby E 4 Dolby E 2 2 Dolby E 2 2x1 Dolby E 4x1 Dolby E 7 1 Dolby E 7 1Screen NON Dolby E Displays Dolby E program configuration Coding mode or status
50. 1 4 1 20175 1 307 5 3 24 Analog output audio status cH1 Fd ad a952StatusAnalogOutCh1 NTEGER o ANALOG Out gt AUDIO OUTPUT IAUDIO CH2 Ditto a952StatusAnalogOutCh2 2 NTEGER O CH3 Ditto a952StatusAnalogOutCh3 3 NTEGER O CH4 Ditto a952StatusAnalogOutCh4 a NTEGER O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 5 3 50 Option A loudness status Momentary IN 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness1 OpA InMomentary _ 1 NTEGER 9 Short Term IN 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness1 OpA InShort 2 NTEGER O LOUDNESS Long Term IN 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness1 OpA InLong 3 NTEGER O L oudness MEAS1A Momentary OUT 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness1 OpA OutMomentary 4 NTEGER O Option A Short Term OUT 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness1 OpA OutShort 5 NTEGER O p Long Term OUT 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness1 OpA OutLong 6 NTEGER O Session Time Elapsed time a952StatusLoudness1 OpA SessionTime 7 NTEGER O LOUDNESS Momentary IN 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness2 OpA InMomentary 11 INTEGER O MEAS2A Short Term IN 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness2 OpA InShort 42 INTEGER O 257 Object group Front TITLE Item name Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type Write Read Long Term IN 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness2 OpA InLong 13 INTEGER O Momentary OUT 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness2 OpA OutMomentary 14 INTEGER O Short Term OUT 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness2 OpA OutShort 15 NTEGER O Long Term OUT
51. 1 Line 1 Lines ianals Line AVDL NCC 2063 2063 clk 720 H Phase 0 clk 1 clk 3 Adjusts the horizontal and vertical phases of the system referring to 0 Line genlock signal This setting is 720V Phase Frame Input 375 375 Lines applied to 720 format output 1 Line 1 Lines signals Line AVDL 1 These settings cannot be made if there is no reference signal input 2 The default value varies depending on the Synchro Mode setting as shown in the below table The set value will be reset to its relevant default value whenever the Synchro Mode setting is changed SYNCHRO IN SEL Default FRAME LINE SDI1 2 0 Composite 525 60 Composite 625 50 Component Y C COMPONENT others AVDL SDI1 2 Composite 525 60 Composite 625 50 Component Y C COMPONENT others A BR oO Aa ay B A oj 203 FS1 FS2 Video Position Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description 525 60i 92 625 50 92 1080 59i 240 1080 50i 240 H Position 0 Pixel 1080 23PsF 240 1080 24PsF 240 720 59p 160 720 50p 160 1080 59p 240 1080 50p 240 Pixel Adjusts the horizontal vertical 525 60i 30 position of output videos 625 60i 36 1080 59 68 1080 50i 68 V Position 0 Line 1080 23PsF 68 1080 24PsF 68 720 59p 90 720 50p 90 1080 59p 135 1080 50p 135 Line FS1 FS2 Freeze Settings
52. 106 ANALOG IN AUDIO 89 ANALOG IN DELAY 116 ANALOG IN GAIN 106 ANALOG IN LEVEL 106 ANALOG IN SYSTEM 107 ANALOG OUT AUDIO 92 ANALOG OUT GAIN 110 ANALOG OUT LEVEL 106 ANALOG OUT MONO 107 ANALOG OUT REMAP 114 Analog Output Level Relative to the Digital Input Level 237 ANALOG POLARITY 123 ANC DATA EMBED 65 ANC DETECT LINE 60 ANC DETECT SEL 60 ANC EMBED LINE 66 ANC LOSS SET 75 ANC OUT 95 ANC OUT1 97 ANC SET 74 ANC Status Web 228 ANC1 IN STATUS 94 ANCI IN STATUS 1 2 95 Ancillary Data Packet Name List 262 Ancillary Data Types 65 Anti Aliasing 167 Arrow Buttons 32 Aspect Raito 166 Aspect Ratio Conversion with AFD 267 AUDIO DELAY 115 Audio Delay Web 183 AUDIO DELAY Settings 115 AUDIO ERR SENSE 138 AUDIO GROUP 76 AUDIO IN DETECT1 85 AUDIO IN DETECT2 85 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING 111 Audio Mapping Web 186 Audio Master Gain Settings Web 188 AUDIO MODE SET MODE 121 AUDIO OPTION AUDIO OP 125 Audio Output Polarity WEB 185 AUDIO OUTPUT1 86 AUDIO OUTPUTS 86 AUDIO Settings 98 AUDIO Settings Web 177 Audio Status Web 225 Audio System Web 207 AUDIO SYSTEM Settings AUDIO SYS 137 Auto Channel Pairing for non PCM Audio Inputs 111 Auto Video Optimizer AVO 47 Auto Video Optimizer AVO Web 156 Automatic Loudness Adjustment FA 95ALA 132 Automatic Loudness Adjustment WEB 199 AVO SETTING 47 AVO Setup 158 AVO SETUP 48 B Backup Parameter Web 219 Basic Operations 28 BLACK LEVEL 38 BY PASS SETT
53. 2 2 INNOVATIONS IN VIDEO and AUDIO TECHNOLOGY OPERATION MANUAL FA 9520 FA 9520 Mode Frame Synchronizer FA 95PS FA 95DACBL FA 95AIO FA 95CO FA 95D D DE E FA 95ALA FA 95RU FA 10DCCRU 3 Edition Rev 2 SOFT Ver 2 03 higher FOR A COMPANY LIMITED Edition Revision History Edit Rev Date Description Where 1 2013 03 15 First edition V0100 2 2013 05 15 Added FA 95ALA FA 95AIO FA 95D D DE E 6 10 6 etc FA 95CO options and Auto Video Optimizer feature 3 2013 05 31 Added FA 95RU option 3 1 2014 06 02 Corrected SNMP List 18 3 2 2014 07 08 Added FA 10DCCRU option 7 3 9 8 2 24 1 etc Software Versions and Supported Options bes d Supported Version Feature Option Mote FPGA1 1 00 or higher FA 95PS First edition FPGA2 1 00 or higher FA 95DACBL FPGA3 1 00 or higher SOFT 1 00 or higher FPGA1 1 10 or higher FA 95ALA Supports FA 95ALA FA 95AIO FA 95DE DE E FPGA2 1 10 or higher FA 95AIO FA 95CO options and Auto Video Optimizer feature FPGA3 1 00 or higher FA 95AVO FA 95D D and FA 95DE E communication methods with SOFT 1 10 or higher FA 95D D the main unit modified to support FA 95ALA a 9 FA 95DE E Supported FA 95D D FA 95DE E versions FA 95CO FPGA1 1 00 FPGA2 2 00 1 10 or lower is inoperative in this unit FPGA1 1 10 or higher FA 95RU Modified FA 95RU to add FA 9520 support FPGA2 1 10 or higher FA 95RU Ver 6 00 or higher c
54. 2 5 Color Corrector and AVO Modes ssssssssssssseeneeeeen enne nnne 40 5 3 CONV UP DOWN CROSS CONVERTER sse eren 41 5 91 CONV MODE anota enger e dm t d aie a Cie lee 42 5 3 2 CONV Conversion Table sssssssssssssseeeen eene nennen 43 5 3 3 CONV SIZE POS n iter een tege noe e te ULT eabad es ER ROLE pene ed eL EEE etna an tp rp ids 43 5 3 4 CONV CROPPING aiii ere dede e ege pt ode ee eo ede cune dus 44 5 3 5 CONV IMPROVE ts O vetet codd ne o e dut ead 45 5 3 6 CONV SIDE RGB iii adie eileen eaa 46 5 4 Auto Video Optimizer AVO cccccccecceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeceeseaeeeeeeeee nennen nnne nennen 47 9 4 1 AVO SETTING ven het tite a a baee t 47 5 4 2 AVO SETUP itti tbe nr Rt niet edo ede reete dafs 48 5 4 2 1 About Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay Settings sssss 49 9 4 3 USERI 5 LEVELS ET ats oink m Reg diee eet t iot a ees 50 5 4 4 USERI 2 AREA SET one ne pee RH ER SERE ELE ER ES ABER RE EE ARE SERERE MAYER eR 53 5 4 4 1 Manual Level AdjustMeNt ooooococccoocccncconcconnnoncnonnnonnnonnnonnnonnnonononononnnnnnconccnnncnnss 54 9 9 CLIP VIDEO CLIP our 55 5 5 1 YPDPrI RGB GLEIP siete dt ne tede 55 5 b 2 COMPOSITE CLIP niic AA eet ees 56 5 5 3 VIDEO CLIP Setting RQaNges cococccccccnoococonccccnccconnnanonncnnnnocnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnncnnnnaninens 56 5 6 VIDEO INPUT SELECT IN SEL sssssssseseeeeneee
55. 22 1 Alert may appear when turning the FA 9520 on after removing or changing the location of the FA 95D D FA 95DE E FA 95AIO or FA 95ALA option Press the F1 UNITY button to return to the normal startup screen The alarm message indicates settings set while the FA 95D D FA 95DE E FA 95AIO or FA 95ALA option is being installed into option slots A and B have not be retained due to the removal or change of the option or options In such case the settings that are only available with those options will be reset to default See section 22 2 Verification After Dolby Option Removal Replacement and correct any necessary settings if you have removed the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E See section 22 3 Verification After FA 95AIO Removal Replacement and correct the necessary settings if you have removed the FA 95AIO See section 22 4 Verification After FA 95ALA Removal Replacement and correct the necessary settings if you have removed the FA 95ALA The alarm message appears only once when starting the FA 9520 after removing or changing the location of the FA 95D D FA 95DE E FA 95AIO or FA 95ALA option 22 1 Alert 22 2 Verification After Dolby Option Removal Replacement Reset the following menu items if the FA 95D D option card is removed or moved ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 16 in the EMB1 OUT REMAP menu Sec 6 5 1 ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 8 in the EMB2 OUT REMAP menu Sec 6 5 2 ASSIGN settings for CH 1
56. 2x1 1 4 4 1 4 2x2 4 2 2x1 4 4x1 4x2 3x2 2x1 2x2 4x1 Selects Dolby E encoder program 2 6x1 1 configuration oe See Dolby E Encoder Input Channel Assignment table in section 13 Dolby PROGRAM nte 4 2 E Decoder Encoder Channel 4 2x1 Assignment Table for channel 3x2 assignments of respective 2x2 2x1 configurations 2 4x1 6x1 4 2 2 2 2x1 4x1 TA 7 1 Screen 20bit Selects the bit width of the Dolby E BIT DEPTH 20bit 16bit encoder output FS1 Selects a video output to which the FRAME REF FS1 FS2 Dolby E encoder outputis synchronized FS 1 or FS 2 1 If BIT DEPTH is set to 16bit the will be displayed and the program functions as 5 1 To select these configurations set BIT DEPTH to 20bit 2 See section 5 7 VIDEO OUT SELECT OUT SEL for details on FS1 and FS2 settings 130 6 10 1 8 METADATA INPUT This menu is displayed only if FA 95DE E option is installed in option slot A METADATA SELECT NPUT INTERNAL A Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Menu names and menu pages for the option in slot B chang as shown below METADATA INPUT B 23 8 Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a metadata to be used for Dolby E encoding INTERNAL Uses the program configuration and bit depth selected in the INTERNAL 6 9 7 Dolby ENCODER SETTING menu SELECT INTERNAL Dolby DEC OUT Other metadata will be reset to default Dol
57. 3 4 TENIA SET 200 Hi Z 6000 6000 termination Hi Z High impedance Sets the duration to determine SILENCE TIME 2sec 1 10sec whether the input analog audio is silent 779 Sets the audio level to determine SILENCE LVL 72dBFS da whether the input analog audio is 6dBFS Step silent 107 6 4 OUTPUT GAIN CONTROL Allows you to adjust audio signal output gain 6 4 1 MASTER OUT GAIN GAIN SET 0 0dB Meng pusan MUTE ESQUE F CONV2 MASTER Parameter Default Seng renge Description Steps 20 0 20 0 dB Sets audio gain for the signal GAIN SEE 0 0dB 0 1 dB selected under CH SEL MUTE OFF p ON Mutes all audio channels 6 4 2 EMB1 OUT GAIN OUT EMB1 GAIN Menu button CONV2 MASTER Parameter Default es Description Selects an audio channel from z among FS1 embedded audio CR SEL eH ido channels CH1 through 16 for which to set audio gain 20 0 20 0dB Sets audio output gain for the CANSEL 0 0dB 0 1 dB signal selected under CH SEL Sets the offset to audio output MASTER 20 0 20 0 dB gain for all audio channels CH1 0 1 dB j through 16 in FS1 OFF ON Mutes all embedded audio MUTE OFF ON channels in FS1 1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range If the range is exceeded the alert will be displayed as 20 0dB or 20 0dB 108 6 4 3 EMB2 OUT GAIN
58. 4 3 F 4 3 Embeds BT1119 WSS F 4 3 code 8 to FS1 and or 2 Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively 5 9 9 AUDIO GROUP Allows you to set whether or not to embed audio signals as a group Menu button 69 VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Parameter Default Setting range Description DISABLE Does not insert the GROUP1 GROUP1 ENABLE Pee embedded audio ENABLE Inserts the GROUP1 embedded audio DISABLE DISABLE Does not insert the GROUP2 GROUP2 ENABLE ENABLE 2 embedded audio ENABLE Inserts the GROUP2 embedded audio DISABLE DISABLE Does not insert the GROUP3 GROUP3 ENABLE ENABLE 2 embedded audio ENABLE Inserts the GROUP3 embedded audio DISABLE DISABLE Does not insert the GROUP4 GROUP4 ENABLE ENABLE 2 embedded audio ENABLE Inserts the GROUP4 embedded audio Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively 1 GROUPA embedded audio cannot be inserted into SD SDI output signals regardless of the GROUPA setting 2 The setting is ineffective if the input and output formats are the same and H ANC is set to IN DATA in the 5 9 6 ANC SET menu 76 5 9 10 TEST SIGNAL Internal test signal settings Video and audio signal processing will stop and a test signal will be output from all output connectors 70 Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Parameter Default Setting range Descr
59. 7 1 for each input selected in the FS Input Select menu Sec 9 2 1 IMPORTANT Adjust the audio delay as required in the Audio Delay menu Sec 9 3 4 to account for any additional video signal delay produced by changing Frame Delay settings in the Frame Delay menu Sec 9 2 3 158 9 2 2 2 User 1 5 LEVEL SET Clicking Set User on the Auto Video Optimizer dialog box opens the User1 5 setting dialog box 2 AVO User Level Setting Mozilla Firefox 192 168 0 10 html avo_level2 cgi fs 1 User 1 In White Level 99 0 In Black Level Target White Level Target Black Level In White Level In Black Level Target White Level Target Black Level In White Level In Black Level Target White Level 93 0 Target Black Level In White Level In Black Level Target White Level 95 0 Target Black Level 12 0 In White Level 93 0 Y In Black Level 7 0 Target White Level 97 0 Target Black Level 17 0 After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps The Level drop down menu in the AVO dialog box has five options of user settings User 1 through 5 Each User1 5 is composed of four level settings such as In White Level In Black Level Target White Le
60. 8 DOWNMIX1 2 SET DOWNMIX2 L R LFE CH 2 INVALID Dolby DECA 1 8 4 Dolby DEC Dolby decoder output CH EMB1 2 CH4 DMA gu audio channels ul da See sec 6 10 1 FA 95D D Dolby DECB 1 8 5 FA 95DE E INVALID Dolby DMB L R Ls CH P Dolby DM Dolby decoder downmixed i EMB1 2 CH5 output audio channels See sec 6 10 1 FA 95D D Rs CH INVALID FA 95DE E EMB1 2 CH6 Invalid channels due to their Mode settings will be indicated as INVALID 1 Default values of Channel 1 are EMB1 CH1 6 and Channel 2 are EMB2 CH9 14 2 The LFE channel is not subject to measurement but to adjustment 3 3 If MODE is set to MONAURAL the output signal for LOUD 1 2 R selected in the SDI AES or Analog REMAPPING menu will be the same as that for LOUD 1 2 L 4 Shown if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E is installed in option slot A 5 Shown if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E is installed in option slot B 135 6 10 2 5 LOUDNESS STANDARD Settings in this menu are common for the FA 95ALA in option slot A channels 1 and 2 and in option slot B channels 1 and 2 LOUD Co zx cn TORA oz a mgo az Azmc Am gt STANDARD AR 2 L rn 20 r cC VL Y RM M B 4 4 0 ooo 223r D c m eO o c K 0 S 300 S 280 Parameter Default Setting range Description STANDARD ARIB ARIB ATSC A85 EBUR128 ITU R1770 Allows
61. 9 3 16 Automatic Loudness Adjustment FA 95ALA Clicking block 13 on the audio block diagram when the FA 95ALA option is installed in option slot A B opens the Automatic Loudness Adjustment dialog box Settings for the FA 95ALA in both option slots are the same but can be set separately 7 Loudness Settings SLOT A Mozilla Firefox b 1921680 10 ntmi loudness cei slotA Loudness Measurement 1 Loudness Measurement 2 Loudness Standard Setting Momentary Short Term Long Term Momentary Short Term Long Term Standard ARIB TR B32 v Input 0 0LKFS 0 0 LKFS 0 0 LKFS Input 0 0 LKFS 0 0LKFS 0 0 LKFS Target Level 24 0LKFS Output Output Momentary 400ms Short Term 3000ms Start Stop Start Stop Session Time 0 00 00 Session Time 0 00 00 Loudness Control Settings 1 Loudness Control Settings 2 Loudness Control Off O 0n Loudness Control Off O 0n Response Slow Normal v Response Slow Normal v Response Fast Normal Response Fast Normal v Target Level 24 0LKFS 0 0LU Target Level 24 0LKFS 0 0LU v Minimum Gain 20 0dB v Minimum Gain 20 0dB v Maximum Gain 00dB Maximum Gain 00dB Loudness Channel Assign 1 Loudness Channel Assign 2 Mode O Monaural Stereo 5 1ch Mode O Monaural Stereo 5 1ch Left Down Mix 2 Right 4 Left EMB2 CH 1 v Right EMB1CH2 hd Right EMB2 CH2 v Center EMB1 CH 3 Center EMB2 CH 3 LFE EMB1
62. 9520 Restart 235 10 Downmix Block Diagram lt Surround Mix Lt Rt gt Ls Rs surround channels are summed to produce a mono surround channel and mixed to right and left channels by the 180 degree phase difference LFE channel is discarded Ls 9 Lst Rs a Rs 2 SURROUND MIX level setting i 3 MASTER LVL setting lt Stereo Mix Lo Ro gt E For Stereo Monitors LFE channel is not subjected to the mix Ls Y Gain Adjust Gain Adjust j 1 CENTER MIX level setting 3 2 SURROUND MIX level setting 3 MASTER LVL setting j LFE channel is not subjected to the mix Monaural Mix Lo Ro Lo Ro gt For Monaural Monitors e n O x 1 CENTER MIX level setting i 2 SURROUND MIX level setting 3 MASTER LVL setting 2 j LFE channel is not subjected to the mix Rs 236 11 ANALOG DIGITAL Audio Input Output Level 11 1 Analog Output Level Relative to the Digital Input Level Digital Reference Level 18dBFS ANALOG OUT LEVEL setting Digital audio input level 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 24 dBFS 16 dBm 6 dBm 2 dBm 2 dBm 20 dBFS 12 dBm 2 dBm 2 dBm 6 dBm 18 dBFS 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 0 dBFS 8dBm 18 dBm 22 dBm CLIP Digital Reference Level 20dBFS ANALOG OUT LEVEL setting Digital audio input level 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 24 dBFS
63. 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness2 OpA OutLong 16 NTEGER O Session Time Elapsed time a952StatusLoudness2 OpA SessionTime 17 INTEGER O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 5 3 51 Option B loudness status Momentary IN 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness1 OpB InMomentary _ 1 INTEGER O Short Term IN 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness 1 OpB InShort 2 INTEGER O LOUDNESS Long Term IN 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness 1 OpB InLong 3 NTEGER O MEAS1A Momentary OUT 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness 1 OpB OutMomentary 4 NTEGER O Short Term OUT 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness1 OpB OutShort 5 NTEGER O Long Term OUT 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness1 OpB OutLong 6 NTEGER O Loudness Session Time Elapsed time a952StatusLoudness1 OpB SessionTime 7 INTEGER O Option B Momentary IN 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness2 OpB InMomentary 11 INTEGER O Short Term IN 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness2 OpB InShort 12 NTEGER O LOUDNESS Long Term IN 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness2 OpB InLong 13 INTEGER O MEAS2A Momentary OUT 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness2 OpB OutMomentary 14 INTEGER O Short Term OUT 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness2 OpB OutShort 15 INTEGER O Long Term OUT 99 9 0 a952StatusLoudness2 OpB OutLong 16 NTEGER O Session Time Elapsed time a952StatusLoudness2 OpB SessionTime 17 INTEGER O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 5 3 100 Option A Dolby status 0 loss AUX IN 1 BCN a952StatusDolbyOpAAuxin 1 INTEGER O 3 unknown 0 pcm AUX OUT 1 nonPCM a952StatusDolbyOpAAuxOut 2 INTEGER O 2 none 00 Loss 01 525 6
64. Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown FS1 FS2 SD Phase Setting range ER Parameter Default Steps Description 864 864 clk H Phase 0 clk 1 clk Adjusts the horizontal and vertical phases of 0 Line the system referring to genlock signal This V Phase lr a 31 d Te setting is applied to SD output signals Line AVDL 1 These settings cannot be made if there is no reference signal input 2 The default value varies depending on the Synchro Mode setting as shown in the below table The set value will be reset to its relevant default value whenever the Synchro Mode setting is changed 202 SYNCHRO IN SEL Default FRAME 0 LINE SDI1 2 Composite 525 60 Composite 625 50 Component Y C Component others AVDL SDI1 2 Composite 525 60 Composite 625 50 Component Y C Component others A BR Ow Aa a B BR OO A FS1 FS2 HD Phase 1080 V Phase Frame Input 563 563 Lines Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description 1375 1375 clk 1080 H Phase 0 clk 1 clk 3 Adjusts the horizontal and vertical phases of the system referring to 0 Line genlock signal This setting is applied to 1080 format output
65. DIGITAL SILENCE Se BY PASS SETTING OSD LINE MASK COMPOSITE SET1 e COMPOSITE SET2 UNIT ALARM SVIDEO IN STATUS VIDEO OP INPUT 12 VIDEO OUT STATUS VIDEO OP OUTPUT 12 AUDIO IN DETECT1 AUDIO IN DETECT2 AUDIO OUTPUT1 MEUM AUDIO OUTPUT2 lt EMB1 IN AUDIO CH1 16 Qe CONTROL SETTING EMB2 IN AUDIO CH1 16 FRONT OPERATION AES IN AUDIO CH1 8 FRONT PANEL SET STATUS eeu O CHE dO OGPI SETTING THER Q NETWORK INFO O SDI3 4 OUT AUDIO CH1 16 AES OUT AUDIO CH1 8 UNIT Ver ANALOG OUT AUDIO CH1 4 OPTION A Ver Dolby OP A AUX 8 8 OPTION B Ver Dolby OP B AUX 7 OTHER OPTION OOAFD IN STATUS SOFT OPTION1 OANC IN STATUS SOFT OPTION2 OANC IN STATUS1 2 SOANC OUT S2016 OUT OVI OUT OWSS OUT OANC OUT1 REO VIDEO menus AUDIO menus 1 Shown if the optional FA 95AIO is installed in option slot A 2 Shown if the optional FA 95AIO is installed in option slot B 3 Hidden if the optional FA 95DACBL is installed 4 Shown if the optional FA 95ALA is installed in option slot A 5 Shown if the optional FA 95ALA is installed in option slot B 6 Shown if the optional FA 95D D is installed in option slot A 7 Shown if the optional FA 95D D is installed in option slot B 8 Shown if the optional FA 95DE E is installed in option slot A 9 Shown if the optional FA 95DE E is installed in option slot B lt gt Can be navigated to using double up and down arrow buttons is not shown in the menu display 00 Settings for FS1 and FS
66. Delay setting dialog box for the corresponding FS 2 Frame Delay FS1 Mozilla Firefox DER 1921680 10 html fdelay cgi fs 1 an E d Frame Delay Frame Delay 0 Frame EL E urity 2 Frame Delay FS2 Mozilla Firefox DER db 192168010 htmi fdelay2cei fs 2 i E Frame Delay Frame Delay 0 Frame Hu El unity After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps Parameter Default Setting range Description Frame Delay 0 0 8Frame Sets the amount of frame delay Selecting Odd Even for Forced Field Synchro Mode to Frame Sync under FS Mode in 9 4 1 FS1 FS2 Video System while 9 2 1 FS Input Select is set to Composite and Frame Delay to 0 frame Frame Delay will always reset to 1 frame Set Frame Delay beween 1 and 8 frames Also Frame Delay cannot be set if Synchro Mode is set to Line Sync or AVDL under FS Mode in section 9 4 1 FS1 FS2 Video System 162 9 2 4 Proc Amp Clicking block 3 on the video block diagram opens the Proc Amp setting dialog box for the corresponding FS 2 Process Amplifier EST Mozilla Firefox 2 Process Amplifier ES2 Mozilla Firefox ye 1921680 10 html procamp2cei7ts 1 1921680 10 htmU procamp cei7fs 2 Vid
67. Downmix 2 Assign EMB2 CH 1 EMB2 CH 2 EMB2 CH 3 EMB2 CH 5 EMB2 CH 6 Left Right Center Left Surround Right Surround See section 6 7 DOWN MIX1 SET and 6 8 DOWN MIX2 SET for details Downmix 1 2 Setting Parameter Default Setting range Description Stereo Mode Stereo Surround Selects a mode to downmix audio signals Monaural SUB Sets the Ls Rs surround channels level Surround Mix 3dB 9dB 0 codB Excludes surround channels from 0 the downmix Sets the C center channel level 3dB The output level after the downmix l 3dB retains the original center channel level Center Mix 3dB 4 5 dB 4 5dB 6dB Used to reduce the audio level 6dB in case it becomes too loud due to the center channel audio mixing to both the right and left channels Sets the level for the downmixed audio 3dB signals as a whole Master Level 3dB Auto If set to Auto Down MIX Master Level changes according to the Downmix Mode and Surround Mix level selections 1 If Master Level is set to Auto Master Level changes as shown in the below table Surround Mix Level Down Mix Mode 3dB 6dB 9dB 0 dB Stereo approx 7 7dB approx 6 9dB approx 6 3dB approx 4 6dB Surround approx 9 9dB approx 8 7dB approx 7 7dB approx 4 6dB Monaural approx 12 9dB approx 12 0dB approx 11 4dB approx 9 5dB 189 Downmix Assign
68. EBU Analog Audio Audio Delay Audio Processing Functions Set per channel Interfaces Ethernet Frame Sync mode Line Sync mode AVDL mode H phase 1 2 H to 1 2 H V phase 1 2 frame to 1 2 frame Maximum delay 1 frame 1H Minimum delay 1H H phase 1 2 H to 1 2 H V phase 1 2 frame to 1 2 frame Maximum delay 1H 1 2 H Minimum delay 1 2 H H phase 1 2 H to 1 2 H V phase 1 2 frame to 1 2 frame Maximum delay 5 H 1 2 H Minimum delay 1 2 H HD Maximum delay 1 H 1 2 H Minimum delay 1 2 H SD Maximum 8 frames Frame Sync or Input Sync Up Down Cross converter Aspect ratio converter Proc Amp Color Corrector Automatic video optimizer AVO Second converter Down Cross Aspect ratio Video level 0 0 to 200 0 Chroma level 0 0 to 200 0 Black level 20 0 to 100 0 HUE 179 8 to 180 YPsPrR mode RGB mode Composite mode Balance mode Differential mode Sepia mode 3G HD 16 channels Group 1 to 4 48 kHz 16 bit to 24 bit synchronous asynchronous SD 16 channels Group 1 to 4 48 kHz 16 bit to 24 bit synchronous only Unbalanced 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC x 4 for AES EBU input output Maximum 4 pairs of stereo channels 32 44 1 48 kHz 16 bit to 24 bit Balanced or unbalanced 4 inputs 2 stereo channels 25 pin D sub female x 1 for analog audio input output 6000 or High impedance 48 kHz 24 bit 3G HD 16 channels Group 1 to 4 48 kHz 16 20 24 bit synchronous async
69. High Open Collector FS1 FS2 COMPOSITE input signal is selected Low FS1 FS2 COMPOSITE FS1 FS2 COMPOSITE input signal is not selected High Open Collector 3 FS1 FS2 OP A input signal is selected Low Pod Foe ORA S1 FS2 OP A input signal is not selected High Open Collector 4 S1 FS2 OP B input signal is selected Low Bod Foe OEB S1 FS2 OP B input signal is not selected High Open Collector FS1 FS2 KEYER is enabled Low FS1 FS2 KEYER FS1 FS2 KEYER is disabled High Open Collector LOUD1 2A CTRL LOUD1 2B CTRL Each LOUDNESS CONTROL is set to ON LOUDNESS measurement is active Each LOUDNESS CONTROL is set to OFF LOUDNESS measurement is inactive Low High Open Collector 1 FAN ALARM goes to low active if either one of two fans fails 2 Effective if the optional FA 95PS is installed 3 Effective if the optional FA 95AIO is installed in option slot A 4 Effective if the optional FA 95AIO is installed in option slot B 5 Effective if the optional FA 95ALA is installed in option slot A 6 Effective if the optional FA 95ALA is installed in option slot B 146 7 7 NETWORK INFO Menu button NAME FA 9520 STATUS IP 192 168 0 10 SUB 28 di 2 ra 0 OTHER GW 0 0 0 0 Parameter Default Description NAME FA 9520 Displays the unit name IP 192 168 0 10 Displays the LAN PORT1 IP address SUB 255 255 255 0 Displays the LAN PORT1 subnet mask GW 0 0 0
70. L 16 9 T Letterbox 16 9 image at 16 9 F 16 9 Full frame 16 9 image the 0010 top of the coded frame same as the coded frame 4 3 L14 9 T Letterbox 14 9 image at 16 9 P 14 9 Pillarbox 14 9 image 0011 top of the coded frame horizontally centered in the coded frame 4 3 L gt 16 9 Letterbox image with an 16 9 L gt 16 9 Letterbox image with an 0100 aspect ratio greater than aspect ratio greater than 16 9 vertically centered in 16 9 vertically centered in the coded frame the coded frame RESERVED Reserved RESERVED Reserved 0101 RESERVED Reserved RESERVED Reserved 0110 RESERVED Reserved RESERVED Reserved 0111 4 3 F 4 3 Full frame 4 3 image the 16 9 F 16 9 Full frame 16 9 image the 1000 same as the coded frame same as the coded frame 4 3 F 4 3 Full frame 4 3 image the 16 9 P 4 3 Pillarbox 4 3 image 1001 same as the coded frame horizontally centered in the coded frame 4 3L16 9PRTD Letterbox 16 9 image 16 9 F PRTD Full frame 16 9 image with 1010 vertically centered in the all image areas protected coded frame with all image areas protected 4 3 L 14 9 Letterbox 14 9 image 16 9 P 14 9 Pillarbox 14 9 image 1011 vertically centered in the horizontally centered in the coded frame coded frame RESERVED Reserved RESERVED Reserved 1100 4 3 F ALT14 9 Full frame 4 3 image with 16 9P ALT14 9 Pillarbox 4 3 image with 1101 alternative 14 9 center alternative 14 9 center 4 3 L ALT14 9 Letterbox 16 9 image with 16 9F ALT14 9 Full frame 16 9 image
71. Menu button PROCESS SDI AUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Description Enables or disables automatic phase adjustment for FS1 input embedded audio ALIGNMENT pisapie ENABLE channel groups DISABLE ENABLE Automatic adjustment DISABLE No adjustment normal setting Selects audio clock signal to use for de embedding and processing audio data in HD SDI input signal AUTO De embeds HD SDI embedded audio data using the audio clock phase data in the embedded audio Synchronous and asynchronous embedded audio signals from 4 audio groups can be de embedded separately AUTO AUTO SYNC SDI Audio data will be processed as synchronous AUD CLK data if the audio clock phase data is incorrect or jitter is too great SYNC SDI All audio data in 4 audio groups are always processed as synchronous data without refering to the respective audio clock phase data AUD CLK Always uses audio clock phase data in HD SDI embedded audio data to de embed the audio data 1 Embedded audio signal groups are automatically phase adjusted when they are input to the FA 9520 If there is an abnormal audio signal in an audio group whether the audio group is in use or not audio streams may be obstructed by the auto phase adjustment In such cases audio stream obstruction can be avoided using this Alignment enable disable function 2 Embedded audio signals in SD SDI video inputs are always processed as synchronous signals
72. Off v CH34 Of y Ch 1 0 dB CH 5 6 Off y Ch 2 00 dB CH7 amp Of v Ch 3 O dB Ch 4 0 dB Ch 5 0 0 dB Ch 6 0 dB Ch 7 0 0 4B Ch 8 D dB After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps AES Input Gain Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description 20 0 20 0 dB Sets the offset to the input gain for Master 0 0dB all channels CH1 to 8 of AES 0 1 dB inputs 20 0 20 0 dB Sets the input gain for the Chi Ch8 0 0 dB 0 1 dB individual AES channel 1 The total value of Master and individual channel cannot exceed the setting range The setting value will stop at the end of the range AES Input Hysteresis Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description Synchronizes the AES input signals in Off group A or B per group Ch1 2 Ch7 8 Off Group A This setting is effective when using AES Group B audio signals to output multi channel audio signals such as surround sound The channel pair with the smallest channel numbers within a group is used as the reference pair and other channel pairs are synchronized to it If there is no audio signal in the channel pair the next channel pair will be the reference Audio
73. PCM signal 20 0 20 0 dB Sets gain for the signal selected under GAIN SET 0 0 dB 0 1 dB CH SEL 20 0 20 0 dB Sets offset for all Dolby decoded MASTER 0 0 dB 0 1 dB signals 1 If the MASTER setting exceeds the total setting range of individual channels the alert will be displayed as 20 0dB or 20 0dB 128 6 10 1 6 Dolby ENCODER INPUT This menu is displayed only if FA 95DE E option is installed in option slot A Dol by ENC IN 186 Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Menu names and menu pages for the option in slot B chang as shown below Dolby ENC IN B 236 Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a signal to be input to the Dolby encoder INPUT DIRECT DIRECT IN SEL DIRECT IN SEL SOURCE channel IN SEL Dolby DEC OUT signals of the FA 9520 Dolby DEC OUT Output signal from the Dolby decoder CH SEL CH 1 CH 1 8 Selects a channel to which to assign a signal When DIRECT IN SEL is selected EMB1 CH1 16 EMB2 CH1 16 When INPUT is set to DIRECT IN SEL AES CH1 8 EMB1 CH1 16 FS1 embedded audio ANALOG CH1 4 Signals DOWNMIX1 L ee CH1 16 FS2 embedded audio E signals Mia AES CH1 8 AES audio signals DOWNMIX2 R ANALOG CH1 4 Analog audio signals 500Hz TONE DOWNMIX L R Down mixed signal E generated from SOURCE channel signals 1KHz TONE 500Hz 1KHz TONE Test signal TONE assi EMBA AP MRE SILENCE Mute signal CH1 LOUDAA B LOUD1
74. PROCESS SDI AUDIO button has been pressed so that the VIDEO PROC AMP menu is displayed 29 4 2 2 Menu Buttons The VIDEO AUDIO button at the bottom right switches between the video and audio related menus Pressing the button alternates the button to work as video menu buttons lit green and audio menu buttons lit orange The menus at the top of each button label are video menus lit green and the menus at the bottom are audio menus lit orange Menus that request a setting confirmation in LIVE SAFE mode are shown with a black circle e in the following list Menu Button VIDEO menus lit green AUDIO menus lit orange lt EMB1 IN GAIN EMB1 OUT MONO eee e EMB1 IN SET e EMB1 OUT CLOCK SDI AUDIO VIDEO PROC AMP EMB2 IN GAIN EMB2 OUT MONO e EMB2 IN SET e EMB2 OUT CLOCK OOWHITE LEVEL AES IN GAIN CC BLACK LEVEL AES HYSTERESIS AES AUDIO amp GAMMA LEVEL AES OUT MONO OCOLOR CORRECT e AES I O SETUP OO CONV MODE ANALOG IN LEVEL CONV1 OCONV SIZE POS ANALOG IN GAIN ANALOG OCONV CROPPING ANALOG OUT LEVEL OCONV IMPROVE ANALOG OUT MONO OCONV SIDE RGB e ANALOG IN SYSTEM MASTER OUT GAIN EMB1 OUT GAIN es Not functioning EMB2 OUT GAIN STER AES OUT GAIN ANALOG OUT GAIN OOeAVO SETTING Qe EMB1 OUT REMAP AVO OUSER1 5 LEVEL SET e EMB2 OUT REMAP MAPPING OUSER1 2 AREA SET e AES OUT REMAP OAVO SETUP e ANALOG OUT REMAP lt EMB1 OUT DELAY CLIP OYPbPr RGB CLIP EMB2 OUT DELAY DELAY OCOMPOSITE CLIP AES OUT
75. Parameter Default Setting range FS1 Selects either FS1 or FS2 signal to be 9DIt 2 FS1 FS2 output from SDI1 and 2 connectors FS1 Selects either FS1 or FS2 signal to be SDISIA FS1 FS2 output from SDI3 and 4 connectors Selects either FS1 or FS2 signal to be FS1 output from COMPOSITE connectors ae d FS2 Outputs a black signal for HD output signals Composite Output Format Table FS1 and 2 output signals 525 60 Output signal from COMPOSITE connector CONV signals in 525 60 625 50 CONV signals in 625 50 1080 59i B B in 525 60 1080 50i B B in 625 50 1080 24PsF B B in 625 50 1080 23 98PsF B B in 525 60 720 59p B B in 525 60 720 50p B B in 625 50 1080 59p B B in 525 60 1080 50p B B in 625 50 62 5 7 2 AIO A ASSIGN Allows you to assign video signals to output from video output connectors on the FA 95AIO in slot A 35 Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX Parameter Default Setting range Description A Selects either FS1 or FS2 signal to be output from the video output ASSIGN Pal FS2 connector on the FA 95AIO in slot A YPbPr SMPTE Si fi d elects the operation mode for MODE YPbPr SMPTE SO EB eid output video signals from the VIC FA 95AIO installed in slot A This menu does not appear if there is no FA 95AIO installed in slot A The FA 95AIO connector outputs a black video if the output signal from the selected FS1 or FS2 is 1080p and MOD
76. Pixel ME Pixel Crops the left side of the video RIGHT 0 Pixel VO Pixel Crops the right side of the video TOP 0 Line va tine Crops the top of the video BOTTOM 0 Line Ane Crops the bottom of the video Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively These setting ranges vary depending on the input signal format The LEFT and RIGHT settings and the TOP and BOTTOM settings interact with each other If the size cannot be adjusted as desired try changing the setting of another parameter 1 The following parameters interact with each other When you change one of their setting values setting ranges of other parameters will also change Video format SYNC FRMT Parameter in FS MODE SET see section 5 9 1 Ifthe CONV mode is set to BY PASS the CONV CROPPING setting cannot be changed Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV Conversion Table see section 5 3 2 In both cases the menu as shown below will be displayed IMPORTANT The cropping setting range resets itself if the video input changes If the set value exceeds the setting range due to an input change the set value will automatically reset itself to the default value If the set value exceeds the horizontal range the LEFT and RIGHT settings will reset to their default values If the value exceeds the vertical range the TOP and BOTTOM settings will also reset accordingly 44 5
77. SDI SigNalS cooononoccccnnnnccocinonoccncncnconcnnnnnncnnonononnns 25 3 5 Connecting a Computer ioeie ae d aee E a nennen eren nennen a 26 3 6 Connecting to the REMOTE GPI Connector ssssssssssseeeeene enn 27 A Front Panel Operation deti e P Pete teed a ti ee NE devote dne en 28 4 1 Powering ON tei tate eM EE cesses te be Font Pe obe pat 28 4 2 Basic Operation oooococccnconnononcccnonoconnnnnononnnnnennn none n nn nn nn nn nn nen n nn RR nn nnne n nnnm nere nn nnne nennen 28 4 2 1 Accessing Menus ti e levee inact deen 29 4 2 2 Menu BUMONS rada 30 4 2 3 ATTOW BUON S ira rro decai 32 4 2 4 Consecutive Viewing of SettidQS o oooococococcccnooconoocccnccoconnnanonononononnnnannn nono eene 32 4 2 5 Page JUMP FO US ida 33 4 2 6 Changing Setting Values oooocococcncococcocccccccconnnanoncnnnononnnnannnnnnnnnnonnanannnnnnnnnnennanannnnes 34 4 2 7 Resetting to Default ssssssssssssssssssssseee nennen nennen nennen nenne 35 4 2 8 Switching Between 2 Channel Frame Synchronizers ssssssssssss 35 5 VIDEO MEN S C ea ende aia 37 5 1 VIDEO PROC AMP PROCESS sie o ie enne nennen N aea 37 5 2 COLOR CORREGCTOR G C tette ebbe ee tefte Pctro rettet pe Ends 37 52 1 WHITE LEVEL Ee unc de te 37 9 2 2 BLACK LEVEI cuca er eren et esee a cae dete Medea 38 5 2 3 GAMMA LEVEL inp ntn EXER RENE ERR ER ee RR en 38 52 4 COLOR CORREGCT GG ned benedi a tea date ae ee nds Ds 39 5
78. SDI2 FS1 FS2 Composite 2 Default Event1 100 2 FS1 FS2 Keyer FS1 FS2 Load 1 7 Loudness 1 2 A B Start Loudness 1 2 A B Clear BY PASS Option A BY PASS Option B 7 Assigns a function to GPI pins 1 through 7 according to the selection under In Out Assign None In case In Out is set to Output None FS1 FS2 Freeze FS1 FS2 Video In REF In 9 FAN Alarm Y DC POWER1 2 FS1 FS2 SDI1 FS1 FS2 SDI2 FS1 FS2 Composite FS1 FS2 Keyer Loudness 1 2 A B Control Assigns a function to GPI pins 1 through 7 according to the selection under In Out Logo ID 1 7 1 256 Sets ID 1 through 256 to logos to be inserted for outputs 1 through 7 of FS 1 and 2 1 Whenever the In Out setting is changed Assign is reset to None Reset Assign 215 2 The input functions consist of pulse mode and level mode functions See the INPUT FUNCTION in section 7 6 GPI SETTING for details 3 Details of the output functions are shown in the 9 OUTPUT FUNCTION in section 7 6 GPI SETTING 4 If FS Mode gt Synchro Mode in section 9 4 1 FS1 FS2 Video System is set to Line Sync or AVDL the Freeze setting will not function but will be displayed as Freeze To enable Freeze for Input be sure to set Synchro Mode in section 9 4 1 FS1 FS2 Video System to Frame Sync 5 DC Power 1 and 2 are selectable only if FA 95PS is installed 6 Shown only if the FA 95AIO option is installed
79. SRC In CH15 CH15 O Auto OBY PASS 9 SRC In After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Parameter Default Setting range Description SRC Mode SRC IN Auto BY PASS SRC In Sets the SRC circuit to pass or by pass audio signals per channel pair Auto Sets the SRC circuit to pass signals However non PCM audio signals will be by passed BY PASS Sets the SRC circuit to by pass signals Set to By pass to output asynchronous audio signals An audio clock must be selected under 9 3 10 SDI Audio Output Setting for the respective audio groups to embed audio signals to SDI output video signals SRC In Sets the SRC circuit to pass both PCM or NON PCM signals Useful for the irregular PCM signal with the NON PCM audio channel status indication However real NON PCM signals cannot be output properly AES SRC Mode I SRG Mode AES Mozilla Firefox 1921 6801 D html sr c2 aes cei SRC Mode CH1 CH2 OAuto OBY PASS SRCIn CH3 CH4 OAuto OBY PASS 9 SRC In CH5 CH6 OAuto OBY PASS SRC In CH7 CH8 OAuto OBYPASS SRC In 184 9 3 6 Audio Output Polarity SDI AES Analog Clicking block 7 on the audio block diagram opens the Audio Output Polarity dialog box Polarity SDI1 SDI2 Polarity SDI2 Mozilla Firefox amp 192 1680 10 ht mb2cei Polarity Polarity GNormal Olnvert CH1
80. TRB23 1 5F FA Dummy packet standarized in ARIB TR B23 Operational Guidelines for Ancillary Data in Inter Stationary Information Exchange ARIB TRB23 2 5F FB User data 2 in user data packets standarized in ARIB TR B23 Operational Guidelines for Ancillary Data in Inter Stationary Information Exchange 262 FA 9520 Indication DID SDID hexadecimal Description ARIB TRB23 1 5F FC User data 1 in user data packets standarized in ARIB TR B23 Operational Guidelines for Ancillary Data in Inter Stationary Information Exchange ARIBB 35ProgEx 5F FD Trigger signal packets for data broadcasting standarized in ARIB STD B35 SD Data Program Exchange Specification for Digital Broadcasting ARIB B 39 5F FE Control signal packets for inter studio transmission standarized in ARIB STD B39 Structure of Inter Stationary Control Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets ARIB B 15 5F FF Resource ID packets standarized in ARIB STD B15 Resource Identification Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets for 52 60 and 1125 60 Television Systems SMPTE 12 2 60 60 ARIB STD B41 for time code 334 1CDP 708 61 01 ITU R BT 1619 SMPTE 334 1 closed captioning ElA 708 B 334 1 CEA608 61 02 ITU R BT 1619 SMPTE 334 1 ElA 608 data S334 1 Teletxt 61 03 World System Teletext Description Packet S334 SDE 61 04 Subtitling Data Essence SDE 334 207 62 01 ITU R BT 1619 SMPTE RP207 DTV program de
81. as an SNMP manager be sure to download the MIB file for the correct operation mode See section 9 1 Connecting via a WEB Browser for details on WEB Browsers e See section 9 6 3 Downloading a MIB File for details on downloading the MIB file for FA 9520 mode See the FA 9500 mode Operation Manual for details on downloading an MIB file for FA 9500 mode 142 7 3 CONTROL SETTING CONTROL SETTING CONTROL LOCAL Menu button STATUS OTHER Parameter Default Setting range Description LOCAL Disables control from FA 95RU FA 10DCCRU Front panel REMOTE LED is unlit REMOTE Enables control from FA 95RU FA 10DCCRU Front panel REMOTE LED is lit LOCAL CONTROL REMOTE LOCAL This menu cannot be accessed from the FA 95RU 7 4 FRONT OPERATION FRONT OPERATION MODE NORMAL Menu button STATUS OTHER Parameter Default Setting range Description Allows you to select a front panel operation mode NORMAL NORMAL Changes made by control knobs F1 MODE NORMAL LIVE SAFE to F4 will be applied immediately to the unit LIVE SAFE Requires confirmation before control knob changes are applied Whenever a change is made by control knobs F1 to F4 the single arrow buttons up and down and the LED around the control knob of the changed parameter blink confirming the change Pressing the single down arrow button confirms the change a
82. box 2 AVO User Area Setting Mozilla Firefox 192 168 0 10 html avo_area2 coi fs 1 User Area 1 Start H 0 Pixel Start V 0 Line H Size 360 Pixel 05 05 05 08 V Size 360 Line Start H 0 Pixel Start V D Line H Size 360 Pixel V Size 360 Line EC 05 08 08 After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps To set the sample area set the start point and the size Parameter Default pae Description Start H 0 Pixel Piel Specifies the horizontal start point Start V 0 Line pepe Specifies the vertical start point i e oo al V Size 360 Variable Specifies the vertical size distance from 2Line the start point START V START H i HSIZE Sample area Default setting of sample area in 1080 59 94i V SIZE IMPORTANT The sample area should be set within the effective lines and pixels Otherwise the sample area will automatically revert to their default values Be particularly careful in the following cases When the video format is changed to SDTV after the sample area has been set When the sample area settings are changed by loading an event 161 9 2 3 Frame Delay Clicking block 3 in the Video block diagram opens the Frame
83. change in the audio status due to e g signal switchover This parameter allows you to select whether to detect changes and how sensitive detection should be to such changes DISABLE Disables mute function when DISABLE change in audio status is detected CORRECTION NORMAL NORMAL Normally not selected SENSITIVE NORMAL Mutes when a change on an SDI signal ADP Audio Data Packet or DBN Data Block Number is detected Normally selected SENSITIVE Mutes when a change on channel status or EDP Extended Data Packet presence only for SD SDI as well as the above items is detected 1 Channel status and audio channel input Validity Bit can be checked using a wave form monitor 2 Processes audio signals as described if SRC MODE in 6 9 1 EMB1 SRC MODE 6 9 2 EMB2 SRC MODE and 6 9 3 AES SRC MODE is set to AUTO 3 Processes audio signals as described if EMB1 OUT CLOCK in section 6 1 4 is set to AUTO 4 Fade function depends on the FADE MODE setting in the 6 11 1 FADE IN OUT menu CH STATUS The FA 9520 determins whether the input audio signal is PCM or not from the NON PCM flag carried in the Audio Channel Status ACS If ACS is incorrect it may lead to improper processing This setting may effective processing such audio signals with incorrect ACS properly VALIDITY The FA 9520 determines whether the input audio signal is PCM or not using Validity Bits V Bit in audio signal If
84. color Network Ethernet 100BASE TX 1000BASE T 1 port or more Network cable Enhanced Category 5 or higher Network protocol SNMPv2c HTTP IMPORTANT When using Internet Explorer 8 Windows Updates after 6 13 2011 must be downloaded for proper performance It is highly recommended to keep your computer updated with the latest Windows Updates PCs that do not meet the above system requirements may not proplely display web pages We recommend the use of a Firefox web browser 248 18 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol The FA 9520 can be remotely monitored and some of its settings can be remotely changed using the SNMPv2C protocol Some menu items can also be set via the network MIB Management Information Base is required for the monitoring and can be downloaded see section 9 6 3 Downloading a MIB File See section 9 8 3 SNMP SETTING for details about the SNMP network settings SET GET List Dark grey shaded commands are not supported O Available Unavailable Object group Front TITLE Item name Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type Trap Read OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 1 Unit info Product Name Model name a952ProduciName 1 JOCTET STRING O Product Code Product code a952ProductCode 2 NTEGER
85. comments regarding the person in charge of the device If authentication has failed while the Enable Authen Trap checkbox is selected a trap will be generated Access Community sysContact 31 char max Setting Range Item Alphanumeric and Description symbolic characters Read Only1 19 char max Read only SNMP community name Read Only2 19 char max Read only SNMP community name Read Write1 19 char max Read Write SNMP community name Read Write2 19 char max Read Write SNMP community name 232 Trap Setting Item Setting Range Alphanumeric and symbolic characters Description Trap1 Address The SNMP managers IP address to which a trap is sent Trap2 Address The SNMP managers IP address to which a trap is sent The SNMP managers IP address to which a trap Trap3 Address is sent Trap1 Community 19 char max uny name that sends a trap to Trap1 The community name that sends a trap to Trap2 Trap2 Community 19 char max Address Trap3 Community 19 char max The community name that sends a trap to Trap3 Address 233 9 8 4 TRAP SETTING Allows you to control SNMP trap transmission Check the check box of a trap to be sent then click Submit Uncheck to stop sending See the TRAP List in section 18 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol for details FA 9520 Logout
86. data is found in the input signal the 4 3 F 4 3 aspect ratio will be determined according to the 4 3 L16 9PRTD setting made under ANC LOSS SET Sec 4 3 L 14 9 5 9 75 9 7 AFD 4 3 4 3 F ALT14 9 To output video signals in 4 3 select either ratio 4 3 L ALT14 9 with 4 3 To output in 16 9 select either ratio 4 3 L ALT 4 3 with 16 9 Other options will output video signals 16 9L gt 16 9 in the specified aspect ratio See section 20 16 9 F 16 9 About AFD Active Format Description for 16 9 P 4 3 details ASPECT 16 9 F PRTD Options 4 3 L 16 9 T to 16 9 F ALT 4 3 other 16 9 P 14 9 4 than the above four require the input signal de E P 2 4 aspect ratio to be specified in VIDEO INPUT SET 16 9F ALT4 3 Sec 5 6 2 if the input signal is an SD signal AFD Selectable aspect ratios when CONV is set to AFD ALT 1080i 720p 1080PsF or 1080 3G 16 9 L gt 16 9 AFD and AFD ALT automatically select an aspect 16 9 F 16 9 ratio according to the AFD data in the input signal 16 9 P 4 3 If no AFD data is found in the input signal the AFD f aspect ratio will be determined according to the poe setting made under ANC LOSS SET Sec 5 9 7 Options other than the above two are output in the specific aspect ratio See section 20 About AFD Active Format Description for details on conversions according to AFD data The format of the input signal to CONV and the format the signal will be converted to in CONV of FS
87. former FA 9500 Suitable for simultaneous outputs FA 9520 Independent 2 channel frame synchronizers can be used FA 9520 MODE FA 9520 FA 9500 A WAIT 5sec AND REBOOT message appears when the operation mode is changed In such case wait at least 5 seconds then reboot the FA 9520 The FA 9520 can be used in the selected operation mode after the restart Make sure that the MU OPERATION menu is open when rebooting the unit Rebooting while another menu is open does not implement the operation mode change This menu cannot be accessed from the FA 95RU 7 2 1 Important Note on Changing the Operation Mode Be sure to follow the procedure described in section 7 2 2 FA 9520 Operation Mode Change Procedure if you wish to change the FA 9520 operation mode to ensure proper performance 7 2 2 FA 9520 Operation Mode Change Procedure 1 2 3 Be sure to close all Web browser connections with the FA 9520 If you are using remote control interfaces such as an SNMP manager to manage the FA 9520 disconnect the interface Change the MODE change FA 9520 FA9500 selection setting Wait for more than 5 seconds then reboot the unit Make sure the MU OPERATION menu is displayed when rebooting the unit The operation mode cannot be changed by rebooting the unit if the menu is diplaying one that is different from the MU OPERATION menu Tocontrol the FA 9520 via remote control interfaces such
88. in slot A 7 Shown only if the FA 95AIO option is installed in slot B 8 The Logo ID setting box will be displayed when In Out is set to Input and Assign is set to any of FS1 Load 1 7 or FS2 Load 1 7 In the following cases the logo will not be inserted to the converter output signals although data will be loaded to the FA 9520 No logo is registered under the selected Logo ID The registered logo format and converter output video format do not match The keyer of the relevant converter is turned off 216 9 6 Utility Settings Click Click the Utility tab at the top of the page The Utility setting window will be displayed Event Control Start Up Event Load Last Seting IM Event Load Default v Load Mode Load All Load FS1 Only Load FS2 Olny Event Save EVENT 1 vij Unit Event Name Set MIB Download Download Backup Parameter Save File Restore 8m Apply Settings Below C Network Settings O SNMP Settings O Parameter C Event Name Event Data Backup Save File Restore vit s n 0d If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click Refresh to update the settings 217 9 6 1 Event Control Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an event you want to load at startup Last Setting Last Setting Starts up with the last set Start Up x tti Even
89. in the below table Down Mix Mode Surround Mix Level 3dB 6dB 9dB 0 edB Stereo approx 7 7dB approx 6 9dB approx 6 3dB approx 4 6dB Surround approx 9 9dB approx 8 7dB approx 7 7dB approx 4 6dB Monaural approx 12 9dB approx 12 0dB approx 11 4dB approx 9 5dB 117 6 7 1 DOWN MIX1 ASSIGN DOWN MI X1 ASSI GN Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX Setting range UR Parameter Default Steps Description LEFT L RIGHT R Selects a channel to be CH SEL LEFT CENTER C APMLM ne LEFT SRRND LS source audio RIGHT SRRND RS LEFT EMB1 CH1 RIGHT EMB1 CH2 EMB1 CH1 16 Selects an audio signal ASSIGN CENTER EMB1 CH3 EMB2 CH1 16 to be assigned to the LEFT SRRND EMB1 CH5 AES CH1 8 channel that is selected E under CH SEL RIGHT SRRND EMB1 CH6 Snes If the same audio signal is selected for multiple CH SEL channels or a NON PCM signal is assigned to an audio channel the menu will be indicated with an i e EMB1 CH1 and DOWNMIX L and DOWNMIX R will be muted To output downmixed audio signals see sections 6 5 1 EMB1 OUT REMAP to 6 5 4 ANALOG OUT REMAP 118 6 8 DOWN MIX2 SET Menu button MODE STEREO SURROUND MIX 3dB IN SEL CENTER MIX 3dB DOWN MIX MASTER LVL 3d B Parameter Default Setting range Description Steps STEREO Select de to d ix2
90. input output GPI 4 input output GPI 5 input output GPI 6 input output GPI 7 input output GND ground ilA p oloi NIIA AJ OJN ee See section 7 6 GPI SETTING for the function assignments for GPI1 GPI7 For GPI inputs the function is ON when a pin is shorted to ground and OFF when open 14 2 GPI Input Circuit FA 9520 inside eeuna d gt 241 14 3 GPI Input Control Level Control The pin assigned function is enabled or disabled by the pulse level Trigger state of pin OPEN Function is OFF CLOSE Function is ON 500msec or more pulse width 500msec or more pulse width Pulse Control The assigned pin function is triggered by changing the pin state between OPEN and CLOSE Trigger state change of pin OPEN to CLOSE Function is ON Normal Pulse Control 500msec or more 500msec or more 1 A OPEN m 1 E CLOSE i First i i second 3 amp 1 0sec or more IMPORTANT Use the specified pulse width and duration Otherwise the GPI inputs may not function properly Do not simultaneously close circuits for more than 1 pulse to prevent the GPI inputs from malfunctioning 242 14 4 GPI Output Circuit Select external or internal power FA 9520 inside 5 4V 5VDC PINs 2 8 external power PIN 9 i
91. is not effective on NON PCM outputs NON PCM output signals pass through Embed 1 2 Output Gain See sec 6 4 2 and 6 4 3 Parameter Default eode Description Master OA dB dB ior all ddl channels CH rough 16 in respective FS Mute or or E reme EE alae canoe 1 The total value of Master and individual channel cannot exceed the setting range The setting value will stop at the end of the range AES Output Gain The setting menus are the same as those of Embed 1 2 Output Gain See section 6 4 4 AES OUT GAIN for details Analog Audio Output Gain The setting menus are the same as those of Embed 1 2 Output Gain See section 6 4 5 ANALOG OUT GAIN for details 188 9 3 9 Down Mix Setting Clicking block 10 on the audio block diagram opens the Down Mix Setting dialog box 2 Down Mix 1 Setting Mozilla Firefox 192168010 ntmi downmix2acei Downmix 1 Setting Mode Sorround Mi 9 Stereo O Surround 348 6dB 3dB O 4 548 O 3dB O Auto Center Mix Master Level Downmix 1 Assign EMB1 CH 1 EMB1 CH 2 EMB1 CH3 EMB1 CH5 EMB1 CH6 Left Right Center Left Surround Right Surround aaa O Manaural 2 Down Mix 2 Setting Mozilla Firefox b 192168010 htmUdomnmibcei Downmix 2 Setting Mode Sorround Mix Manaural 9dB 64B 9 Stereo O Surround 348 6dB O 3dB O 4 5dB O 34B O Auto Center Mix Master Level
92. is set to output 5 10 13 ANALOG IN AUDIO 0G 561 Menu button CAOS S CH 2 L0SS STATUS C H RL 0 SS CH 4 LOSS PIERR Parameter Display Description Displays the status of the input audio signal in CH1 CH4 LOSS the ANALOG AUDIO connector li IN LOSS No audio signal is present IN An audio signal is present 89 5 10 14 SDI 1 2 OUT AUDIO 5DI 1 2 OUT AUDIO 51 1 Menu button CH 1 P C a s STATUS CH 4 PC NER CH 5 PCM CH 6 PCM CHi re PEC CH 8 PCM CH 9 PC CHT 0 PCM CH11 PC CH dns PE CH13 PCM CH14 PCM CH15 PCM CH16 PC Parameter Display Description PCM Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 through CH16 of the SDI 1 2 output SILENCE PCM Normal audio signal CH1 CH16 NON PCM SILENCE Mute signal UNKNOWN NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 BLANK UNKNOWN Unidentifiable 2 BLANK No audio signal embedding Benno BY PASS By passed through 0 5 10 15 SDI 3 4 OUT AUDIO SDI 3 4 OUT AUDIO 575 Menu button CH Rie Meech a eo STATUS CH 4 PC SINE CH 5 PC CH 6 PC CH AP CH PO CH 9 PCM CH10 PCM CH11 PCM CH12 PCM CH13 PCM CH14 PCM CH15 PCM CH16 PCM Parameter Display Description Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 PCM through CH16 of the SDI 3 4 output OREBCH PCM Normal audio signal E 7 SILENCE Mute signal GELS HM UNKNOWN NON PCM Compres
93. ladder strap retaining clip assembly Rack Mount Brackets 1 set EIA standard type Including 4 screws CD ROM 1 FA 9520 FA 9500 User Manuals PDF Quick Setup Guide 1 Option ITEM QTY REMARKS FA 95RU 1 Remote Control Unit FA 95PS 1 set adi unit with AC cord and Digital audio expansion cable to expand digital FA 95DACBL 1 audio I O up to 8 inputs and 8 outputs Normally installed in slot B FA 95D D 1 2 Dolby E Digital decoder Dolby E encoder FA 95DE E 1 2 FA 95D D option required for FA 95DE E installation x Analog component I O expansion card SOM T4 with dedica Coeur cable PC 3307 1 FA 95ALA 1 2 Automatic Loudness Adjustment card FA 10DCCRU 1 Remote Control Unit for color correction In FA 9520 mode FA 95D D FA 95DE E FA 95AIO and FA 95ALA option cards can be installed into either or both option slots A and B In FA 9500 mode only the card in slot A is effective if 2 of the same option cards are installed into both slots Also only the card in slot A is effective when FA 95D D and FA 95DE E are installed into both slots The FA 95DACBL option can be installed into either option slot A or B however not into both slots Software Option ITEM QTY REMARKS FA 95CO 1 Changeover FA 95CO is effective only in FA 9500 mode Software installation can be verified in the SOFT OPTION1 and SOFT OPTION2 menus IMPORTANT The FA 9520 has 2 operational modes FA 9500 mode in whic
94. mode VIDEO CONV1 ANC SET 66 5 9 6 VIDEO CONV2 AFD IN STATUS 601 5 10 20 VIDEO IN SEL VIDEO IN STATUS 502 5 10 2 VIDEO OUT SEL VIDEO OUT STATUS 511 5 10 4 AUDIO SDI AUDIO EMB1 IN AUDIO 551 5 10 10 AUDIO AES AUDIO AES IN AUDIO 559 5 10 12 AUDIO ANALOG ANALOG IN AUDIO 561 5 10 13 Dolby OP A AUX 591 5 10 18 AUDIO AUDIO OP Or 5 10 19 Dolby OP B AUX 596 1 The Dolby OP A AUX 591 or B AUX 596 menu is available only if an FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is installed in option slot A or B The page jump feature is inoperative while the FA 9520 is in the setting change confirming state It becomes operable once the change is confirmed Refer to section 4 2 6 Changing Setting Values for details 33 4 2 6 Changing Setting Values Once the desired menu is displayed use the control knobs F1 F4 to change the setting values Pon fruc weon eau ium N e ER soon mem I DISPLAY Control Menu title Menu page number D 0 PRO A D 1 F1 VIDEO LEVEL 100 0 F2 CHROMA LEVEL 100 0 F3 SETUP BLACK 0 0 F4 HUE 0 0 FORA Hp sp FRAME enun FA 9520 Parameter Setting value NORMAL mode In
95. of signal selected under Dolby Input See Dolby E Digital Decoder Output Channel Assignment table in section 12 Analog Audio Connection for channel assignments of respective configurations Dolby Digital 1 1 Dolby Digital 1 0 Dolby Digital 2 0 Dolby Digital 3 0 Dolby Digital 2 1 Dolby Digital 3 1 Dolby Digital 2 2 Dolby Digital 3 2 Dolby Digital 3 0L Dolby Digital 2 1L Dolby Digital 3 1L Dolby Digital 2 2L Dolby Digital 3 2L Loss Invalid Dolby Decoder REF Input Select Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a reference signal to be used in the Dolby decoder PCM signal output from the Dolby decoder will be synchronized to the selected reference signal None FS1 Output None No reference signal used FS2 OUR FS1 Output Uses the FS1 output video signal REF Input AUX REF IN P FS2 Output Uses the FS2 output video signal AUX REF In FS1 Input AUX REF In Uses the input signal in the p optional Dolby reference input connector REF FS2 Input IN If no signal is in the REF IN connector the PCM signal output will be in free run mode FS1 Input Uses the FS1 input video signal FS2 Input Uses the FS2 input video signal Dolby Down Mix Mode Parameter Default Setting range Description Surround Mode Surround Stereo DOE MINE mode for the Monaural y 194 Dolby Polarity Parameter Default Setting range Descriptio
96. offset to the input gain for MASTER 0 0dB 20 0 20 0 dB al analog audio channels CH1 to 0 1 dB CHA 1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range If the range is exceeded the alert will be displayed as 20 0dB or 20 0dB 6 3 3 ANALOG OUT LEVEL C _ eas i 1 Menu button LEVEL SET 4dBm CONV1 ANALOG Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an analog audio output CH SEL CH1 CH1 CH4 channel for which to set the signal level from channels CH1 to CH4 10dBm OdBm Sets the signal level for the analog LEVEL SET 4dBm 4dB audio output signal that is selected m under CH SEL 8dBm 106 6 3 4 ANALOG OUT MONO ANALOG OUT MONO Menu button CONV1 ANALOG Parameter Default Setting range Description CH SEL CH1 2 CH1 2 3 4 Selects a stereo pair of analog audio output channels MONO SUM DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE ENABLE Outputs the stereo pair channels that are selected under CH SEL as a mono sum The signals of the selected pair channels are added and devided by two to output from each channel 6 3 5 ANALOG IN SYSTEM A NA LO Gl M Menu button TERMINAL SET 600 Q SILENCE TIME 2s ec CONV1 SILENCE LVL 72dBFS ANALOG Setting range A Parameter Default Steps Description Selects how to terminate the 6000 analog inputs 1 2 and
97. on Y C and composite outputs on the FA 95AIO option installed in option slot A and or B 5 9 15 COMPOSITE SET2 Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description ON Passes through VITS V ANC lines 10 to VITS OFF OFF 21 NTSC or 6 to 23 PAL of composite input ON signals For SD SDI output signals inserts VITS lines into Y signals OFF Set to OFF for signals without 7 5 IRE setup NISC SETUP ORF ON Set to ON for signals with 7 5 IRE setup DISABLE DISABLE Allows NTSC signals to be output PAL M MODE DISABLE ENABLE ENABLE Allows PAL M signals to be output 1 The setting is effective on Y C and composite I O on the FA 95AIO option installed in option slot A and or B 2 This setting enables PAL M output for COMPOSITE OUT and Y C outputs however NTSC signal output will be disabled To synchronize the PAL M output input a PAL M BB or 59 94 29 97 Hz tri level sync signal to the GENLOCK IN connector NTSC BB signals cannot synchronize PAL M output signals PAL signals can always be input and output regardless of this setting 80 5 10 Various Signal Status Display STATUS 5 10 1 UNIT ALARM Menu button AL ad STATUS NORMAL PED Parameter Display Description Displays the status of FAN1 NORMAL Operating normally NORMAL FAN1 STOPPED STOPPED FAN1 has stopped Turn the unit power OFF and contact your dea
98. on the 4th line from top P Present An audio signal is present No embedded audio S Silence Mute signal 1 See section 6 2 4 AES I O SETUP for details on DIGITAL AUDIO connector I O settings 86 5 10 10 EMB 1 IN AUDIO Menu button CH 1 LOSS CH 2 L055 STATUS CH 3 L055 CH 4 L0858 SIER GH S x 3bS0 8 CH 6 L055 EH FLOSS CH 8 LOSS CH 9 L055 CH10 L055 CH11 L0S5 CH1I2zL9 S EMB1l IN AUDIO 554 CH13 L055 CH14 L055 CH15 L055 CH16 L055 Parameter Display Description Displays the status of audio signals CH1 through CH16 embedded to the FS1 video signal LOSS LOSS No audio signals PCM PCM Normal audio signal SDI input SILENCE SILENCE Mute signal SDI input CH1 CH46 NON PCM NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 PCM Async PCM Async Normal audio signal Asynchronous SDI SILENCE Async NON PCM Async UNKNOWN input SILENCE Async Mute signal Asynchronous SDI input NON PCM Async Compressed audio data such as AC3 Asynchronous SDI input UNKNOWN Unidentifiable 00 7 5 10 11 EMB 2 IN AUDIO Menu button CH ELLOS S CH 2 LOSS STATUS CH 3 LOSS CH 4 LOSS HP CH SALUS S CH 6 L10855 C H AA 0 SS CH 8 LOSS CH 9 LOSS CH10 LOSS CH11 LOSS CH12 LOSS EMB2 IN AUDIO 558 CH13 LOSS CH14 LOSS CHILS iiss CH16 LOSS Parameter Display Description Displays the status of au
99. se e Bypass soit 1 z EA FS1 FS1 FS1 SDI 2 Frame Process Up Down Cross Delay Amp Converter Composite Input O Select A 1 3 FS2 FS2 Process Up Down Cross 14 Amp Converter i Option B Wi O so 1 7 C 9 j geo f FS1 FS1 FS1 E Om Color Test Logo Corrector Signal Generator SDI4 Output Select f Composite P Clip Composite 1 FS2 FS2 Composite 2 Color Test Logo Corrector Signal Boss Ju5 guns Jte No setting options for 9 13 through 16 13 through 16 are displayed as FA 95AIO if the FA 95AIO is installed If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown 154 9 2 1 FS Input Select Clicking block 1 on the Video block diagram opens the FS Input Select dialog box 2 FS Input Select Mozilla Firefox 192 168 0 10 html video in2 cai FS 1 Input Select FS 2 Input Select Input SDI 1 Input SDI 2 v Loss Mode Back Color Loss Mode Back Color vw Back Color Black w Back Color Black v SD Aspect 4 3 16 9 SD Aspect 4 3 O 16 9 Select setting values for parameters in the respective pull down menus After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings FS1 FS2 Input Select Parameter Default Setting range Description Input FS1 SDI1 SDI1 SDI2 Composite Selects an input signal Input
100. signals to be output 1 This setting enables PAL M output for COMPOSITE OUT and Y C outputs however NTSC signal output will be disabled To synchronize the PAL M output input a PAL M BB or 59 94 29 97 Hz tri level sync signal to the GENLOCK IN connector NTSC BB signals cannot synchronize PAL M output signals 214 9 5 GPI FA 9520 Logout dm Video Audio System GPI Utility Status Network GPI 1 GPI 5 In Out input Ooutput In Out Olnput Ooutput Assign None Assign None v Logo ID Logo ID GPI2 GPI 6 In Out lnput Ooutput In Out input output Assign None Assign None v Logo ID Logo ID GPI 3 GPI 7 In Out lnput Ooutput In Out input Ooutput Assign None Assign None Y Logo ID Logo ID GPI 4 In Out GInput OoOutput Assign None Logo ID Refresh If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click Refresh to update the settings Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description In Out Input Input Output Selects whether to use GPI pins 1 through 7 each for input or tally output Assign None In case In Out is set to Input None BY PASS SDI1 BY PASS SDI2 BY PASS VBS FS1 FS2 Freeze 24 FS1 FS2 Full Color Bar 2 FS1 FS2 75 Color Bar FS1 FS2 SMPTE Color Bar FS1 FS2 Ramp FS1 FS2 Audio EXT Audio FS1 FS2 Input SDI1 FS1 FS2 Input
101. signals with a phase difference relative to the reference within 0 25 of a sample period can be synchronized 180 Setting Examples When setting all channel pairs CH 1 2 to 7 8 to Group A CH 1 2 will be the reference Other channel pairs will be synchronized to the word clock of CH1 2 When setting channels CH1 2 to 3 4 to Group A and channels CH5 6 to 7 8 to Group B CH 1 2 will be the reference pair for Group A and CH 5 6 the reference pair for Group B IMPORTANT Channel pairs in an audio group must be synchronous and must have the same sampling rate Changing the audio assignment of the reference channel pair may cause noise on other channel pairs in the same audio group Also changing the assignment may affect the phase alignment of the reference channel pair and other channel pairs If the alignment is turned off set Master Mute see section 9 3 8 Audio Master Gain Settings to on and off or turn the unit power off and on to regain the alignment 181 9 3 3 Analog Audio Input Clicking block 3 on the audio block diagram opens the Analog Audio Input dialog box Eek 2 Analog Audio Input Mozilla Firefox 1921680 10 html ana in2 cei Analog Audio Input Gain Master 0 0 dB Analog Audio Input Level Bw chi am CH 2 4dBm El CH 3 4dBm amp unity CH 4 4dBm Analog Audio System Termination Setting 9 6000 HiZ Silence Time 2 sec v Ch 1
102. synchronous data without refering to the respective audio clock phase data Audio Clock Always uses audio clock phase data in HD SDI embedded audio data to de embed the audio data 1 Embedded audio signal groups are automatically phase adjusted when they are input to the FA 9520 If there is an abnormal audio signal in an audio group whether the audio group is in use or not audio streams may be obstructed by the auto phase adjustment In such cases audio stream obstruction can be avoided using this Alignment enable disable function 2 Embedded audio signals in SD SDI video inputs are always processed as synchronous signals 3 Sync SDI should be selected only if audio data cannot pass through as Auto or asynchronous audio data is never input 4 Audio Clock may be effective in the case audio data cannot properly pass through as Auto or Sync SDI IMPORTANT Use this Alignment enable disable function only if the audio output has noise or is muted Do not change the setting for normal audio output Note that the audio output will be temporally muted when Alignment is changed from Disable to Enable while audio signal phases are aligning 179 9 3 2 AES Audio Input Settings Clicking block 3 on the audio block diagram opens the AES Audio Input dialog box AES Audio Input Mozilla Firefox DER b 192168 010 html ses in2 cei E j AES Input Gain AES Input Hysteresis Master D dB E unity CH12
103. the above example the PROCESS SDI AUDIO button has been pressed while the menu buttons are turned to video menus lit green by pressing the VIDEO AUDIO so that the VIDEO PROC AMP menu is displayed If the LEDs around control F1 through 4 knobs are lit the setting value corresponding to the lit control knob can be changed If you want to change the VIDEO LEVEL setting value turn F1 To change the CHROMA LEVEL setting value turn F2 For SETUP BLACK turn F3 and for HUE turn F4 To go to other menus assigned to the menu button press the single arrow down button To return to the previous menu press the single arrow up button Menu title Menu page number P 41 REI PESSI IN SEL SDI 1 F2 FS2 IN SEL SDI 1 F4 SORA Ho sD FRAME SYNCHRPNIZER FA 9520 Parameter Setting value lt LIVE SAFE mode gt Menus that do not request a setting change confirmation such as VIDEO PROC AMP are used the same as in NORMAL mode Menus that request a setting change confirmation such as VIDEO INPUT SET will be in the setting change confirming state when the parameter is changed Example Pressing the IN SEL DOWNMIX button while the button is in VIDEO menu selection mode lit green will display the VIDEO INPUT SET menu above figure To change the FS1 input video signal turn F1 Turn F2 to change the FS2 input video signal If any setting is changed single arrow button
104. the factory Remember my password User name fa9520 Password foranetwork Click OK The Status page is displayed If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Status page will be displayed without displaying the Login page or authentication dialog FA 9520 Logout SS cR cx Ox Om M Video Audio System GPI Utility Status Network gt Unit Video Status Audio Status UnitInformation Ancillary Status Video Input Status Video Output Status Unit Status SDI In 1 1080 59 94i SDI Out 1 2 1080 59 94i Unit Name FA 9520 SDI In 2 1080 59 94i SDI Out 3 4 1080 59 94i Fan 1 Normal Composite In 525 60 Composite Out 525 60 Fan 2 Normal Reference 525 60 Option A 1080 59 94i Power 1 Normal Option A 1080 59 94i Output Mode YPbPr SMPTE Power 2 Normal Input Mode YPbPr SMPTE Option B 1080 59 94i Option B 1080 59 94i Output Mode YPbPr SMPTE Input Mode YPbPr SMPTE Click Logout to return to the Login page If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown 153 9 2 VIDEO Settings Click Click the Video tab at the top of the page The video block diagram will be displayed Each block in the diagram lets you to go to the corresponding windows or dialog boxes that allow you to change various settings Video Block Diagram FA 9520 Logout Composite In Composite 1 Out
105. traps Default is to send Item Description FAN1 Check to send an alarm trap for Fan1 FAN2 Check to send an alarm trap for Fan2 Power1 Check to send an alarm trap for Power1 Power2 Check to send an alarm trap for Power2 1 Not shown if the FA 95PS option is not installed Video Trap Allows you to select whether to send traps for Input output video signal changes Default is not to send Item Description SDI 1 In Check to send a trap for SDI In 1 SDI 2 In Check to send a trap for SDI In 2 Composite In Check to send a trap for Composite In Reference Check to send a trap for Reference SDI 1 2 Out Check to send a trap for SDI Out 1 2 SDI 3 4 Out Check to send a trap for SDI Out 3 4 Composite Out FA 95AIO Option A In FA 95AIO Option A Out Check to send a trap for Composite Out Check to send a trap for FA 95AIO Option A input video Check to send a trap for FA 95AIO Option A output video FA 95AIO Option B In Check to send a trap for FA 95AIO Option B input video FA 95AIO Option B Out Check to send a trap for FA 95AIO Option B output video 1 Shown if the FA 95AIO option is installed in option slot A 2 Shown if the FA 95AIO option is installed in option slot B Audio Trap Allows you to select whether to send traps for Input output audio signal changes No traps are sent in the default setting Item Description
106. vclip2 cei fs 1 YPbPr RGB Clip Mode O Off 9 YPbPr ORGB YPbPr Clip White Clip Black Clip Chroma Clip 111 0 A B RGB Clip White Clip Black Clip BER 8 ua 5 H Buu 2 YPbPr RGB Clip FS2 Mozilla Firefox DER 192168 0 10 html vclip2 cgi fs 2 White Clip Black Clip Chroma Clip White Clip Black Clip YPbPr RGB Clip Mode YPbPr ORGB YPbPr Clip ila Lots Y BB uni mas d Lu RGB Clip After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click t to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps YPbPr RGB Clip Mode Parameter Default Setting range Description Off Selects a mode whether to clip Clip Mode Off YPbPr signals in the YPbPr or RGB color RGB space YPbPr Clip Parameter Default PNEU ME Description p Y White Clip 109 096 05 lo Sets the Y signal upper threshold RE o Y Black Clip 7 5 5 o Sets the Y signal lower threshold Chroma Clip 111 0 50 0 111 0 Sets both the upper and lower PbPr Chroma Clip ias 0 596 thresholds of PbPr signals Selectable when Clip Mode is set to YPbPr RGB Clip Parameter Default EI Description White Clip 300 0 50 300 Sets the upper RGB color spa
107. will not be displayed while changing FS1 and FS2 settings simultaneously Setting range 5 Parameter Default Steps Description Level 25 0 CEA Adjusts the color level in SEPIA mode Color 160 0 Tu m aoe Adjusts the color in SEPIA mode If AVO Control is set to Auto or Hold in the Auto Video Optimizer AVO menu 9 2 2 the Sepia settings cannot be changed IMPORTANT Differential or Sepia mode settings under Correction Mode will automatically change to Balance mode whenever AVO is enabled While AVO is being used the color corrector performs correction as if Correction Mode is in Balance mode and the gamma curve type is Black curve Color correction enabled by setting AVO Control to Hold is also performed in the above state 170 FS1 lt gt FS2 Copying The FS1 gt FS2 button in the FS1 Color Corrector dialog box next to Correction Mode allows you to copy the Correction Mode setting of FS1 to FS2 A confirmation dialog as shown below appears Message from webpage 2 Are you sure you want to Copy Video Level Click OK to copy the FS1 Correction Mode setting to FS2 Click Cancel to stop copying White Level Black Level Gamma Level and Sepia settings can also be copied to FS2 in the same manner To copy FS2 settings to FS1 click the FS2 gt FS1 button in the FS2 Color Corrector dialog box and proceed in the same manner Copy All to FS1 FS2 Click Copy All to FS2 in the Color
108. with 1110 alternative 14 9 center alternative 14 9 center 4 3 L ALT 4 3 Letterbox 16 9 image with 16 9 F ALT4 3 Full frame 16 9 image with 1111 alternative 4 3 center alternative 4 3 center 273 SMPTE RP186 2008 VI AFD aspect ratio table Description AFD Code RESERVED Reserved 0000 RESERVED Reserved 0001 BOX 16 9 TOP Box 16 9 top 0010 BOX 14 9 TOP Box 14 9 top 0011 BOX gt 16 9 CTR Box gt 16 9 center 0100 RESERVED Reserved 0101 RESERVED Reserved 0110 RESERVED Reserved 0111 AS THE CD FRM Active format is the same as coded frame 1000 4 3 CTR 4 3 center 1001 16 9 CTR 16 9 center 1010 14 9 CTR 14 9 center 1011 RESERVED Reserved 1100 4 3 WITH 14 9 PRTD 4 3 with shoot and protect 14 9 center 1101 16 9 WITH 14 9 PRTD 16 9 with shoot and protect 14 9 center 1110 16 9 WITH 4 3 PRTD 16 9 with shoot and protect 4 3 center 1111 ITU R BT 1119 2 WSS aspect ratio table Description AFD Code F 4 3 full format 4 3 1000 BOX 14 9 CTR box 14 9 center 0001 BOX 14 9 TOP box 14 9 top 0010 BOX 16 9 CTR box 16 9 center 1011 BOX 16 9 TOP box 16 9 top 0100 BOX gt 16 9 CTR box gt 16 9 center 1101 F 14 9 CTR PRTD full format 14 9 center shoot and protect 14 9 1110 F 16 9 AMRPH full format 16 9 anamorphic 0111 274 21 About Closed Captioning The FA 9520 supports 3 closed caption standards CEA6
109. 0 59p 1080 50p AUTO OE OE OE OE F F F F F F 525 60 OE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE 625 50 NOE OE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE 1080 59i NOE NOE OE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE 1080 50 NOE NOE NOE OE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE 720 59p NF NF NF NF F NF NF NF NF NF 720 50p NF NF NF NF NF F NF NF NF NF 1080 23PsF NF NF NF NF NF NF F NF NF NF 1080 24PsF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF F NF NF 1080 59p NF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF F NF 1080 50p NF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF F OE Can be set to FRAME ODD or EVEN F Fixed to FRAME NOE Can be set to FRAME ODD or EVEN but the image does not appear properly NF Fixed to FRAME and the image does not appear properly See section 5 9 1 FS MODE SET for the SYNC FRMT 5 9 6 ANC SET 6 6 Parameter Default Setting range Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Description ANC MODE H V ANC H V ANC DETAIL Selects ancillary data processing mode for the FS1 or FS2 output signal H ANC and V ANC menu settings will become available when H V ANC is selected DETAIL Removes all H and V ancillary data and embeds newly specified ancillary data such as CC and AFD Set to DETAIL to enable settings in 5 7 4 ANC DATA EMBED and 5 7 5 ANC EMBED LINE H ANC OVERWRITE OVERWRITE IN DATA BLANK Embeds audio signals into horizontal ancillary data of FS1 or FS2 output videos OVERWRITE Removes th
110. 0 Displays the LAN PORT1 gateway The NETWORK INFO settings can be changed on a web browser window on a computer See section 9 8 2 NETWORK SETTING for details 7 8 UNIT Ver Menu button FPGA1 01 00 STATUS FPGA2 01 00 FPGA3 01 00 STUER SOFT 2 00 8 00 Parameter Description FPGA1 Displays the FPGA1 version information FPGA2 Displays the FPGA2 version information FPGA3 Displays the FPGA3 version information Displays the FA 9520 operation mode software version information First 4 SOFT digits Displays the FA 9500 operation mode software version information Last 4 digits 147 7 9 OPTION A Ver Menu button STATUS OTHER Setting range e Parameter Default Steps Description Displays the name of the optional device that is NAME 7 installed in OPTION SLOT A Displays NONE if no device is installed Displays the FPGA1 version information in FPGA1 OPTION SLOT A Displays if the version is not supported Displays the FPGA2 version information in FPGA2 OPTION SLOT A Displays if the version is not supported Displays the version information of SOFT in SOFT OPTION SLOT A Displays if the version is not supported Display when FA 95DACBL is installed Menu button STATUS OTHER Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description
111. 08 CC S334 1 CC SD and CEA708 CC HD Outline of each standard CEA608 CC Closed captioning for 525 60 video signals Closed caption data is carried in line 21 in luminance level signals Originally used for analog composite signals The FA 9520 can detect CEA608CC data in analog composite and SD SDI signals Detection in analog Y C and YPbPr signals is not supported In the same manner insertion into analog composite and SD SDI signals is supported Insertion into analog Y C and YPbPr signals is not supported 334 1 CC SD Data packet closed caption standard for SD SDI as defined by DID and SDID in ancillary data The FA 9520 can detect and inset the data into 525 60 video signals CEA708 CC HD Data packet closed caption standard for HD SDI as defined by DID and SDID in ancillary data The FA 9520 can detect and inset the data into 1080 59i and 720 59p video signals Refer to SMPTE standard documents for details 21 1 Closed Captioning Setting Procedure e Select an input signal type under IN SEL in the FS INPUT SELECT menu see Sec 5 6 1 e f 525 60 SD SDI signal is selected under IN SEL specify the closed caption data type to detect in ANC DETECT SEL Sec 5 6 4 If the selected input signal is 1080 59i or 720 59p closed caption data will be automatically detected in CEA708 CC HD data The status of CEA608 CC closed caption data detection in input signals can be verified in the ANC1 IN STATUS menu see Sec 5 10 21
112. 08 CC to process closed caption data in the luminance signal Y of CEA608 CC 525 60 system 1 CARTION id S334 1 CC Select S334 1 CC to process closed caption data in ancillary data space of SDI signal 2016 3 AFD AFD S2016 3 AFD RP186 VI TOU OD DUT sonis ie BT1119WSS 1 Be sure to set to CEA608 CC when processing closed caption data in 525 60 composite signals Otherwise the caption data will not be detected 60 5 6 5 AIO A IN MODE 32 Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX Parameter Default Setting range Description YPbPr SMPTE Selects the operation mode for input video signals in the MODE YPbPr SMPTE Hic FA 95AIO installed in slot A This menu will not appear if no Y C FA 95AIO is installed in slot A 5 6 6 AIO B IN MODE MIETEN DOWNMIX Parameter Default Setting range Description YPbPr SMPTE Selects the operation mode for input video signals in the MODE YPbPr SMPTE YPPPY EE TACAM FA 9SAIO installed in slot B This menu will not appear if no Y C FA 95AIO is installed in slot B 61 5 7 VIDEO OUT SELECT OUT SEL Allows you to select output modes and whether to output a signal from FS1 or FS2 for respective video output connectors 5 7 1 OUTPUT ASSIGN Allows you to assign video signals to output from video output connectors 3 4 S DIE YXq 23481 Menu button SDI 3 4 FS 2 COMPOSITE FSI OUT SEL MODE
113. 080 and V 720 settings in section 5 9 2 HD PHASE SET and the V PHASE setting in section 5 9 3 SD PHASE SET to their default values according to the set SYNCHRO mode 6 Switching input signals with a phase difference using a router or such device may cause shock noise to occur on video or audio signals if the phase difference compared to the genlock signal exceeds the range shown in the following table If the difference is within range shock noise will not occur Video format SD HD Phase difference from genlock signal 1H with line differences depending on video format to 1 2H 5H with line differences depending on video format to 1 2H 70 Table of Reference signals and Input formats that can lock Reference signal Input signal 525 60 1080 59i 720 59p 625 50 1080 50i 720 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF 525 60 ZZ ZZ Y Y z 1080 59i ZZ ZZ Y Y E 720 59p ZZ ZZ ZZ Y 1080 59p ZZ ZZ ZZ Y 625 50 ZZ ZZ Y 1080 50i ZZ ZZ Y 720 50p ZZ ZZ ZZ Y 1080 50p ZZ ZZ ZZ Y 1080 23PsF Y Y Y ZZ 1080 24PsF Y Y ZZ V YY SYNCHRO can be set to FRAME LINE or AVDL Y SYNCHRO can only be set to FRAME Unable to synchronize 5 9 2 HD PHASE SET 62 Menu button H 1080 0CLK VIDEO SYS Wa u T AUDIO sys FSULOCK FS2 LOCK v 720 OLINE Paramete
114. 0i 02 625 50i 04 1080 59i phen A 05 1080 50 09 1080 24PsF 10 1080 23 98PsF Reference IN ES 1080 20 a952StatusDolbyOpARefin B INTEGER Jo 20 720 59p 21 720 50p 29 Unknown 30 BY PASS 31 DISABLE 32 none 33 cannotdetection OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 5 3 100 Option A Dolby status 0 loss AUX IN d P BGM fa952StatusDolbyOpBAuxIn 1 INTEGER O 3 unknown 0 pcm AUX OUT 1 nonPCM fa952StatusDolbyOpBAuxOut 2 INTEGER 2 none 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50i 04 1080 59i Soda E 05 1080 50i 09 1080 24PsF 10 1080 23 98PsF Reference IN E 1080 20 fao52StatusDolbyOpBRefln B INTEGER lo 20 720 59p 21 720 50p 29 Unknown 30 BY PASS 31 DISABLE 32 none 33 cannotdetection 258 TRAP List Traps can be sent or not be sent by settings See section 9 8 4 TRAP SETTING for details o Available Unavailable Object Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type Write Read rap Trap alid Event value OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 01 6 1 UNIT TRAP FAN1 0 Normal 1 Stopped fa952Fan1ChangedTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change FAN2 0 Normal 1 Stopped fa952Fan2ChangedTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change Power1 1 Not Install 0 Normal 1 Abnormal fa952Power1ChangedTrap 11 NOTIFICATION TYPE Change Power2 1 Not Install 0 Normal 1 Abnormal fa952Power2ChangedTrap 12 NOTIFICATION TY
115. 1 2 1 Dolby Encoder CH 1 2 500Hz Tone Encoded Dolby E signal of 1kHz Tone selected signals of SOURCE Sil channels Lence 500Hz Tone 500Hz Test signal None TONE 1kHz Tone 1KHz Test signal TONE Silence Mute signal None No signal output 1 Shown only if the FA 95DE E option is installed 196 9 3 15 Dolby E Encoder Clicking block 16 on the audio block diagram when the FA 95DE E option is installed in option slot A B opens the Dolby E Encoder dialog box The options in slots A and B can be set separately 7 Dolby E Encoder SLOT A Mozilla Firefox 1921680 10 html dolby enc2 cei slo Dolby Encoder Input Assign Input Selection Direct Input Selection Dolby Decoder Output Embedded 1CH 1 Embedded 1CH2 Embedded 1 CH 3 Embedded 1CH4 vw Embedded 1CH5 Embedded 1CH6 Embedded 1CH7 Embedded 1 CH8 After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Dolby Encoder Mode Setting Program Configuration 5 1 2 i Bit Depth 20bit Frame REF Grs1 Ors2 Metadata Input G Internal O Dolby Decoder Output Refresh Dolby Encoder Input Assign Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a signal to be input to the Dolby encoder Input Direct Input Direct Input Selection Direct Input Selection Source Selection Selection Dolby Decoder Output channel signals of the FA 9520 Dolby D
116. 1 CH1 111 6 5 2 EMB2 OUT REMAP Menu button PROCESS SDI AUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an FS2 audio channel to CH SEL CH1 CH1 CH16 embed audio signal from CH1 through 16 EMB1 CH1 16 EMB2 CH1 16 AES CH1 8 ANALOG CH 1 4 DOWN MIX1 L DOWN MIX1 R DOWN MIX2 L DOWN MIX2 R 500Hz TONE 1KHz TONE SILENCE Dolby DECA CH1 8 Selects an audio signal to embed ASSIGN EMB2 CH1 16 72 iode Res dic Channel BOE BRA a 2 selected under CH SEL Dolby ENCA CH1 2 Dolby DECB CH1 8 Dolby DMB L Dolby DMB R Dolby ENCB CH1 2 L LOUD1A R LOUD2A C LOUD1B LFE LOUD2B 7 Ls Rs R Displays the input signal from which SDI IN1 the selected embedded audio signal FROM SDI IN2 is input if ASSIGN is set to one pues among EMB1 CH1 through 16 and EMB2 CH1 through 16 1 Ifthe AES connector is set to be used for input the selected AES channel will be displayed with an as AES CH1 and no audio signal will be output To change AES I O settings see section 6 2 4 AES I O SETUP for details 2 Not shown if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is not installed in option slot A 3 Not shown if the FA 95DE E option is not installed in option slot A 4 Not shown if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is not installed in option slot B 5 Not shown if the FA 95DE E option is not installed in option slot B 6 Not shown if the FA 95ALA opti
117. 1 Video System gt FS2 Video System gt Audio System gt ANC Settings gt Composite Settings FS 1 SD Phase FS 1 HD Phase FS 1 SD Line Mask H Phase oem p E uev reso 1 Phase Jem p BH uv Lines GPoss Opiank V Phase O Line HH BY uv 100 v Phase gt Line UMTV Line GPass OBlank 720 H Phase Jek i H uv Lines GPass OBlank 720 V Phase Ling YH Y univ tines Geass OBlank FS 1 Video Position FS 1 Freeze Setting Line 10 Pass OBlank H Position ra amp uv Freeze owon Gon COn Line 11 Pass CBlonk V Position 9 Lin HH BY Lary Freeze Mode frame Odd Even Line 12 Pass OBlank Strobe 8 f UNITY i c re j B mm Line 13 Pass CBlank FS 1 Synchro Mode Line 14 Pass OBlank Synchro Mode Frame Sync OlLine Sync CAVDL Line 15 OPass OBlank Syne Format Auto Detect Y Line 16 Grass Obienk Forced Field Sot Oodd Ofven Line 17 Pass OBlank FS 1 Ancillary Setting FS 1 Audio Group r te Line 18 9Pass Blank ANC Mode H V ANC Detail Group 1 Disable Enable Line 19 GP Blank H ANC overwrite In Data Blank Group 2 Disable Enable i dico ine 20 Pass CBlank V ANC DPass Blank Group 3 Disable DEnablo Line 2 Pese Bien ine 21 Opi JBlank Group 4 Disable SEnable Line zt Pan 0t Line 22 Pass OBlank Line 23 Pass CBlank Refrach Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps
118. 1 and FS2 are displayed on the 4 row 1 BT1119 WSS will be embedded according to the WSS AFD ERROR settings Sec 5 9 8 for the non WSS aspect ratio conversions Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively 42 5 3 2 CONV Conversion Table Possible Conversions in CONV for Input Signal Formats and Mode Selections Common for FS1 and FS2 CONVERTER mode selection Input signal SD 1080i 720p 1080PsF 1080p 3G 525 60 525 60 1080 59i 720 59p 1080 23PsF 1080 59p 1080 59i 525 60 1080 59 720 59p ur 1080 59p NTSC 720 59p formats 720 59p 525 60 1080 59 720 59p B BARS 1080 59p 1080 59p 1080 59p 525 60 1080 59i 720 59p SY PASS 1080 59p 625 50 625 50 1080 50i 720 50p 1080 24PsF 1080 50p 1080 50i 625 50 1080 50i 720 50p rasos 1080 50p PAL 720 50 formats 720 50p 625 50 1080 50i 720 50p BY DASS 1080 50p 1080 50p 1080 50p 625 50 1080 50i 720 50p BY PARS 1080 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 23PsF 1080 23PsF ue 1080 23PsF 525 60 BY PASS BY PASS 1080 23PsF BY PASS formats 1080 24PsF 1080 24PsF 1080 24PsF 1080 24PsF 625 50 BY PASO BY PASS 1080 24PsF BY ASS In the conversions to the formats indicated as BY PASS the CONV SIZE POS CONV CROPPING CONV IMPROVE and CONV SIDE RGB settings cannot be changed 5 3 3 CONV SIZE POS 7 Menu button CONV1 ANALOG FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Parameter Default Setting range Description Steps P H SIZE 100 0 50 0
119. 1080 24PsF 19 1080 59p 20 1080 50p 249 Object group Front TITLE Item name Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type rite Read VIDEO SYSTEM FS2 System Format 0 Auto 1 525 60 2 625 50 3 1080 59 94i 4 1080 50i 5 720 59 94p 6 720 50p 7 1080 23PsF 8 1080 24PsF 19 1080 59p 20 1080 50p fa952VideoSystemFormat INTEGER OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 2 175 1 307 2 4 3 FRI EZE FREEZE FS1 Freeze Enable 0 Off 1 ON a952FS1FreezeEnable INTEGER FS1 Freeze Mode 0 FRAME 1 field Odd 2 field Even a95FS1FreezeMode INTEGER FS2 Freeze Enable 0 Off 1 ON a952FS2FreezeEnable INTEGER FS2 Freeze Mode 0 FRAME 1 field Odd 2 field Even a95FS2FreezeMode INTEGER OjJO O O OjJO O O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 2 4 4 Composite settings COMPOSITE COMB 0 Adaptive 3D 1 Adaptive 2D 2 Trap Only a952VbsCombFilter INTEGER O O NR Level 0 4 Off Level1 4 fa952VbsNRFilter INTEGER Cross Color 0 3 Off Level1 3 fa952VbsCrossColorFilter INTEGER ad ad OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 2 175 1 307 2 6 F 1Converter FS1 Converter FS1 Converter FS1CONV MODE BY PASS SD 1080 720p 1080PsF 1080p 3G fa952FS1ConvertMode INTEGER FS1Aspect SD AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 AFD 16 9 AFD 16 9 Letterbox 16 9 top Letterbox 14 9 t
120. 14 dBm 4 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 20 dBFS 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 18 dBFS 8 dBm 2 dBm 6 dBm 10 dBm 0 dBFS 10 dBm 20 dBm 24 dBm CLIP Digital Reference Level 24dBFS ANALOG OUT LEVEL setting Digital audio input level 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 24 dBFS 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 20 dBFS 6 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 12 dBm 18 dBFS 4 dBm 6 dBm 10 dBm 14 dBm 0 dBFS 14 dBm 24 dBm CLIP CLIP See REF LEVEL in section 6 11 2 DIGITAL AUDIO for details on the Digital Reference Level setting See section 6 3 3 ANALOG OUT LEVEL for details on the ANALOG OUT LEVEL setting 237 11 2 Digital Output Level Relative to the Analog Input Level Digital Reference Level 18dBFS ANALOG IN LEVEL setting Analog audio input level 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 20 dBm 28 dBFS 38 dBFS 42 dBFS 46 dBFS 10 dBm 18 dBFS 28 dBFS 32 dBFS 36 dBFS 4 dBm 12 dBFS 22 dBFS 26 dBFS 30 dBFS 0 dBm 8 dBFS 18 dBFS 22 dBFS 26 dBFS 4 dBm 4dBFS 14 dBFS 18 dBFS 22 dBFS 8 dBm OdBFS 10 dBFS 14 dBFS 18 dBFS 10 dBm CLIP 8 dBFS 12 dBFS 16 dBFS Digital Reference Level 20dBFS ANALOG IN LEVEL setting Analog audio input level 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm
121. 17 Serial Data Transport Interface for Television S305M HD SDTI 40 02 ITU R BT 1557 SMPTE 348M for HD SDTI S427 Lk Enc 1 40 04 SMPTE 427 Link Encryption Message 1 S427 Lk Enc 2 40 05 SMPTE 427 Link Encryption Message 2 S427 Lk Meta 40 06 SMPTE 427 Link Encryption Metadata S352M VPID 41 01 BTA S 004C Video Payload Identification for Digital Interfaces S2016 3 AFD Bar 41 05 SMPTE 2016 3 AFD and Bar Data S2016 4 PanScan 41 06 SMPTE 2016 3 Pan Scan Data RP2010 SCTE 104 41 07 SMPTE 2010 ANSI SCTE 104 messages S2031 SCTE VBI 41 08 SMPTE 2010 DVB SCTE VBI data ITU R BT 1685 43 01 ITU R BT 1685 Inter station control data packets RDD8 OP47 SDP 43 02 SMPTE RDD 8 Subtitling Distribution packet SDP RDD8 OP47 Mult 43 03 SMPTE RDD 8 Transport of ANC packet in an ANC Multipacket S346M 43 13 Time Division Multiplexing Video Signals and Generic Data over HD SDI RP214 KLV V 44 04 SMPTE RP 214 KLV Metadata transport in VANC space RP214 KLV H 44 14 SMPTE RP 214 KLV Metadata transport in HANC space RP223 UMID 44 44 SMPTE RP 223 Packing UMID and Program Identification Label Data into SMPTE 291M Ancillary Data Packets 2020 Aud 45 01 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata 2020AudPr1 2 45 02 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata S2020AudPr3 4 45 03 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata 2020AudPr5 6 45 04 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata S2020AudPr7 8 45 05 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata S2020AudPr9 10 45 06 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Meta
122. 2 5 9 4 VIDEO POSITION eite da eevee ely in ERR ERU EUR Er ee D FRATRI end teer gan 73 92925 EREEZE SET a ee eue ec dme ree a 73 DIPANG SET ai AA eigen te wba io de tr en etu era 74 5 9 HANG LOSS SET iiie tie teilte Perles de EP e ere retta 75 5 9 8 WSS AFD ERROR ssssssssssseseseneeeee nennen ne remrtren eren enne nnrerl nsn enne nennen ern ns nnn 76 5 0 9 AUDIO GROUP A RR ER pepe eu ee DE HERE RD e ERR ie 76 5 910 TEST SIGNAL ates or ree oie 77 9 9 11 BY PASS SETTING 0 iia 77 5 9 12 AlO BY PASS SET eibi e eint se Pte tis et e t oa Perd 78 5 9 13 SD EINEMASIS ie e tH UL edet 79 929 14 COMPOSITE SET 1 inii A te c tude t i en 80 5 9 15 COMPOSITE SET2 craves rte RU cee cal i ELO eee de Eo e RUP e ndn OE LEER E dares 80 5 10 Various Signal Status Display STATUS ssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeennnn 81 5210 1 NLT AEAEM 22h de aereo da it eect eet tace pee idee pee des Failed ded is 81 5 102 VIDEO IN STATUS iiti eie tates P Ptr atletas 82 5 10 3 VIDEO OPTION INPUT sesssssseseeenenenee eene en nne n nennen nennen ns 83 5 10 4 VIDEO QUT STATU S siecle tede dabei e Mei eee 84 5 10 5 VIDEO OPTION OUTPUT sssssssssseeee eere nnne nnh aAa nennen nnn nennen 84 5 10 6 AUBDIO IN DETEG T T tenente i io eere Ene netted Pero de pee eal 85 5 1057 AUDIO IN DETEGT2 2 riti e ee te etat ben EEE 85 5 10 8 AUDIO OUTPUT 1 i cedet et etta ed e d 86 9210 9 AUDIO OUTPUTS it f
123. 2 For HD SD SDI Simul Output It is possible to always output HD SDI signal from SDI OUT1 2 and SD SDI signal from SDI OUT3 4 regardless of whether the input signal is HD or SD SDI Input an HD SD SDI signal Reference signal BB or Tri level sync signal synchronized with the input to SDI IN1 ANALOG AUDIO REMOTE LANZ BJ D er LO z c y 4 090s aoz tiov aH OBOE HORE DO ION Outputs an Outputs an Terminate at 75 HD SDI signal SD SDI signal ohm if not used synchronized with synchronized with the reference the reference signal from SDI signal from SDI OUT1 and 2 OUT3 and 4 Settings that need to be checked Set FS1 IN SEL to SDI1 in the FS INPUT SELECT menu see section 5 6 1 Set FS2 IN SEL to SDI2 in theFS INPUT SELECT menu see section 5 6 1 Set SDI1 2 to FS1 in the OUTPUT ASSIGN menu see section 5 7 1 Set SDI3 4 to FS2 in theOUTPUT ASSIGN menu see section 5 7 1 Set FS1 conversion mode CONV to 1080i or an HD format such as 720p in the CONV MODE menu see section 5 3 1 Set FS1 ASPECT to 16 9 P 4 3 in the CONV MODE menu see section 5 3 1 Set FS1 SD ASPECT to 4 3 in the VIDEO INPUT SET menu see section 5 6 2 Set FS2 conversion mode CONV to SD in the CONV MODE menu see section 5 3 1 Set FS2 ASPECT to 4 3 F
124. 2 Turn F1 to F4 control knobs to change FS1 settings Example 2 Setting VIDEO PROCESS AMP for FS2 vaD EO PROC 1 Menu button Unlit Lit green PROCESS SDI AUDIO FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK 1 Press the PROCESS SDI AUDIO button to open the VIDEO PROCESS AMP menu Press the FS2 LOCK button for it to light green 2 Turn control knobs F1 to F4 to change FS2 settings 35 Example 3 Setting VIDEO PROCESS AMP for FS1 and FS2 simultaneously VIDEO PROC AMP FSI Menu button Lit green Blinking green VI DEO LEVEL 100 0 CHROMA LEVEL 100 0 PROCESS het BLACK 0 0 SDI AUDIO FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK HUE 0 0 1 Press the PROCESS SDI AUDIO button to open the VIDEO PROCESS AMP menu Press the FS2 LOCK button for it to light green 2 Press the FS1 LOCK and FS2 LOCK buttons simultaneously One button will blink and another will light green Press the FS1 LOCK button for it to light green In the VIDEO PROCESS AMP menu FS1 setting values are displayed FS1 or FS2 will be displayed in the space a page number is usually displayed Pressing the FS2 LOCK button will light the button green and display FS2 setting values in the menu 3 Turn control knobs F1 to F4 to change setting values The same amount of setting values are changed for FS1 and FS2 simultaneously 4 To exit simultaneous setting mode simultaneously press FS1 LOCK and FS2 LOCK buttons again One button will go off and the other will light green allowing s
125. 2 CH1 2 15 16 AUX IN Input signal in the optional Dolby AES CH1 2 7 8 input connector Dolby IN D 32bit Displays signal type and bit width of signal D 16bit 1 2 1 2 CH selected under INPUT E 24 20 16 bit D Dolby Digital signal STREAM PCM E Dolby E signal LOSS PCM Normal audio signal ERROR LOSS No signal ERROR Unidentifiable Dolby E 5 142 5 1 2x1 4 4 4 2x2 4 2 2x1 4 4x1 4x2 3x2 2x1 2x2 4x1 2 6x1 8x1 5 1 4 2 4 2x1 3x2 2x2 2x1 eM Displays Dolby E program configuration 4 Coding mode or status of signal selected 242 under INPUT d 2 2x1 See Dolby E Digital Decoder Output PROGRAM 4x1 Channel Assignment table in section 13 7 1 Dolby E Decoder Encoder Channel 7 1 Screen Assignment Table for channel NON Dolby E assignments of respective configurations Dolby Digital 1 1 1 0 2 0 3 0 2 1 3 1 2 2 3 2 3 0L 2 1L 3 1L 2 2L 3 2L LOSS INVALID 126 6 10 1 3 Dolby DECODER REFERENCE This menu is displayed only if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is installed in slot A NP UT NONE Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Menu names and menu pages for the option in slot B change as shown below Dolby DEC REF B 233 Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a reference signal to be used in the Dolby decoder PCM signal output from the Dolby decoder will be synchronized to the selected reference signal NONE NONE
126. 2 can be selected or verified separately using the FS1 or FS2 button Can change settings for FS1 and FS2 simultaneously in LINK mode and are not shown in the menu display e When changed in LIVE SAFE mode single up and down arrow buttons and the LED around the control knob of which setting is changed blink confirming the setting change To set the FA 9520 to LIVE SAFE mode change the mode setting referring to section 7 4 FRONT OPERATION e is not shown in the menu display 31 4 2 3 Arrow Buttons Double arrow buttons up and down lt NORMAL mode gt The double arrow buttons allow you to go to the first menu of the video or audio menus that are assigned to the respective menu buttons or first menus of major setting menus designated by lt gt in the above menu list lt LIVE SAFE mode gt Button functions are the same as NORMAL mode however double arrow buttons are inoperative while single arrow buttons are blinking indicating the FA 9520 is in the setting change confirming state because a parameter in one of the menus requiring a setting change confirmation has been changed Single arrow buttons up and down lt NORMAL mode gt The single arrow buttons allow you to move between menus within the menus that are assigned to respective menu buttons When it reaches the last menu the light goes off lt LIVE SAFE mode gt Single arrow buttons blink when a parameter in on
127. 2A B L Rs Loudness controlled LOUD2A 3 C signal 4 LOUDIB 4 Ls When INPUT is set to Dolby DEC OUT Rs Dolby DEC1 8 PCM signal output from the Dolby decoder Den DORY DECT OJT DolbyDM L R Down mixed signal is selected Dolby DEC 1 8 Hr que from Dolby decoded PCM DolbyDM L 500Hz 1KHz TONE Test signal TONE DolbyDM R SILENCE Mute signal 500Hz TONE 1KHz TONE SILENCE 1 DIRECT IN SEL and Dolby DEC OUT settings are retained until changed When an INPUT setting DIRECT IN SEL or Dolby DEC OUT is changed CH1 8 signal assignments will be changed to that of the INPUT selection DIRECT IN SEL and Dolby DEC OUT signals cannot be input to the Dolby encoder together Dolby Digital signal output from the Dolby decoder Dolby DEC OUT cannot be encoded to the Dolby E signal 2 EMB1 channels corresponding to CH1 8 will be the default value CH1 EMB 1 CH1 2 CH8 EMB1 CH15 16 If INPUT is set to Dolby DEC OUT the settings will be CH1 Dolby DEC 1 CH8 Dolby DEC 8 9 Shown if the FA 95ALA is installed in slot A 4 Shown if the FA 95ALA is installed in slot B 129 6 10 1 7 Dolby ENCODER SETTING This menu is displayed only if FA 95DE E option is installed in option slot A 187 Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Menu names and menu pages for the option in slot B chang as shown below Dod Dy BANG SCE T GB 237 Parameter Default Setting range Description 5 1 2 1 5 1
128. 3 5 CONV IMPROVE Menu button CONV1 ANALOG FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description MOTION ANTIALIAS H ADAPTIVE NORMAL FIELD ADAPTIVE FRM ODD 1st FRM EVEN 1st WEAK 8 1 NORMAL STRONG1 8 FIELD Generates a progressive scan image from one field of an interlaced scan image The created image has no motion artifacts but vertical resolution will be reduced ADAPTIVE Detects whether there is motion or no motion in the scene and generate an optimal progressive scan image FRM ODD 1st Generates a progressive scan image from two fields odd even of and interlaced scan image Suitable for the progressive segment frame input of progressive scan signals FRM EVEN 1st Generates a progressive scan image from two fields even odd of interlaced scan image Performs horizontal anti aliasing for the output video image WEAK 8 to STRONG 8 low to high This setting cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BYPASS in the CONV Conversion Table in section 5 3 2 ANTIALIAS V NORMAL WEAK 8 1 NORMAL STRONG1 8 Performs vertrical anti aliasing for the output video image WEAK 8 to STRONG 8 low to high This setting cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BYPASS in the CONV Conversion Table in section 5 3 2 ENHANCE LEVEL 0 LEVEL 0 8 Sharpens the
129. 4 3 in the CONV MODE menu see section 5 3 1 Change ASPECT and or SD ASPECT settings if necessary 23 3 3 To Embed AES Input Signals on SDI Signals The following describes how to embed 4 channel AES signals on SDI signals in SDI OUT 1 and 2 output signals Input an HD SD SDI signal to SDI IN1 SS et me eL UR OWS JENS 9 Gp K OW H MS ata ie The AES signals are embedded to Input AES signals to DIGITAL AUDIO IO AUDIO CH 1 through 4 of output signals 1 2 and 103 4 from SDI OUT1 and 2 Settings that need to be checked e Set FS1 IN SEL to SDI1 in the FS INPUT SELECT menu see section 5 6 1 e Set SDI 1 2 to FS1 in the OUTPUT ASSIGN menu see section 5 7 1 e Set CH1 through CH4 to AES CH1 through CH4 respectively in the EMB1 OUT REMAP menu see section 6 5 1 Change if necessary audio settings in the AES AUDIO Settings AES AUDIO section 6 2 and or AUDIO DELAY Settings section 6 6 and or the SRC mode setting in the EMB1 SRC MODE menu section 6 9 1 24 3 4 To Embed Analog Audio Signals on SDI Signals The following describes how to embed a 4 channel analog audio signal on SDI OUT1 and 2 output signals Input audio signals to ANALOG Input an HD SD SDI AUDIO IN1 4 channels signal to SDI IN1
130. 4StatusChangeTrap 14 NOT SOURCE CH15 Ditto fa9525DI1 20PutAudioCh15StatusChangeTrap 15 NOT SOURCE CH16 Ditto ffa952SD11 20PutAudioCh16StatusChangeTrap 16 NOT OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 6 4 SDI 3 4 Audio TRAP O Loss 1 PCM 2 PCM 48kHz 3 PCM 44 1kHz 4 PCM 32kHz 5 PCM Other 6 Silence 7 Silence 48kHz SOURCE CH1 8 Silence 44 1kHz fa952SDI3 4OPutAudioCh1StatusChangeTrap 1 NOTIFICATION TYPE 9 Silence 32kHz 10 Silence Other 11 NON PCM 12 PCM Async 13 Silence Async 14 NON PCM Async 15 IN 16 Unknown SOURCE CH2 Ditto fa952SDI3 40PutAudioCh2StatusChangeTrap 2 SOURCE CH3 Ditto fa9525DI3 40PutAudioCh3StatusChangeTrap 3 NOT SOURCE CH4 Ditto fa952SD13 4OPutAudioCh4StatusChangeTrap 4 NOT SOURCE CH5 Ditto fa952SD13 4OPutAudioCh5StatusChangeTrap 5 NOT 6 7 8 O Change NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT CATION TYPE CATION TYPE CATION TYPE CATION TYPE CATION TYPE CATION TYPE CATION TYPE CATION TYPE CATION TYPE CATION TYPE CATION TYPE CATION TYPE CATION TYPE CATION TYPE CATION TYPE Change Change Change Change Change Change Change Change Change Change Change Change Change Change Change o 1o o E TSO ENS GAGAQGadgqgagqgggag my Ty T 22 2 T 3 3 T1 O Change NOTIFICATION TYPE CATION TYPE CATION TYPE CATION TYPE Change Change Change Change SOURCE CH6 Ditto fa952SDI3 40PutAudioCh6
131. 5 the Logout is not shown 177 9 3 1 SDI Input Clicking block 1 or 2 on the audio block diagram opens the SDI 1 2 Input dialog box SDI 1 Input and SDI 2 Input dialog boxes allow you to set FS1 and FS2 embedded audio settings respectively Embedded 1 Input Mozilla Firefox Jte Embedded 2 Input Mozilla Firefox DER Ja b 192168D10 ntmi emb in2acei embin1 b 192168010 html emb_in2b cei embin2 Embedded 1 Input Gain Embedded 2 Input Gain Master 0 0 4B Y El Ch 1 oag j i Ch 2 ooa Y Ch 3 ooa i Y ie H B cod ff E 0048 E 0 0 dB o o aB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB Master L 0 0 dB Ch 1 0 0 dB Ch2 0 0 dB Ch3 0 0 dB 00 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 00 dB 0 0 dB 00 dB 00 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 10 00 00 100 00 00 100 00 00 100 00 00 00 00 00 tu LE es e B s a A es E mm Embedded 1 In Audio Embedded 2 In Audio Alignment O Disable Enable Alignment ODisable Enable HD SDI ACLK Auto O Sync SDI O Audio Clock HD SDI ACLK Auto O Sync SDI O Audio Clock After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the
132. 50 0 50 Composite Clip processing 111 default White setting range Black setting range White setting range Black setting range 5 6 VIDEO INPUT SELECT IN SEL Allows you to select input video signals and select the operation for when signal input is lost 5 6 1 FS INPUT SELECT Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX Parameter Default Setting range Description SDM Selects an input video signal for FS1 SDI2 OPTION A Input signal from the FS1 IN SEL SD BOONE FA 95AIO in option slot A OPTION B OPTION B Input signal from the FA 95AIO in option slot B SDM Selects an input video signal for FS2 SDI2 OPTION A Input signal from the FS2IN SEL SDI2 Do FA 95AIO in option slot A OPTION B OPTION B Input signal from the FA 95AIO in option slot B 1 Selectable only if the FA 95AIO option is installed in option slot A 2 Selectable only if the FA 95AIO option is installed in option slot B COMPOSITE OPTION A or OPTION B cannot be selected for both FS1 and FS2 If you wish to select COMPOSITE OPTION A or OPTION B for either FS while the same signal is selected for the other FS reset the current COMPOSITE OPTION A or OPTION B selection to SDI 1 or 2 first then select a signal as you wish If COMPOSITE OPTION A or OPTION B is selected for both FS1 IN SEL and FS2 IN SEL the CANNOT ASSIGN SIMUL COMPOSITE FA 95AI0 alert message will appear 58 5
133. 50 BB signal 1080 59p 525 60 BB signal 1080 50p 625 50 BB signal 64 5 7 4 ANC DATA EMBED Allows you to set ancillary data insertion into SDI signal ancillary spaces Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description CEA608 CC 334 1 CC SD CEA708 CC HD ANC CEA608 CC S2016 3 AFD Selects an ancillary data type to insert RP186 VI BT1119 WSS Selects a video format that supports the FORMAT d ancillary data selected under ANC Only selectable format will be shown DISABLE Does not insert ancillary data DISABLE selected under ANC EMBED A ENABLE ENABLE Inserts ancillary data selected under ANC Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively See the Ancillary Data Types table below for details Ancillary Data Types Data type Description CEA608 CC Closed caption data inserted as Y signals into line 21 of 525 60 analog and SDI signals S334 1 CC Closed caption data inserted as data packets into the ancillary data space of 525 60 SDI signals CEA708 CC_ Closed caption data inserted as data packets into the ancillary data space of HD SDI signals 1080i 720p S2016 3 AFD Aspect ratio data inserted as data packets into the ancillary data space of SD and HD SDI signals 525 60 625 50 1080i PsF 720p 1080p 3G RP186 VI Aspect ratio data inserted into bit 3 of Chroma data in the SD SDI 525 60 625 50 V A
134. 6 10 2 4 LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT When installed in option slot A Channel 1 Menu button MODE STEREO L BM BiA CoH 7 VIDEO OP R EMBI CH 2 AUDIO OP C INVALID LOUD CH ASGNIA 71 E uw Dd r lus C C NV INV 1 NV gt gt gt F L S L S L When installed in option slot A Channel 2 LOU CH ASGN2A 224 ODE E 1 2 ODZ rn rn co 2 z z OD O0 rn gt MN no TODO C rcr L LOUD CH ASGN2A 22 E Cn C2 0 0 LF NV Ls INV Rs INV gt gt gt El LI LI Menu names and menu pages for the FA 95ALA in option slot B change as shown below When installed in option slot A Channel 1 LOUD CH ASGNIB 264 LOUD CH ASGNIB 265 When installed in option slot A Channel 2 LOUD CH ASGN2B 214 LOUD CH ASGN2B 275 Parameter Default Setting range Description MONAURAL Allows you to specify the audio mode of MODE STEREO STEREO the audio signal loudness level to be 5 1CH measured and adjusted Allows you to select an audio channel of L CH EMB1 2 CH1 1 which loudness level to be measured and adjusted EMB1 FS1 IN input audio channels EMB2 FS2 IN input audio channels EMB1 CH 1 16 AES AES input audio channels EMB2 CH 1 16 ANALOG Input analog audio channels R CH EMB1 2 CH2 INVALID AES CH 1 8 DOWNMIX Internally generated 4 ANALOG CH 1 4 downmixed audio channels EMB1 2 CH3 DOWNMIXI L R See sec 6 7 6
135. 6 2 VIDEO INPUT SET 29 Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Parameter Default Setting range Description eee Select tion for the time th elects an operation for the time the LOSS BACK COLOR OEA signal input selected under FS INPUT SELECT is lost OUT DISABLE OFF BLACK BLUE BACK COLOR BLACK FED Select a background color MAGENTA 9 GREEN CYAN YELLOW Selects the aspect ratio for SD input signals is This setting is used for fixed aspect ratio conversions that are performed SPSBEET a 16 9 when ASPECT in the CONV menu is set to other than AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 AFD 16 9 AFD ALT 16 9 AFD or AFD ALT SDI E SDI2 Displays the input video signal in INST SIS OPTIONA FS1 or FS2 Cannot be changed OPTION B Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively 1 The selected AUTO FREEZE functions the same as BACK COLOR if SYNCHRO in section 5 9 1 FS MODE SET is set to LINE or AVDL In such case the menu is indicated as AUTO FREEZE LOSS Operation If the signal input that is selected under FS INPUT SELECT is lost the FA 9520 operates in the selected LOSS mode as follows In BACK COLOR mode Outputs a matte signal of the color selected under BACK COLOR n AUTO FREEZE mode Freezes the last image before signal input is lost Freezes the field Freezes the frame if the lost input signal is of a progressive scan video format such as 720p n
136. 6 SDI CH1 16 Dolby Decoder A Downmix L embed into respective Dolby Encoder A CH1 FS1 FS2 audio channels Dolby Encoder A CH2 Dolby Decoder B CH1 8 Dolby Decoder B Downmix L Dolby Encoder B CH1 Dolby Encoder B CH2 4 Loudness 1 A Right Loudness 2 A Center Loudness 1 B LFE Loudness 2 B LS Rs 1 Selectable when the FA 95D D option is installed in option slot A 2 Selectable when the FA 95DE E option is installed in option slot A 3 Selectable when the FA 95D D option is installed in option slot B 4 Selectable when the FA 95DE E option is installed in option slot B 5 Selectable when the FA 95ALA option is installed in option slot A 6 Selectable when the FA 95ALA option is installed in option slot B AES Out Mapping Parameter Default Setting range Description E The same as SDI Out Selects an audio signal to output to CH1 8 AES CH1 8 1 2 3 4 Mapping respective AES audio channels 186 Analog Out Mapping Parameter Default Setting range Description CH1 16 Analog CH1 4 SDI 1 CH1 16 SDI 2 CH1 16 AES CH1 8 ANALOG CH1 4 DOWN MIX1 L DOWN MIX1 R DOWN MIX2 L DOWN MIX2 R 500Hz TONE 1KHz TONE SILENCE Dolby Decoder A CH1 8 1 2 Dolby Decoder A Downmix L Dolby Encoder A CH1 Dolby Encoder A CH2 Dolby Decoder B CH1 8 Dolby Decoder B Downmix L 34 Dolby Encoder B CH1 Dolby E
137. 720 59p 720 59p signal in FS 1 or 2 720 50p 720 50p signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 59p 1080 59i black video 1080 50p 1080 50i black video Y C Output format FS 1 or 2 output signal Y C output signal 525 60 525 60 signal in FS 1 or 2 625 50 625 50 signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 59i 525 60 BB signal 1080 50 625 50 BB signal 1080 24PsF 625 50 BB signal 1080 23 98PsF 525 60 BB signal 720 59p 525 60 BB signal 720 50p 625 50 BB signal 1080 59p 525 60 BB signal 1080 50p 625 50 BB signal 175 9 2 11 Composite Clip Clicking block 12 on the video block diagram opens the Composite Clip dialog box See section 5 5 3 VIDEO CLIP Setting Ranges for details 2 Composite Clip Mozilla Firefox DER b 192168 010 html vbsclip2cgi fs 1 Composite Clip Mode Clip Mode Off Composite Clip Composite Clip White Clip 1600 emj Black Clip 500 HH After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps Composite Clip Mode Setting range aoe Parameter Default Steps Description Off Composite Clip enables clipping Composite Clip on the composite output signals The COMPOSITE CLIP settings are effective only on the analog composite outputs The settings are
138. 76 Loudness1 OpA R 77 Loudness1 OpA C 78 Loudness1 OpA LFE 79 Loudness1 OpA LS 80 Loudness1 OpA RS 81 Loudness2 OpA L 82 Loudness2 OpA R 83 Loudness2 OpA C 84 Loudness2 OpA LFE 85 Loudness2 OpA LS 86 Loudness2 OpA RS 87 Loudness1 OpA L 88 Loudness1 OpA R 89 Loudness1 OpA C 90 Loudness1 OpA LFE 91 Loudness1 OpA LS 92 Loudness1 OpA RS 93 Loudness2 OpA L 94 Loudness2 OpA R 95 Loudness2 OpA C 96 Loudness2 OpA LFE 97 Loudness2 OpA LS 98 Loudness2 OpA RS 000000000000000000000000 fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh1 INTEGER O Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh2 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh3 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded1 OutAssignCh4 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh5 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded10OutAssignCh6 4 o e Co h5 INTEGER OJQQO OC Ditto ffa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh7 INTEGER 251 Object group Front TITLE Item name Settings Object name in MIB file Type Audio Audio SDI Audio Emb1 Assign Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh8 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh9 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh10 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh11 INTEGER Ditto ffa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh12 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh13 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbed
139. 7Line Y Field 1 21 284 Line FS1 WSS AFD Error FS1 ANC Detect Select Mode Remove x Caption CEA608 CC v AFD 52016 3 AFD hg FS2 ANC Detect Line FS2 ANC Data Embed FS2 ANC Loss Mode Settings Anc RP186 VI ANC CEA608 CC v ANC 52016 3 AFD Format 525 60 Y Format 525 60 v Format SD v Field 1 14Line Y Embed Disable Y Mode Remove Y Field 2 277Line Y Field 1 21 284 Line FS2 WSS AFD Error FS2 ANC Detect Select Mode Remove Caption CEA608 CC Y AFD 2016 3 AFD Y If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click Refresh to update the settings FS1 FS2 ANC Detect Line Allows you to select which line of the input signal to detect the superimposed ancillary data For RP186 VI Parameter Default Setting range Description RP186 VI Selects an ancillary data ANG BPIH VI BT1119 WSS standard Format 525 60 ER Selects the input signal format Field 1 14 Line in 525 60 12 19 Line in 525 60 Selects a line to detect ancillary 11 Line in 625 50 8 22 Line in 625 50 data in Field 1 Field 2 277 Line in 525 60 275 282 Line in 525 60 Selects a line to detect ancillary 324 Line in 625 50 321 335 Line in 625 50 data in Field 2 For BT1119 WSS Parameter Default Setting range Description ANC RP186 VI PI VI Selects an ancillary data standard BT1119 WSS y i Format 625 50 625 50 Selects the i
140. 8 dBm 20 dBm 30 dBFS 40 dBFS 44 dBFS 48 dBFS 10 dBm 20 dBFS 30 dBFS 34 dBFS 38 dBFS 4 dBm 14 dBFS 24 dBFS 28 dBFS 32 dBFS 0 dBm 10 dBFS 20 dBFS 24 dBFS 28 dBFS 4 dBm 6 dBFS 16 dBFS 20 dBFS 24 dBFS 8 dBm 2dBFS 12 dBFS 16 dBFS 20 dBFS 10 dBm OdBFS 10dBFS 14 dBFS 18 dBFS Digital Reference Level 24dBFS ANALOG IN LEVEL setting Analog audio input level 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8dBm 20 dBm 34 dBFS 44 dBFS 48 dBFS 52 dBFS 10 dBm 24 dBFS 34 dBFS 38 dBFS 42 dBFS 4 dBm 18 dBFS 28 dBFS 32 dBFS 36 dBFS 0 dBm 14 dBFS 24 dBFS 28 dBFS 32 dBFS 4 dBm 10 dBFS 20 dBFS 24 dBFS 28 dBFS 8 dBm 6 dBFS 16 dBFS 20 dBFS 24 dBFS 10 dBm 4dBFS 14 dBFS 18 dBFS 22 dBFS See REF LEVEL in section 6 11 2 DIGITAL AUDIO for details on the Digital Reference Level settings See section 6 3 1 ANALOG IN LEVEL for details on the ANALOG IN LEVEL settings 238 12 Analog Audio Connection For balanced input and output connect the hot and cold wires of an analog audio signal to plus and minus pins respectively For unbalanced input connect the analog audio signal line to the plus pin and route the ground line to the minus pin and COM pin For unbalanced output connect the analog audio signal line to the plus pin and the ground line to the COM pin Analog Audio IN OUT Connector 25 pin D sub female i
141. 95DACBL option The above figure of rear panel depicts an FA 95DACBL option installed in slot A The option can also be installed in slot B 19 FA 9520 with the FA 95D D DE E options installed 2223 24 a 3 M e e y e a gt SC S E A 4 ATA Lj 4 G3 AS No Name Description Ref 22 Dolby E IN Digital audio input connector on the FA 95D D DE E option 6 10 1 AUX IN Used to input Dolby E and or digital signals to the Dolby decoder 2 Digital audio output connector on the FA 95D D DE E option by E OUT 10 1 23 pini bud Used to output signals output from the Dolby decoder and or Dolby 9 101 AUX OUT encoder Reference signal input connector on the FA 95D D DE E option 6 10 1 24 REF IN Used to input reference signal B B or tri level sync for the Dolby decoder 75 ohm terminated inside FA 9520 with the FA 95AIO option installed 25 PT DA gt E FAN1 9 E md x FAO FO PRO NFS NS 2 FO OFO ON R SER NO Si SSAGEL No Name Description Analog component input output connector on FA 95AIO option Connect the supplied I O cable 25 ANALOG COMPONENT I O
142. A B Loudness Standars Setting LFE channels are subjected to adjustments but not to measurement Parameter Default Setting range Description ARIB TR B32 ATSC A85 Allows you to select according to what Standard ARIB TR B32 EBU R128 standard the loudness measurement and adjustment will be conducted ITU R BS 1770 Parameter Specification of Standards used in the FA 95ALA Parameter ARIB TR B32 ATSC A 85 EBU R128 ITU R BS 1770 Target Level 24 0LKFS 24 0LKFS 23 0LUFS 24 0 LKFS Momentary Average Time 400 msec 125 msec 400 msec 400 msec Short Term Average Time 3000 msec 10000 msec 3000 msec 3000 msec Absolute Gating 70 0 LKFS NONE 70 0 LUFS 70 0 LKFS Relative Gating 10 LU NONE 10 LU 10 LU Overlap Size 7596 0 75 75 201 9 4 SYSTEM Settings gt Video Audio System GP Utility Status Network ae rae Click Click the System tab at the top of the page The System setting window will be displayed The system setting window consists of Video System and Audio System pages Those pages are accessed by clicking FS1 Video System FS2 Video System Audio System at the top of the page 9 4 1 FS1 FS2 Video System Click gt FS1 Video System or gt FS2 Video System at the top of the Video System page to access the corresponding FS Video System page FA 9520 Logout video audio system cr umy status Network gt FS
143. A2 Canada Phone 1 416 977 0343 Fax 1 416 977 0657 FOR A Latin America amp the Caribbean 5200 Blue Lagoon Drive Suite 760 Miami FL 33126 USA Phone 1 305 931 1700 Fax 1 305 264 7890 FOR A UK Limited UNIT C71 Barwell Business Park Leatherhead Road Chessington Surrey KT9 2NY UK Phone 44 0 20 8391 7979 Fax 44 0 20 8391 7978 FOR A Italia S r l Via Volturno 37 20047 Brugherio MB Italy Phone 39 039 881 086 103 Fax 39 039 878 140 FOR A Corporation of Korea 1007 57 5 Yangsan ro Yeongdeungpo gu Seoul 150 103 Korea Phone 82 0 2 2637 0761 Fax 82 0 2 2637 0760 FOR A China Limited 708B Huateng Bldg No 302 3 District Jinsong Chaoyang Beijing 100021 China Phone 86 0 10 8721 6023 Fax 86 0 10 8721 6033 FOR A Middle East Africa Office Jebel Ali Free Zone LOB 16 Office 619 P O Box 261914 Dubai UAE Phone 971 4 887 6712 Fax 971 4 887 6713 The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice
144. AFD Active Format Description data Input signals that are assigned to FS1 and FS2 under IN SEL in the FS INPUT SELECT menu section 5 6 1 will be synchronized and input to an FS1 or FS2 UP DOWN CROSS CONVERTER respectively The signals will then be processed in the respective converters and output to output connectors according to the output assignments set in the VIDEO OUT SELECT OUT SEL menu section 5 7 41 5 3 1 CONV MODE Converts video signals according to the AFD Active Format Description data CONV AS ET Ce B A ae FD 4 1080 59i gt gt 525 60 S 3 Menu button CONV1 ANALOG FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK 16 9P ALT14 9 16 9F ALT14 9 16 9F ALT4 3 Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a mode for UPIDOWN CONVERTER to convert the input signal in FS1 and FS2 BY PASS BY PASS Outputs the signal without converting SD SD Converts signals to a standard definition 1080i format SOR BIGERSS 720p 1080i Converts signals to a 1080i format 1080PsF 720p Converts signals to a 720p format 1080p 3G 1080PsF Converts signals to a 1080PsF format 1080P 3G Converts signals to a 3G SDI 1080p format AFD ALT 43 Selectable aspect ratio settings when CONV is AFD 16 9 set to SD AFD ALT 16 9 AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 AFD 16 9 4 3 L 16 9 T AFD ALT 16 9 automatically select an aspect 4 3 L 14 9 T ratio according to the AFD data in the input signal 4 3 L gt 16 9 If no AFD
145. AO oA fa952InSDI1 INTEGER O JO SDI 2 IN Ditto fa952InSDI2 INTEGER O Composite IN Reference IN 0 LOSS 1 525 60 2 625 50 30 BY PASS 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50i 04 1080 59i 05 1080 50i 09 1080 24PsF 10 1080 23 98PsF 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59p 21 720 50p 29 Unknown 30 BY PASS 31 DISABLE 32 none 33 cannotdetection fa952InComposite fa952InReference 14 INTEGER O JO INTEGER O JO SDI OUT 1 2 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50i 04 1080 59i 05 1080 50i 09 1080 24PsF 10 1080 23 98PsF 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59p 21 720 50p 29 Unknown 30 BY PASS 31 DISABLE 32 none 33 cannotdetection fa9520utSDI1 2 21 INTEGER O JO SDI OUT 3 4 Ditto fa9520utSDI3 4 22 INTEGER O Composite OUT O Loss 1 525 60 2 625 50 30 BY PASS 31 Disable fa9520utComposite 23 INTEGER O JO 255 Object group Front TITLE Item name Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type Write Read VIDEO STATUS VIDEO IN STATUS Option A IN 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50i 04 1080 59i 05 1080 50i 09 1080 24PsF 10 1080 23 98PsF 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59p 21 720 50p 29 Unknown 30 BY PASS 31 DISABLE 32 none 33 cannotdetection fa952InOpA 101 INTEGER O Option A OUT 00 Loss 01 525 60i
146. ASSIGN FS2 ID 1 256 fa95LgFS2Assign INTEGER Keyer FS2 0 OFF 1 ON fa95LgFS2Keyer A jol N gt INTEGER O O O JO OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 3 1 1_ fa952AudioEmb1Assign Audio Audio SDI Audio Emb1 Assign 0 emb1Ch1 1 emb1Ch2 2 emb1Ch3 3 emb1Ch4 4 emb1Ch5 5 emb1Ch6 6 emb1Ch7 7 emb1Ch8 8 emb1Ch9 9 emb1Ch10 10 emb1Ch11 11 emb1Ch12 12 emb1Ch13 13 emb1Ch14 14 emb1Ch15 15 emb1Ch16 16 emb2Ch1 17 emb2Ch2 18 emb2Ch3 19 emb2Ch4 20 emb2Ch5 21 emb2Ch6 22 emb2Ch7 23 emb2Ch8 24 emb2Ch9 25 emb2Ch10 26 emb2Ch11 27 emb2Ch12 28 emb2Ch13 29 emb2Ch14 30 emb2Ch15 31 emb2Ch16 32 aesCh1 33 aesCh2 34 aesCh3 35 aesCh4 36 aesCh5 37 aesCh6 38 aesCh7 39 aesCh8 40 analogCh1 41 analogCh2 42 analogCh3 43 analogCh4 44 downMix1 L 45 downMix1 R 46 downMix2 L 47 downMix2 R 48 tone500Hz 49 tone1kHz 50 silence 51 dolbyDecodeOpACh1 52 dolbyDecodeOpACh2 53 dolbyDecodeOpACh3 54 dolbyDecodeOpACh4 55 dolbyDecodeOpACh5 56 dolbyDecodeOpACh6 57 dolbyDecodeOpACh7 58 dolbyDecodeOpACh8 59 dolbyDownMixOpA L 60 dolbyDownMixOpA R 61 dolbyEncodeOpACh1 62 dolbyEncodeOpBCh2 63 dolbyDecodeOpBCh1 64 dolbyDecodeOpBCh2 165 dolbyDecodeOpBCh3 166 dolbyDecodeOpBCh4 67 dolbyDecodeOpBCh5 68 dolbyDecodeOpBCh6 169 dolbyDecodeOpBCh7 70 dolbyDecodeOpBCh8 71 dolbyDownMixOpB L 72 dolbyDownMixOpB R 73 dolbyEncodeOpBCh1 74 dolbyEncodeOpBCh2 75 Loudness1 OpA L
147. AVO TARGET WHITE 80 0 MAPPING TARGET BLACK 3 0 Each USER1 5 is composed of four level settings such as IN WHITE IN BLACK TARGET WHITE and TARGET BLACK The default settings of USERs 1 through 5 are the same as those for DARKER DARK STANDARD BRIGHT and BRIGHTER respectively The desirable level settings are easily obtained by adjusting values from the default values USER 5 Default Settings Parameter SELECT LEVEL Adjustment level Custom levels USER1 USER2 USER3 USER4 USER 5 Default Default Default Default Default Fixed levels Darker Dark Standard Bright Brighter IN WHITE 99 0 98 0 97 0 95 0 93 0 IN BLACK 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 0 TARGET WHITE 80 0 88 0 93 0 95 0 97 0 TARGET BLACK 3 0 5 0 7 0 12 0 17 0 IMPORTANT While the USER setting menu is open and the LEVEL is changed via web browser or the connected FA 95RU to other than USERs 1 through 5 in the AVO SETTING menu 5 4 1 the menu will change to display the AVO SETTING menu 5 4 1 IN WHITE and IN BLACK These two parameters determine the highest and lowest levels of luminance in the input signal Setting Parameter range Description step The maximum value of luminance in the sample data is defined as 100 Based on this reference value this 80 0 determines the highest level of luminance for level control IN WHITE 99 0 If the value is too large some noise may be pi
148. Audio Output Level Parameter Default Setting range Description 10dBm 0dBm Sets the output signal level for CH 1 CH 4 4dBm 4dBm analog audio output channels 8dBm Analog Audio Mono Sum Parameter Default Setting range Description CH 1 2 Disable Disable Enable Outputs the stereo pair CH 3 4 Enable channels as a mono sum 192 9 3 13 Dolby E Digital Decoder Clicking block 15 on the audio block diagram when the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is installed in option slot A B opens the Dolby Decoder dialog box The Dolby options in slots A and B can be set separately 2 Dolby E Digital Decoder SLOT A Mozilla Firefox d 192168010 html dolby dec cei slot Dolby Decoder Input Select Dolby Input AUX Input Bit Stream Dolby Digital 32bit Program Config 1 1 Dolby Decoder REF Input Select REF Input None Dolby Down Mix Mode O Stereo Monaural Dolby Polarity Surround Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8 Down Mix L Down Mix R O Invert O Invert O Invert O Normal Normal Normal Normal O Invert O Normal O Invert O Invert O Invert O Invert O Invert O Invert 9 Normal Normal 9 Normal 9 Normal 9 Normal Dolby Decoder Gain Master 0 0 dB ma Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB Ch 8 0 0 dB Down Mix L 0 0 dB Down Mix R
149. BL 244 I IN WHITE and IN BLACK 50 Insert AFD Data to Output Video Signals 272 Internal Settings 21 K KEYER SET 69 L Level Adjustment 54 Loading the Data Saved in a File 219 Logo Generator 68 Logo Position Setting Range 69 LOGO SELECT 68 LOSS Operation 59 LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT 135 LOUDNESS CONTROL ENABLE 133 LOUDNESS CONTROL SETTINGS 134 LOUDNESS MEASUREMENT 132 LOUDNESS STANDARD 136 M Manual Level Adjustment 54 MASTER OUT GAIN 108 Menu Buttons 30 METADATA INPUT 131 Motion Sense 166 MU OPERATION 142 N NETWORK INFO 147 Network Information Web 231 NETWORK SETTING Web 231 Network Settings Web 231 Note on Event Memory Operation 152 O OPTION A Ver 148 OPTION B Ver 148 OTHER OPTION 149 Other Settings amp Information OTHER 141 OUTPUT ASSIGN 62 Output Assign Web 174 OUTPUT GAIN CONTROL 108 P Page Jump Feature 33 Parameters That Are Not Stored in Event Memories 152 Powering ON 28 Proc Amp Web 163 R Rear Panel 18 Reference signals and Input formats 71 205 REMOTE Connector 241 Resetting to Default 35 Restart Web 235 RGB CLIP 57 S 82016 OUT 95 Sample Area 48 Saving the FA 9500 Settings to a File 219 Scene Cut Detection 49 Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay Settings 49 SD LINE MASK 79 SD PHASE SET 72 SDI 1 2 OUT AUDIO 90 SDI 3 4 OUT AUDIO 91 SDI Audio Output Settings Web 191 SDI AUDIO Settings SDI AUDIO 98 SDI Input Web 178 SET GET List 249 SNMP 249 SNMP SETTING Web
150. Bar Line 8 mes Line Line 3E veh qe e eres Line Click Refresh to update the settings Ancillary Input Stats CONV2 Ancillary Output Status 1 CEA 608 CC Absent Line 2 BT 1119 2WSS Present Line 23 3 RP186 VI Present Line 11 324 CONV2 S2016 3 Output Status Status Present AFD 1101 BNR AR 4 3 Full frame 4 3 image with alternative 14 9 center Data 68 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 HEX CONV2 VI Output Status Status Present AFD 1101 BNR Scan 625 50 4x3 4 3 with shoot and protecte 14 9 center Data1 6A HEX Data2 02 HEX Data3 02 HEX CONV2 WSS Output Status Status Present AFD 1110 BNR full format 14 9 centre shoot and protect 14 9 Bit 13 0 00 OE HEX CONV2 Ancillary Data Packet Output Status 1 S2016 3 AFD Bar Line 8 2 Line 3 00 Line 450 Line Refresh Displays the status of CEA608 WSS and VI ancillary data detection The line number in which the ancillary data is in is displayed AFD Input Status Displays the status of AFD detection in the input signal When detecting AFD in input S2016 3 gt AFD Input Status Detected S2016 3 AFD amp Bar AFD 1011 BNR AR 4 3 Letterbox 14 9 image vertically centered in the coded frame Data 58 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 HEX Detected Displays as S2016 3 AFD amp BAR AFD Displays Active Format Description code in binary format AR Didplays the aspect ratio as 4 3 or 16 9 The detected A
151. CC 2016 3 AFD RP186 VI BT1119 WSS Can be set to Unable to set S334 1 CC same line to same line Can be set to Unable to set 925 60 S2016 3 AFD same line to same line Unable to set Unable to set RP186 VI to same line to same line Unable to set Unable to set 2016 3 AFD to same line to same line Unable to set Can be set to 625 50 RP186 VI to same line same line Unable to set Can be set to BT1119 WSS to same line same line If the same line is set for the ancillary data combination described as Unable to set to same line and both ancillary data types are set to be embedded in the ANC DATA EMBED menu see Sec 5 7 4 an asterisk will appear next to the selected data type as an error message If the sign is displayed ancillary data will not be properly embedded The line settings must be properly set Usually the default value will properly embed the ancillary data Keep this in mind when changing the value to configure a system with other devices IMPORTANT Ancillary data insersion line settings specified under the ANC DATA EMBED sec 5 7 4 and ANC EMBED LINE sec 5 7 5 menus take priority over the line settings specified under the SDI LINE MASK menu sec 5 9 13 and take effect 67 5 8 VIDEO OPTION VIDEO OP 5 8 1 Logo Generator The logo generator allows you to superimpose logos to FA 9520 outputs for each converter Run the FA 95 LG GUI which can be downloaded from FOR A s websit
152. CH 4 LFE EMB2 CH 4 Ls EMB1 CH 5 Ls EMB2 CH 5 Rs EMB1 CH 6 Rs EMB2 CH 6 Close Refresh Loudness Measurement1 2 Input indicates the measured loudness level of the FA 95ALA input audio signal in LKFS Output indicates the loudness level of the loudness processed signal in LKFS Parameter Default Setting range Description Displays the measured loudness level of the FA 95ALA input audio signal in LKFS Displays the measured loudness level of the FA 95ALA output audio signal in LKFS Output Set Loudness Control to On then click Start to start loudness adjustment and display the measured loudness level Allows you to start to adjust the audio signal Start loudenss according to the Loudness standard selected under Stndard Allows you to stop loudness measurement and adjustment Allows you to clear loudness measurement If clicked while Start is enabled loudness Clear measurement and adjustment restart after being cleared Session Time display also resets to 0 00 00 Displays the elapsed time of loudness measurement and adjustment After counting up to 6 59 59 the display resets Session Time to 0 00 00 Input Stop Loudness measurement and adjustment will also be cleared and restart 199 Loudness Control Settings 1 2 Parameter Default Setting range Description Allows you to turn On or Off the Loudness Leve
153. CH2 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch2 2 INTEGER O ISDI3 4 Embeded CH3 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch3 3 INTEGER O AUDIO OUTPUT audio Out ICH4 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch4 4 INTEGER O CH5 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch5 5 NTEGER O ICH6 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch6 o INTEGER O CH7 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch7 7 INTEGER O CH8 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch8 8 NTEGER O CH9 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch9 9 NTEGER O ICH10 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch10 10 INTEGER O CH 11 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch11 11 INTEGER O CH12 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch12 12 INTEGER O CH13 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch13 13 INTEGER O CH14 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch14 14 INTEGER O ICH15 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch15 15 INTEGER O CH16 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch16 16 INTEGER O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 5 3 23 AES output audio status 0 Loss 1 PCM 2 silence AUDIO OUTPUT AES OUT AUDIO CH1 3 NON PCM a952StatusAesOutCh1 1 NTEGER O 4 PCM Async 5 Silence Async 6 NON PCM Async CH1 7 Unknown a952StatusAesOutCh1 1 NTEGER O 8 notOutputSetting CH2 Ditto a952StatusAesOutCh2 2 NTEGER 2 CH3 Ditto a952StatusAesOutCh3 3 NTEGER AUDIO OUTPUT AES OUT AUDIO ogg Ditto a952StatusAesOutCh4 4 INTEGER O CH5 Ditto a952StatusAesOutCh5 5 NTEGER O ICH6 Ditto a952StatusAesOutCh6 o6 INTEGER O CH7 Ditto a952StatusAesOutCh7 7 NTEGER O CH8 Ditto a952StatusAesOutCh8 B8 NTEGER O OID 1 3 6
154. CHT314 SAC BYPASS Pou Mut EMB 2 CH15 1 SAC BY PASS Pou Mut AES CHV2 Osaceveass Cecu Cus AES CHM DSRC BYPASS cu Mul AES CHS SRC BYPASS CPC Olu AES CMI DSRC BYPASS Pou Mut Validity Bit Mask o EMB 1 CHUZ DSRC BYPASS OPCM Cute e EMB 1 CHIA DSRC BYPASS OPCM Otte ne EMB 1 CH DSRC BYPASS OPCM Cle no EMB TCHI DSRC BYPASS OPCM Cute lo EMB1CHINO CSRCBYPASS OPCM Otte w EMB1CHW7 CsRCBYPASS OPCM Otto ne EMB 1 OHMYM CSRCBYPASS OPCM Chute no EMBTCHISHG SRCBYPASS OPCM Oline ne EME 2 CHU DSRC BYPASS OPCM Cute EMB 2 CHY DSRC BYPASS OPCM Chute o EMB 2 CHAE DsRCUYPASS OPCM Chute e EMB 2 CHINE DSRC BYPASS OPCM Chute EMB CHINO CSRCBYPASS OPCM Othe no EMB2CHMAZ CSRCBYPASS OPCM Chute EMB2CHIMI4 CSRCBYPASS OPCM Cute e EMB 2CH1916 SRCBYPASS OPCM Chute te AES CHI DSRC BYPASS OPCM Cute e AES CHIA DSRC BYPASS OPCM Cute ne AES CHS DSRC BYPASS OPCM Cle e AES CHIAVI DSRC BY PASS OPCM Cute If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click Refresh to update the settings Fade In Out Parameter Default Setting range Description Disable Always outputs input audio signals without Disable adding any effect such as Fade or Mute Fade Mode Disable Enabl Enable Sets an audio channel to mute with fade out nable if an audio error is detected and fade in when recovered Fade Time 12ms ae Sets the duration f
155. CM audio channel status indication However real NON PCM signals cannot be output properly 6 9 2 EMB2 SRC MODE Menu button OUT SEL MODE Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a stereo pair of FS2 embedded audio CH SEL CH1 2 CH1 2 CH15 16 signals to be set to pass or by pass the SRC circuit Sets the SRC circuit to pass or by pass the audio channel pair selected under CH SEL AUTO Sets the SRC circuit to pass signals However NON PCM audio signals will be by passed BY PASS Sets the SRC circuit to by pass signals Set to AUTO By pass to output asynchronous audio SRC MODE SRC IN BY PASS signals To embed the asynchronous audio SRC IN signals to SDI video signals an audio clock must be selected under 6 1 8 EMB2 AUDIO CLOCK for the respective audio groups SRC IN Sets the SRC circuit to pass both PCM or NON PCM signals Useful for the irregular PCM signal with the NON PCM audio channel status indication However real NON PCM signals cannot be output properly 121 6 9 3 AES SRC MODE Menu button Parameter Default Setting range OUT SEL MODE Description CH SEL CH1 2 CH1 2 CH15 16 Selects a stereo pair of AES audio signals to be set to pass or by pass the SRC circuit AUTO BY PASS SRC IN SRC MODE SRC IN Sets the SRC circuit to pass or by pass the audio channel pair selected under CH SEL AUTO
156. COLOR BAR mode Outputs the SMPTE color bar In OUT DISABLE mode Does not output any signal from SDI OUT1 2 3 4 COMPOSITE OUT1 or 2 n AUTO FREEZE mode Outputs a black screen if SYNCHRO is setto LINE or AVDL under FS MODE SET section 5 9 1 59 5 6 3 ANC DETECT LINE Allows you to select a line to detect ancillary RP186 VI or BT 1119 2 WSS data in input signals For RP186 VI Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Parameter Default Setting range Description RP 186 VI Selects an ancillary data ANE RETES MI BT1119 WSS standard FORMAT 525 60 ae Selects the input signal format 625 50 put sig FIELD1 14 LINE 525 60 12 19 LINE 525 60 Selects a line to detect ancillary 19 LINE 625 50 8 22 LINE 625 50 data in field 1 FIELD2 277 LINE 525 60 275 282 LINE 525 60 Selects a line to detect ancillary 324 LINE 625 50 321 335 LINE 625 50 data in field 2 ForBT1119 WSS Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Parameter Default Setting range Description RP 186 VI Selects an ancillary data ANG REIRON BT1119 WSS standard FORMAT 625 60 625 50 Selects the input video format Selects a line to detect ancillary FIELD1 23LINE 8 23 LINE data in field 1 5 6 4 ANC DETECT SEL Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Parameter Default Setting range Description Select CEA6
157. Ch2 2 NTEGER O CH3 Ditto a952StatusAnaloglnCh3 3 NTEGER O CH4 Ditto a952StatusAnalogInCh4 a NTEGER E O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 5 3 21 SDI1 2 output audio status 0 Loss 1 PCM 2 Silence 3 NON PCM 4 PCM Async CH1 5 Silence Async a952StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch1 1 1 NTEGER O 6 NON PCM Async 7 Unknown 8 BY PASS 9 Blank 10 Disable CH2 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch2 2 2 NTEGER O ISDI1 2 Embeded CH3 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch3 3 3 NTEGER O AUDIO OUTPUT audio Out CH4 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch4 4 4 INTEGER F O CH5 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch5 5 5 NTEGER O CH6 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch6 6 6 NTEGER O CH7 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch7 7 r NTEGER O ICH8 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch8 8 B NTEGER O CH9 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch9 9 o NTEGER O ICH10 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch10 10 10 INTEGER O CH11 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch11 11 11 INTEGER O CH12 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch12 12 12 INTEGER CH13 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch13 13 13 INNTEGER O ICH14 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch14 14 14 INTEGER O CH15 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch15 15 15 INTEGER O CH16 Ditto a952StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch16 16 d6 INTEGER O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 5 3 22 SDI3 4 output audio status 0 Loss 1 PCM 2 Silence 3 NON PCM 4 PCM Async CH1 5 Silence Async a952StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch1 1 INTEGER O 6 NON PCM Async 7 Unknown 8 BY PASS 9 Blank 10 Disable
158. Confirmation Confirm the status of the FA 95DACBL on the front panel menu See sections 7 9 OPTION A Ver and 7 10 OPTION B Ver The menu appears as shown below if the FA 95DACBL is installed in SLOTA AE EE Menu button NAME FA 95DACBL STATUS ee eee OTHER FPGA2 SOFT in SLOT B Menu button OPTION B Ver 300 NAME FA 95DACBL STATUS PEGAL amea OTHER FPGA2 SOFT IMPORTANT Four connectors of the FA 95DACBL digital audio expansion option can be used for outputs If the FA 95DACBL option is installed the DIGITAL AUDIO IO connectors can only be used for inputs and the AES I O SETUP menu section 6 2 4 is not accessible 16 FA 95AIO Option 16 1 FA 95AIO Pin Assignments Be sure to use the supplied FA 95AIO connection cable FA 95AIO Connector 15 pin D sub female inch screws Pin Assignment 15 pin D sub female Pin No Connector Signal 1 Y G IN Y G IN 2 Pb B IN Pb B C IN 3 Pr R IN Pr R IN 4 GND 5 GND 6 Y G OUT Y G OUT 7 Pb B OUT Pb B C OUT 8 Pr R OUT Pr R OUT 9 GND 10 GND 11 GND 12 GND 13 GND 14 GND 15 GND When BY PASS is enabled Y G IN Y G OUT Pb B IN Pb B OUT and Pr R IN Pr R OUT are connected FA 95AIO connection cable PC 3307 1 SO me gt x peor IL gt pos OUT HEEL gt PR OUT HE HL UUUUU 246 16 2 FA 95AIO Switch Settings IMPORTANT Not
159. Corrector dialog box to copy all FS1 Color Corrector settings to FS2 A confirmation dialog as shown below appears Message from webpage 2 j re you sure you want to Copy All Parameters Click OK to copy all FS1 Color Corrector settings to FS2 Click Cancel to stop copying To copy all FS2 Color Corrector settings to FS1 click Copy All to FS1 in the FS2 Color Corrector dialog box in the same manner 171 9 2 8 Video Test Signal Clicking block 8 on the video block diagram opens the Video Test Signal setting dialog box for the corresponding FS Video Test Signal FS1 Mozilla Firefox DER 1921680 10 html vtse2 cei ts 1 Video Test Signal 9 Off O Full Color Bar 75 Color Bar SMPTE Color Bar Ramp 7 Video Test Signal FS2 Mozilla Firefox DEOR 192168010 html vtse2 cei fs 2 Video Test Signal Off Full Color Bar 75 Color Bar O SMPTE Color Bar Ramp After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Parameter Default Setting range Description Off Full Color Bar Video Test Signal Off 75 Color Bar SMPTE Color Bar Ramp Outputs an internal video test signal 172 9 2 9 YPbPr RGB Clip Clicking block 10 on the video block diagram opens the YPbPr RGB setting dialog box See section 5 5 3 VIDEO CLIPSetting range for details 7 YPbPr RGB Clip FS1 Mozilla Firefox 1921680 10 html
160. Cut Color H Left 0 Pixar ity Red a i H Right ol Pixel gt i Green ol El V Top 0 Line i Blue ol El V Bottom 0 Line i After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Converter Process Mode Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a mode for FS1 FS2 UP DOWN Converter to BY PASS convert the input signal SD BY PASS Outputs the signal without converting 1080i SD Converts signals to a standard definition format Mode BY PASS 1080i Converts signals to a 1080i format 720p 720p Converts signals to a 720p format 1080PsF 4080PsF Converts signals to a 1080PsF format 1080p 3G 1080P 3G Converts signals to a 3G SDI 1080p format Displays the format of the input signal to and the format the signal will be converted to in FS1 or FS2 See section 5 3 2 CONV Conversion Table for details on conversions 165 Aspect Ratio Parameter Default Setting range Description AFD 4 3 Selectable aspect ratio settings when Converter A Die Process Mode is set to SD T AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 AFD 16 9 AT ed AFD ALT 16 9 automatically select an aspect 4 3 L 14 9 T ratio according to the AFD data in the input 4 3 L gt 16 9 signal If no AFD data is found in the input 4 3 F 4 3 signal the aspect rati
161. D SDI or COMPOSITE output signal PASS MASK SET BLANK PASS Sets the line selected in LINE SEL to PASS or BLANK PASS Outputs a line of the composite Y C 1 SD SDI input signal that is the same number as the selected output signal line to a composite Y C SD SDI output signal without processing BLANK Masks the selected composite Y C 1 SD SDI output signal line Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively 1 Selectable only if FA 95AIO option is installed IMPORTANT Ancillary data insersion line settings specified under the ANC DATA EMBED sec 5 7 4 and ANC EMBED LINE sec 5 7 5 menus take priority over the line settings specified under the SDI LINE MASK menu and take effect 79 5 9 14 COMPOSITE SET Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description Adjusts the subcarrier phase of comosite and Y C output signals referring to the B B 4 2 _ 4ane genlock signal a on 1090380 Not adjustable with the tri level genlock signal In such case the menu will appear as NOT ADJUST 3D Selects a mode to separate the Y COMB FILTER 2D 2D luminance and C chrominance of TRAP composite signals OFF Sets the noise reduction level for the NR CEVEL GEE LEVEL1 4 composite signal inputs CROSS COLOR OFF OFF Sets the cross color noise reduction LEVEL1 3 level 1 The setting is effective
162. DELAY ANALOG OUT DELAY Oe FS INPUT SELECT IN SEL Ee PETET eee S DOWN MIX ASSIGN OANC DETECT SEL DOWN MIX AIO A IN MODE Ce DOWN MIX2 SET e AIO B IN MODE e DOWN MIX2 ASSIGN Qe EMB1 SRC MODE Qe OUTPUT ASSIGN e EMB2 SRC MODE OUT SEL e AIO A ASSIGN e AES SRC MODE MODE e AIO B ASSIGN lt e EMB1 POLARITY ANC DATA EMBED e EMB2 POLARITY ANC EMBED LINE e AES POLARITY e ANALOG POLARITY Dolby AUX OUT A 66 e Dolby DEC IN A 8 e Dolby DEC REF A 66 e Dolby DOWNMIX A 68 Dolby DEC GAIN A 8 8 e Dolby ENC INPUT A e Dolby ENC SET A e METADATA INPUT LOUD MEASURE 1A 4 VIDEO OP lt POLOGO SELECT LOUD CTRL ENA1A 4 AUDIO OP OKEYER SET LOUD CTRL SET1A 4 LOUD CH ASGN1A LOUD MEASURE 2A LOUD CTRL ENA2A LOUD CTRL SET2A 4 LOUD CH ASGN2A C Qe Dolby AUX OUT B 7 e Dolby DEC IN B 7 e Dolby DEC REF B 7 e Dolby DOWNMIX B 7 30 Menu Button VIDEO menus lit green AUDIO menus lit orange Dolby DEC GAIN B 79 e Dolby ENC INPUT B e Dolby ENC SET B e METADATA INPUT B CLOUD MEASURE 1B LOUD CTRL ENA1B VIDEO OP OLOGO SELECT LOUD CTRL SET1B 5 AUDIO OP OKEYER SET LOUD CH ASGN1B 5 lt LOUD MEASURE 2B LOUD CTRL ENA2B 5 LOUD CTRL SET2B 5 LOUD CH ASGN2B LOUD STANDARD 4 Oe FS MODE SET OHD PHASE SET OSD PHASE SET OVIDEO POSITION SOLANO SET Qe FADE IN OUT VIDEO SYS OANC LOSS SET e DIGITAL AUDIO AUDIO SYS OWSS AFD ERROR e AUDIO ERR SENSE QOTEST SIGN aL e
163. E is set to YPbPr or RGB See the below YPbPr RGB Output Format table for details The FA 95AIO connector outputs a black video if the output signal from the selected FS1 or FS2 is an HD signal and MODE is set to Y C See the below Y C Output Format table for details YPbPr RGB Output Format FS1 or 2 output signal FA 95AIO YPbPr RGB output signal 525 60 525 60 signal in FS 1 or 2 625 50 625 50 signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 59i 1080 59i signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 50i 1080 50i signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 24PsF 1080 24PsF signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 23 98PsF 1080 23 98PsF signal in FS 1 or 2 720 59p 720 59p signal in FS 1 or 2 720 50p 720 50p signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 59p 1080 59i black video 1080 50p 1080 50i black video Y C Output format FS 1 or 2 output signal Y C output signal 525 60 525 60 signal in FS 1 or 2 625 50 625 50 signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 59i 525 60 BB signal 1080 50i 625 50 BB signal 1080 24PsF 625 50 BB signal 1080 23 98PsF 525 60 BB signal 720 59p 525 60 BB signal 720 50p 625 50 BB signal 1080 59p 525 60 BB signal 1080 50p 625 50 BB signal 63 5 7 3 AIO B ASSIGN Allows you to assign video signals to output from video output connectors on the FA 95AIO in slot B 35 Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX Parameter Default Setting range Description E Selects either FS1 or FS2 signal to be output from the video output ASSIGN
164. F OE Can be set to Frame Odd or Even F Fixed to Frame NOE Can be set to Frame Odd or Even but the image does not appear properly NF Fixed to Frame and the image does not appear properly 204 FS1 FS2 Synchro Mode Parameter Default Setting range Description Frame Sync Enables horizontal and vertical alignment of video signals to a genlock signal Effective on both synchronous and asynchronous signals Line Sync Locks the video signal of within 1 2H ROO Mode to a genlock signal Output delay is 1H Effective g Frame Sync only when video signal is synchronous to the Frame Line Sync genlock signal 3 Sync AVDL 8 AVDL Locks the video signal to a genlock signal 4 with a 1H delay Effective only when video signal is B synchronous to the genlock signal Input Lock Locks the system to an input video signal The delay can be adjusted by System Phase and or Frame Delay However the minimum delay is 520clk common in all formats HD 74 MHz SD 27MHz Does not use a genlock signal Auto Detect 525 60 625 50 DEDE Sets a system format for the FA 9520 7 Auto Auto Detect Detects and sets the detected input Syne Formal Detect Touro video format to the system format 1080 23PsF Other values make the system work in the format 1080 24PsF 1080 59 94p 1080 50p Off Selects which field to be used twice to compose a Forced Field 3 Off Odd frame Even Effectiv
165. FD type is shown Data Displays the detected 8 byte data in hexadecimal format 228 lt When detecting AFD in input RP186 VI gt AFD Input Status Detected RP186 VI AFD 1011 BNR Scan 625 50 4x3 14 9 center Data1 5A HEX Data2 02 HEX Data3 02 HEX Detected Displays as RP186VI AFD Displays Active Format Description code in binary format Scan Displays the Scanning System The detected AFD type is shown on the third row Data1 3 Displays the detected Data in hexadecimal format lt When detecting AFD in input BT 1119 2 WSS gt AFD Input Status Detected BT 1119 2 WSS AFD 0001 BNR box 14 9 centre Bit13 0 00 01 HEX Detected Displays as BT 1119 2 WSS AFD Displays Active Format Description code in binary format The detected AFD type is shown on the third row Bit13 0 Displays detected Bits 13 O in hexadecimal format Ancillary Data Packet Input Status Displays the status of ancillary data packets in an input SDI signal Displays the detected DID and SDID of the ancillary data in hexadecimal format such as DID SDID 05 30 if they are different from that of supported formats Displays the ancillary data name such as S334 1CDP 708 if the DID and SDID of the ancillary data match that of supported formats See section 19 FA 9520 Ancillary Data Packet Name List for details on ancillary data names and DID and SDID of formats The status of up to 8 ancillary data can be displayed
166. G 5 13 O SOFT Ver SlotA Software version aQ52CPUVerSlotB 4 OCTET STRING 5 13 O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 2 2 Input video signal selection 0 SDI1 1 SDI2 FS1 Input Select 2 Composite a952FS1VideolnputSelect 1 NTEGER O 10 3 OpA 4 OPB If no signal is present 0 Back Color FS1Video Loss Mode 1 Auto Freeze a952VideoLossMode 2 NTEGER O JO 2 Color Bar VIDEO IN 3 Output Disable INPUT OEE SETTING D SDIT 1 SDI FS2 Input Select 2 Composite a952FS1VideolnputSelect 3 NTEGER O 10 3 OpA 4 OPB If no signal is present 0 Back Color FS2Video Loss Mode 1 Auto Freeze a952VideoLossMode 4 NTEGER O JO 2 Color Bar 3 Output Disable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 2 3 Output video signal selection SDI 1 2 OUT SET Assign Han 29520utSD 1 2Sel INTEGER o lo SDI 3 4 OUT SET Assign pees 29520utSDI3 4Sel 2 INTEGER o lo OUT SEL COMPOSTE assign o ESI a9520utCompositeSel 5 INTEGER o lo Opa SEL Assign pees a9520utOpASel INTEGER o lo OpB SEL Assign Fs a9520utOpBSel 5 INTEGER o lo OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 2 4 Video System OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 2 4 1 FS Mode 0 FRAME Eb CHR 1 LINE a952FS1VideoSyncMode 4 INTEGER o lo FS Mode Si AVE FS2 SYNCHRO 0 FRAME 1 LINE a952FS2VideoSyncMode 2 NTEGER O 10 MODE 3 AVDL OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 2 4 2 System Format 0 Auto VIDEO SYSTEM 1 525 60 2 625 50 3 1080 59 94i 4 1080 50i FS1 System Format 5 720 59 94p fa952VideoSystemFormat 1 INTEGER O 10 6 720 50p 7 1080 23PsF 8
167. Gamma Mode On Off When set to On signal levels are adjusted Gamma correction On using the Gamma Level settings 1 The follwoing delay will be produced when performing scene cut detection depending on the input signal format Interlaced formats 2 fields 1 frame some lines Progressive and PsF formats 2 frames some lines Scene cut detection images will be properly adjusted and output when enough frame delay is set If the amount of frame delay is insufficient Scene cut detection will not be properly processed To perform AVO scene cut detection properly set enough delay using the FRAME DELAY function The output delay varies depending on the SYNCRO MODE input signal format FRAME DELAY setting and video signal H V phase difference FRAME DELAY settings are described on the next page 9 2 2 1 About Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay Settings To properly perform AVO scene cut detection and adjustment Frame Delay must be set in the setting range according to the menu settings 9 2 3 Frame Delay menu as shown in the table below FRAME DELAY Setting Range Chart 2 Setting Rrange per Input Video Format 525 601 1080 59i 1080 59p 50p 1080 50i 1080 23PsF 24PsF FRAME 1to 8 FRAME 2to 8 FRAME LINE AVDL Cannot be set Cannot be set 1 Synchro Mode settings in section 9 4 1 FS1 FS2 Video System 2 The current input video format can be verified in the Unit Video Status menu Sec 9
168. H 1 Loss CH 1 Loss CH 2 PCM CH 2 PCM CH 2 Loss CH 2 Loss CH 3 PCM CH 3 PCM CH 3 Loss CH 3 Loss CH 4 PCM CH 4 PCM CH 4 Loss CH 4 Loss CH 5 PCM CH 5 PCM CH 5 Loss CH 6 PCM CH 6 PCM CH 6 Loss CH 7 PCM CH 7 PCM CH 7 Loss CH 8 PCM CH 8 PCM CH 8 Loss CH9 PCM CH 9 PCM CH 10 PCM CH 10 PCM CH 11 PCM CH 11 PCM CH 12 PCM CH 12 PCM CH 13 PCM CH 13 PCM CH 14 PCM CH 14 PCM CH 15 PCM CH 15 PCM CH 16 PCM CH 16 PCM SDI 1 2 Output Audio SDI 3 4 Output Audio AES Output Audio Analog Output Audio CH 1 PCM CH 1 PCM CH 1 Input Setting CH 1 Silence CH 2 PCM CH 2 PCM CH 2 Input Setting CH 2 Silence CH 3 PCM CH 3 PCM CH 3 Input Setting CH 3 Silence CH 4 PCM CH 4 PCM CH 4 Input Setting CH 4 Silence CH 5 PCM CH 5 PCM CH 5 Input Setting CH 6 PCM CH 6 PCM CH6 Input Setting CH 7 PCM CH 7 PCM CH7 Input Setting CH8 PCM CH8 PCM CH8 Input Setting CH 9 PCM CH 9 PCM CH 10 PCM CH 10 PCM CH 11 PCM CH 11 PCM CH 12 PCM CH 12 PCM CH 13 PCM CH 13 PCM CH 14 PCM CH 14 PCM CH 15 PCM CH 15 PCM CH 16 PCM CH 16 PCM If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click Refresh to refresh the page SDI1 Input Audio Item Display Description Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 Loss CH16 of the SDI1 input signal PCM Loss No audio signals Silence PCM Normal audio signal Non PCM Silence Mute signal f CH1
169. IE E LEE HIE F 4 3 4 3 F 4 3 an PA AS BOX 16 9 CTR 4 3L16 9PRTD BOX 14 9 CTR 4 3L 14 9 F 14 9 CTR 4 3 F ALT14 9 AE LOA LOA PRTD None 4 3L ALT 14 9 None 4 3 L ALT 4 3 PN M 268 16 9 to 4 3 conversion Input AFD Input AFD Illustration in a 16 9 AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 WSS VI S2016 coded frame conversion conversion None 16 9 L gt 16 9 F 16 9 AMRPH 16 9 F 16 9 None 16 9 P 4 3 None 16 9 F PRTD None 16 9 P 14 9 None 16 9PALT 14 9 None 16 9FALT 14 9 None 16 9 F ALT4 3 269 16 9 to 16 9 conversion Input AFD Input AFD Illustration in a 16 9 SD AFD 16 9 conv SD AFD ALT 16 9 conv WSS VI S2016 coded frame HD AFD conversion HD AFD ALT conversion o OROCO N MS None 16 9 F ALT4 3 M o l Opa paul OO DOA DOA 7 270 20 3 AFD Supported Video Formats FA 9520 supports aspect ratio conversions according to SMPTE S2016 3 SMPTE RP186 2008VI Video Index and ITU R BT1119 2 WSS Wide Screen Signalling standards AFD formats and their supported video formats are as shown in the table below Video Formats and AFD Support RP186 2008 BT1119 2 Input video format 2016 3 VI WSS 525 60 s Y 625 50 A Y 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 1080 23 98PsF 1080 24PsF 720 59 94p 720 50p 1080 59 94p NI SISISISIS I SIS S 1080 50p 20 4 AFD Based Auto Aspect Conversion Settings AFD system
170. ING 77 BY PASS Setting Web 164 C CH STATUS 139 Changing Setting Values 34 Changing the Operation Mode 142 CLIP VIDEO CLIP 55 Closed Captioning 275 COLOR CORRECT C C 39 COLOR CORRECTION 159 COLOR CORRECTOR C C 37 Color Corrector Web 169 Color Corrector and AVO Modes 40 COMPOSITE CLIP 56 Composite Clip Web 176 Composite Output Format Table 62 175 COMPOSITE SET1 80 COMPOSITE SET2 80 Composite Settings Web 214 Connecting a Computer 26 Connecting to the REMOTE GPD Connector 27 Connecting via a WEB Browser 153 Connections 22 Consecutive Viewing of Settings 32 CONTROL SETTING 143 Control via WEB Browser 153 CONV UP DOWN CROSS CONVERTER 41 CONV Conversion Table 43 CONV CROPPING 44 CONV IMPROVE 45 CONV MODE 42 CONV SIDE RGB 46 CONV SIZE POS 43 Converter Web 165 283 Copy Settings Menus 141 CORRECTION 139 208 Correction Mode 169 D DIGITAL AUDIO 138 Digital Output Level Relative to the Analog Input Level 238 DIGITAL SILENCE 140 Dipswitch Settings 21 Dolby A POLARITY 124 Dolby AUX OUT 125 Dolby AUX Output Select WEB 196 Dolby B POLARITY 124 Dolby DEC IN 126 Dolby DECODER GAIN 128 Dolby DECODER REFERENCE 127 Dolby DOWNMIX 127 Dolby E Decoder Encoder Channel Assignment Table 240 Dolby E Encoder WEB 197 Dolby E Digital Decoder WEB 193 Dolby ENCODER INPUT 129 Dolby ENCODER SETTING 130 Dolby OPA AUX 92 Dolby OPB AUX 93 Down Mix Setting Web 189 DOWN MIX1 ASSIGN 118 DOWN MIX1 SET 117 DOW
171. KNOWN 93 5 10 20 AFD IN STATUS Displays the state of FS1 FS2 AFD detection When detecting AFD in input S2016 3 Menu button TE D 3 1 601 T 3 16 3 2 0 ER FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK 16 9 T 000000 00000000 AFD Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format AR Aspect Ratio is displayed in binary format 0 4 3 1 16 9 The detected AFD type is shown on the third row D Detected Data1 8 are displayed in hexadecimal format TOooo When detecting AFD in input RP186 VI 601 E F T D 02 55 00 3 D3 00 1 10 D2 0 D A 4 D Displays the status of RP186 VI Video Index Class1 AFD Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format SS Scanning System is displayed in hexadecimal format The detected AFD type is shown on the third row D1 D3 Detected Data are displayed in hexadecimal format When detecting AFD in input BT1119 2 WSS Bod 459 Wee Displays the status of BT1119 2 WSS Wide Screen Signalling AFD Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format The detected AFD type is shown on the third row BIT13 0 Detected Bits 13 0 are displayed in hexadecimal format ese See section 20 6 AFD Code Abbreviations for details on AFD types 5 10 21 ANC1 IN STATUS Menu button STATUS OTHER Displays the state of CEA608 WSS and VI ancillary data in the FS1 FS2 input signal luminance component T
172. KNOWN Unknown signal Displays status or type of signal output to the optional Dolby output connectors Dolby OUT PCM in slot A OUTPUT A NON PCM PCM Standard audio signal NONE NON PCM Compressed audio data such as Dolby E encoded data NONE No signal LOSS 525 60 625 50 1080 59i Displays signal format of reference signal input 1080 50i to the optional Dolby REF IN connector in slot REFERENCE A 720 59p A l LOSS No signal 720 50p UNKNOWN Unknown signal format 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF UNKNOWN 5 10 19 Dolby OPB AUX This menu is displayed only if FA 95D D option is installed in option slot B 596 Menu button STATUS OTHER Parameter Display Description Displays status or type of signal input to the optional Dolby input connector Dolby IN in LOSS slot B PCM LOSS No audio signal Nee NON PCM PCM Standard audio signal UNKNOWN NON PCM Compressed audio data such as Dolby E encoded data UNKNOWN Unknown signal Displays status or type of signal output to the optional Dolby output connectors Dolby OUT PCM in slot B OUTPUT B NON PCM PCM Standard audio signal NONE NON PCM Compressed audio data such as Dolby E encoded data NONE No signal LOSS 525 60 625 50 1080 59i Displays signal format of reference signal input 1080 50 to the optional Dolby REF IN connector in slot REFERENCE B 720 59p B l LOSS No signal 720 50p UNKNOWN Unknown signal format 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF UN
173. LD1 12 275 1080i LINE 9 to 20 LINE 9 a a UNO 720p LINE 9 to 25 LINE 9 525 60 FIELD1 12 275 to 19 282 FIELD1 12 275 625 50 FIELD1 8 321 to 22 335 FIELD1 8 321 ANC S2016 3 AFD 1080i PsF LINE 9 to 20 LINE 9 720p LINE 9 to 25 LINE 9 1080p 3G LINE 9 to 41 LINE 9 525 60 FIELD1 12 to 19 FIELD1 14 ANC RP186 VI FIELD2 275 to 282 FIELD2 277 625 50 FIELD1 8 to 22 FIELD1 11 FIELD2 321 to 335 FIELD2 324 ANC BT1119 WSS 625 50 FIELD1 8 to 23 FIELD1 23 Field2 line number displayed in parentheses If CEA608 or 8334 1 CC closed caption data is detected in the 525 60 input signal and the CONV1 and or CONV2 output format s is are 1080 59i and or 720 59p the detected closed caption data will not be converted to CEA708 The CEA708 closed caption data insertion will be automatically terminated Meanwhile if CEA708 closed caption data is detected in the 1080 59i or 720 59p input signal it will be converted to S334 1 CC or CEA608 CC for 525 60 output signals to output from CONV 1 and or CONV 2 66 IMPORTANT Closed caption data output will stop when data input is lost S2016 3 AFD RP186 VI and BT1119 WSS ancillary data will be output according to the ANC LOSS SET settings when their data input is lost See section 5 9 7 ANC LOSS SET for details Ancillary data combinations that cannot be simultaneously embedded to the same line Mie Ancillary data type S334 1
174. MODE STEREO SURROUND Soy sionals ed ds MONAURAL 3dB Sets the Ls Rs surround 6dB channels level TORRONE DE 9dB 0 codB Excludes surround 0 channels from the downmix Sets the C center channel level 3dB The output level after the downmix retains the original 3dB center channel level CENTER MIX 3dB 4 5 dB 4 5dB 6dB Used to reduce the 6dB audio level in case it becomes too loud due to the center channel audio mixing to both the right and left channels Sets the level for the downmixed audio signals as a whole f 3dB If set to AUTO Down MIX Master MASTEESEME ede AUTO Level changes according to the Downmix Mode and Surround Mix level selections 1 See section 10 Downmix Block Diagram for details on downmix modes 2 If MASTER LVL is set to AUTO Master Level changes as shown in the below table Down Mix Mode Surround Mix Level 3dB 6dB 9dB 0 edB Stereo approx 7 7dB approx 6 9dB approx 6 3dB approx 4 6dB Surround approx 9 9dB approx 8 7dB approx 7 7dB approx 4 6dB Monaural approx 12 9dB approx 12 0dB approx 11 4dB approx 9 5dB 119 6 8 1 DOWN MIX2 ASSIGN DOWN MI X2 ASSI GN Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX Setting range UR Parameter Default Steps Description LEFT L RIGHT R oe elas to be CH SEL LEFT CENTER C Tor WC m SiS Pd LEFT SRRND LS source audio RIGHT SRRND RS
175. N MIX2 ASSIGN 120 DOWN MIX2 SET 119 Downloading a MIB File Web 220 Downmix Block Diagram 236 E EMB 1 INAUDIO 87 EMB 2 IN AUDIO 88 EMB1 IN DELAY 115 EMB1 IN GAIN 98 EMB1 IN SET 99 EMB1 OUT CLOCK 100 EMB1 OUT GAIN 108 EMB1 OUT MONO 98 EMB1 OUT REMAP 111 EMB1 POLARITY 122 EMB1 SRC MODE 121 EMB2 AUDIO CLOCK 103 EMB2 IN DELAY 115 EMB2 IN GAIN 101 EMB2 IN SET 102 EMB2 OUT GAIN 109 EMB2 OUT MONO 101 EMB2 OUT REMAP 112 EMB2 POLARITY 122 EMB2 SRC MODE 121 Embed AES Input Signals on SDI Signals 24 Embed Analog Audio Signals on SDI Signals 25 Enhance 167 Event Control 218 Event Data Backup Web 221 EVENT LOAD 150 Event Memory 150 EVENT SAVE 151 EVENT SETUP 151 Expansion Slots A B Alert 277 External Dimensions 281 F FA 9520 Operation Mode Change 142 FA 95AIO 20 FA 95AIO Option 246 FA 95AIO Switch Settings 247 FA 95DACBL 19 FA 95DACBL installation 244 FA 95D D DE E 20 FADE IN OUT 137 Frame Delay Web 162 FRAME DELAY Setting Range Chart 49 Freeze Mode Setting Chart 204 FREEZE Mode Table 74 FREEZE SET 73 FRONT OPERATION 143 Front Panel 16 Front Panel Operations 28 FRONT PANEL SET 143 FS INPUT SELECT 58 FS Input Select Web 155 FS MODE SET 70 FS1 FS2 COPY 141 G GAMMA LEVEL 38 GPI Web 215 GPI Input Circuit 241 GPI Input Control 242 GPI INPUT FUNCTION 145 GPI Output Circuit 243 284 GPI OUTPUT FUNCTION 146 GPI SETTING 144 A HD PHASE SET 71 HD SD SDI Simul Output 23 How to Install the FA 95DAC
176. NC data space BT1119WSS Aspect ratio data inserted as Y signals into line 23 of 625 50 analog or SDI signals 65 5 7 5 ANC EMBED LINE Allows you to select a line of SDI signal ancillary data space to insert closed caption data Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter ANC Default CEA608 CC Setting range CEA608 CC 334 1 CC SD CEA708 CC HD S2016 3 AFD RP186 VI BT1119 WSS Description Selects a type of ancillary data to insert FORMAT 51 Selects a video format compatible with the ancillary data selected under ANC Only compatible Video formats will be displayed LINE FIELD1 Selects a line in ancillary data space into which ancillary data is inserted A line can be selected for different ANC and FORMAT selections separately If ANC is set to RP186 VI this parameter allows you to select a line for FIELD 1 Lines can be selected for fields 1 and 2 respectively FIELD2 If ANC is set to RP186 VI this parameter allows you to select a line for FIELD 2 Lines can be selected for fields 1 and 2 respectively Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively 1 The setting range varies according to the ancillary data type and video format Ancillary data type FORMAT LINE Default ANC CEA 608 CC 525 60 FIELD1 21 284 fixed ANC S334 1 CC SD 525 60 FIELD1 12 275 to 19 282 FIE
177. No reference signal used de lhe FS1 2 OUTPUT Uses the respective FS INPUT NONE output video signals E 2 AUX REF IN AUX REF IN Uses the input signal in the FS1 INPUT optional Dolby reference input connector FS2 INPUT REF IN If no signal is in the REF IN connector the PCM signal output will be in free run mode FS1 2 INPUT Uses the respective FS input video signals 6 10 1 4 Dolby DOWNMIX This menu is displayed only if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is installed in slot A Dolby MODE DOWNMI X SURROUND Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Menu names and menu pages for the option in slot B chang as shown below Dol by DOWNMIX B 234 Parameter Default Setting range Description SURROUND MODE SURROUND STEREO ively downmix mode for the Dolby MONAURAL i 127 6 10 1 5 Dolby DECODER GAIN This menu is displayed only if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is installed in slot A Dolby DEC H SEL DE AIN SET ASTER 00 STE GAIN oom ooo c o o wW e 185 Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Menu names and menu pages for the option in slot B chang as shown below Dolby DOWNMIX B 2 959 Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a signal for gain adjustment DEC CH1 cH8 DEC CH1 CH8 Dolby decoded PCM H SEL DEC CH1 DolbyDM L signal ds des D TOME DolbyDM L R Down mixed signal y generated from Dolby decoded
178. O Unit Name Unit name faQ52UnitName 3 OCTET STRING O Unit Info Serial No Serial number a952SerialNumber 4 NTEGER O Soft Software version a952SoftVersion 11 JOCTET STRING O Unit Ver FPGA1 Ver FPGA 1version a952FPGA1Version 12 OCTET STRING O FPGA2 Ver FPGAZ2 version a952FPGA2Version 13 OCTET STRING O FPGA3 Ver FPGAS version a952FPGA3Version 14 OCTET STRING O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 1 100 Software option FA 95SCNV D nolinstalled a952ScnvOption 4 INTEGER E do FA 95AVO panetinstalled a952AvoOption 2 INTEGER o Soft Option DEED FA 95 3G Qnolinstalled 2952 3GOption 3 INTEGER lo FA 95CO Monotinstaled a952CoOption M INTEGER o FA 95LG P nornatalgd a952LGOption 5 INTEGER o OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 1 200 1 Option Slot A 0 notInstalled 1 FA 95AIO 4 FA 95DE E Name 5 FA 95D D a952SlotTypeA 1 NTEGER JO 11 FA 95DACBL OPTION SlotA OPTION A Ver 12 Unknown 15 FA 95ALA FPGA1 Ver SlotA FPGA1 version a952FPGA1VerSlotA 2 OCTET STRING 5 13 O FPGA2 Ver SlotA FPGA2 version a952FPGA2VerSlotA 3 OCTET STRING 5 13 O SOFT Ver SlotA Software version faQ52CPUVerSlotA 4 OCTET STRING 5 13 O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 1 200 2 Option Slot B 0 notinstalled 1 FA 95AIO 4 FA 95DE E Name 5 FA 95D D a952SlotTypeB 1 INTEGER O OPTION SlotB OPTION B Ver d pac DESEE 15 FA 95ALA FPGA1 Ver SlotA FPGA1 version a952FPGA1VerSlotB 2 OCTET STRING 5 13 O FPGA2 Ver SlotA FPGA2 version a952FPGA2VerSlotB 3 OCTET STRIN
179. O FORMAT can be registered for each logo ID via FA 95LG GUI See the separate FA 95LG GUI Operation Manual for details 2 The video format displayed under FS FORMAT and the logo format displayed under LOGO FORMAT must match Otherwise no logo will be displayed even if KEYER in section 5 8 1 2 KEYER SET is turned On 68 5 8 1 2 KEYER SET Allows you to set a keyer for FS1 or FS2 MA 000 Meme bution REVERS OFF rz VIDEO OP LEVEL 100 H POS 0PIXEL AUDIO OP FRAMES da cos V POS OL INE Parameter Default Seiling range Description Steps Allows you to enable or disable the keyer for the OFF FS1 or FS2 output signal PELER QuE ON ON Enables display of logos selected in the LOGO SELECT menu 5 8 1 1 0 100 Allows you to set a key level for a logo to be LEVEL 100 0 1 output to the FS1 or FS2 output signal 9 Allows you to set the horizontal positon for a H POS 0 logo to be output to the FS1 or FS2 output 2 Pixel signal V POS 0 2 Allows you to set the vertical positon for a logo 1 Line to be output to the FS1 or FS2 output signal 1 Key level and position settings are saved for each logo ID Changing logo settings for FS1 will also change the logo settings of FS2 using the same logo 2 Actual logo position differs depending on the logo format selected when registering the logo See section 5 8 1 3 Logo Position Setting Range for details LEVEL and H V POS set
180. OpA R 83 Loudness2 OpA C 84 Loudness2 OpA LFE 85 Loudness2 OpA LS 86 Loudness2 OpA RS 87 Loudness1 OpA L 88 Loudness1 OpA R 89 Loudness1 OpA C 90 Loudness1 OpA LFE 91 Loudness1 OpA LS 92 Loudness1 OpA RS 93 Loudness2 OpA L 94 Loudness2 OpA R 95 Loudness2 OpA C 96 Loudness2 OpA LFE 97 Loudness2 OpA LS 98 Loudness2 OpA RS byDecodeOpACh2 byDecodeOpACh3 byDecodeOpACh4 byDecodeOpACh5 byDecodeOpACh6 byDecodeOpACh7 byDecodeOpACh8 byDecodeOpBCh2 byDecodeOpBCh3 byDecodeOpBCh4 byDecodeOpBCh5 byDecodeOpBCh6 byDecodeOpBCh7 byDecodeOpBCh8 fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh1 INTEGER O Ditto ffa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh2 INTEGER Ditto ffa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh3 INTEGER Ditto ffa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh4 INTEGER Ditto ffa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh5 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh6 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh7 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh8 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh9 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh10 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh11 gt ooN oA ox BY o n5 3 0 INTEGER OJOJOJO QI Q Q GG og 252 I Ql AQQqgqqgqgog OJOJOIO QI Q Q Q Q1 OF Object group Front TITLE Item name Settings Object name in MIB file Type Write Audio Asdio SDI
181. PE Change OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 01 6 2 VIDEO TRAP SDI 1 IN 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50i 04 1080 59i 105 1080 50i 109 1080 24PsF 10 1080 23 98PsF 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59p 21 720 50p 29 Unknown 30 BY PASS 31 Disable 32 none fa952InSDI1ChangeTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SDI 2 IN Ditto fa952InSDI2ChangeTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change Composite IN 0 LOSS 1 525 60 2 625 50 29 Unknown 30 BY PASS fa952InCompositeChangeTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change Ref Status 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50i 04 1080 59i 05 1080 50i 09 1080 24PsF 10 1080 23 98PsF 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59p 21 720 50p 29 Unknown 30 BY PASS 31 Disable 32 none fa952InRefChangeTrap 11 NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SDI OUT 1 2 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50i 04 1080 59i 105 1080 50i 09 1080 24PsF 10 1080 23 98PsF 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59p 21 720 50p 29 Unknown 30 BY PASS 31 Disable 32 none fa9520utSDI1 2ChangeTrap 21 NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SDI OUT 3 4 Ditto fa9520utSDI3 4ChangeTrap 22 NOTIFICATION TYPE Change Composite OUT 0 LOSS 1 525 60 2 625 50 30 BY PASS fa9520utCompositeChangeTrap 23 NOTIFICATION TYPE O Change OpA IN SEL 0 FS1 FS2 fa952InOpASel NOTIFICATION TYPE Change OpB IN SEL EST FS2 fa952InOpBSel NOTIFICATION TYPE Change OpA OU
182. ROUP 3 REFERENCE INPUT CH 9 10 Used to synchronize audio with the video INPUT CH 11 12 Signals processed in the SRC CH 1 2 to 15 16 Audio clock input in SOURCE channels CH 1 2 to 15 16 To output asynchronous audio signals AUTO select one input channel pair for each roup GROUP4 REFERENCE REFERENCE Soup INPUT CH 13 14 o INPUT CH 15 16 For SD SDI outputs REFERENCE is automatically selected regardless of the settings 1 See section 6 5 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING for details on SOURCE settings 2 Embedded audio signals are divided into 4 groups Each group consists of 4 audio channels Group 1 CH 1 to 4 Group 2 CH 5 to 8 Group 3 CH 9 to 12 Group 4 CH 13 to 16 The audio signals in the same group are transmitted together using the same audio clock 48kHz PCM audio signals will be synchronized to a genlock signal in the SRC sampling rate converter so as to synchronize with the output video signal Non PCM audio signals compressed audio data such as AC 3 do not go into SRC If the NON PCM audio input signal is asynchronous with the output video signal the NON PCM audio output signal will be asynchronous The asynchronous NON PCM audio signals can be embedded to SDI video signals by selecting an audio clock for each audio group To do so all 4 channels in the respective audio groups must be synchronous Assign 4 synchronous audio signals to channels in a group See section 6 5 1 EMB1 OU
183. Ral FS2 connector on the FA 95AIO in slot B YPbPr SMPTE Sedet i er elects the operation mode for MODE YPbPr SMPTE E e output video signals from the VIC FA 95AIO installed in slot B This menu does not appear if there is no FA 95AIO installed in slot B The FA 95AIO connector outputs a black video if the output signal from the selected FS1 or FS2 is 1080p and MODE is set to YPbPr or RGB See the below YPbPr RGB Output Format table for details The FA 95AIO connector outputs a black video if the output signal from the selected FS1 or FS2 is an HD signal and MODE is set to Y C See the below Y C Output Format table for details YPbPr RGB Output Format FS1 or 2 output signal FA 95AIO YPbPr RGB output signal 525 60 525 60 signal in FS 1 or 2 625 50 625 50 signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 59i 1080 59i signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 50i 1080 50i signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 24PsF 1080 24PsF signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 23 98PsF 1080 23 98PsF signal in FS 1 or2 720 59p 720 59p signal in FS 1 or 2 720 50p 720 50p signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 59p 1080 59i black video 1080 50p 1080 50i black video Y C Output format FS 1 or 2 output signal Y C output signal 525 60 525 60 signal in FS 1 or 2 625 50 625 50 signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 59i 525 60 BB signal 1080 50 625 50 BB signal 1080 24PsF 625 50 BB signal 1080 23 98PsF 525 60 BB signal 720 59p 525 60 BB signal 720 50p 625
184. S NORMAL RESPONSE F NORMAL Menu names and menu pages for the second channel of the FA 95ALA in option slot A and the first and second channels of the FA 95ALA in option slot B change as shown below Channel 2 of the FA 95ALA in option slot A LOUD CTRL ENA2A 222 Channel 1 of the FA 95ALA in option slot A LOUD CTRL ENAIB 2 6 2 Channel 2 of the FA 95ALA in option slot A LOUD CT RE ENA2 B 272 Parameter Default Setting range Description Allows you to turn On or Off the Loudness Level Adjustment feature Set to Off to measure loudness but not to OFF adjust CONTROL OFF ON The setting can be changed only when loudness is not being measured While measuring the loudness level OFF LOCK or ON LOCK is displayed and the setting cannot be changed Allows you to select the loudness level NA adjustment speed SLOW to achieve the 4 3 2 1 target level for long term loudness level daa adjustment allowing gradual leveling NORMAL The larger the value the faster the response 1 2 3 4 allowing greater adjustment NA Disables the SLOW adjustment function Allows you to select the loudness level adjustment speed FAST to achieve the NA target level for instantaneous loudness level 4 3 2 1 adjustment allowing sudden leveling leveling NORMAL down only 1 2 43 4 The larger the value the faster the response SANT T allowing greater adjustment NA Disables the FAST adjustment fu
185. SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description CH SEL FS1 1 2 FS1 15 16 FS2 1 2 FS2 15 16 AES 1 2 AES 7 8 FS1 1 2 Selects a stereo channel pair for which to enable Audio Error SENSE CH STATUS SRC BYPASS PCM MUTE SRC BYPASS Selects audio error sensor mode for each stereo channel pair of SDI and AES input audio signals whose NON PCM channel status flag is 1 SRC BYPASS Treats audio signals as NON PCM By passes audio signals through SRC and selects audio clock input in the NON PCM signal channel for SDI AUDIO CLOCK PCM Treats audio signals as PCM standard audio signal By passes audio signals through SRC and selects REFERENCE for SDI AUDIO CLOCK MUTE Treats audio signals as mute signals 138 Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects audio error sensor mode for each stereo channel pair of SDI and AES input audio signals whose channel status Validity Bit flag is 1 SRC BYPASS Treats audio signals as NON PCM By passes audio signals SRC BYPASS through SRC and selects audio clock PCM input in the NON PCM signal channel for MUTE SDI AUDIO CLOCK PCM Treats audio signals as PCM standard audio signal By passes audio signals through SRC and selects REFERENCE for SDI AUDIO CLOCK MUTE Treats audio signals as mute signals SRC VALIDITY BYPASS FA 9520 can fade and mute audio when it detects a
186. Selects an analog audio channel for CH SEL CH 1 CH1 CH4 which to set delay Sets the delay for the audio channel that OFFSET Omsec 996ms 996ms is selected under CH SEL Sets the offset to the delay for all MASTER 4msec 4ms 1000ms audio channels CH1 to 4 Displays the total amount of delay set TOTAL for the audio channel that is selected under CH SEL OFFSET MASTER 116 6 7 DOWN MIX1 SET Menu button MODE STEREO SURROUND MIX 3dB IN SEL CENTER MI X 3dB DOWN MIX MASTER LVL 3dB Parameter Default Setting range Description Steps STEREO Select de to d ix1 MODE STEREO SURROUND Soy sionals SERO SMS MONAURAL 3dB Sets the Ls Rs surround 6dB channels level TORRONE DE 9dB 0 codB Excludes surround 0 channels from the downmix Sets the C center channel level 3dB The output level after the downmix retains the original 3dB center channel level CENTER MIX 3dB 4 5 dB 4 5dB 6dB Used to reduce the 6dB audio level in case it becomes too loud due to the center channel audio mixing to both the right and left channels Sets the level for the downmixed audio signals as a whole f 3dB If set to AUTO Down MIX Master MASTEESEME ede AUTO Level changes according to the Downmix Mode and Surround Mix level selections 1 See section 10 Downmix Block Diagram for details on downmix modes 2 If MASTER LVL is set to AUTO Master Level changes as shown
187. Shorted to GND AUDIO test signal ON OPEN AUDIO test signal OFF FS1 FS2 SDI1 2 FS1 FS2 COMPOSITE Pulse Selects an input video signal for each FS Switches over to FS1 FS2 OP A the selected input signal when shorted to GND FS1 FS2 OP B DEFAULT 5 Loads the DEFAULT and events 1 through 100 EVENT 1 100 5 Pulse When shorted to GND the assigned settings among default and events will be loaded Sets the keyer ON OFF for each FS FS1 FS2 KEYER Level Shorted to GND Keyer ON OPEN Keyer OFF Loads the logo assigned to a LOGO ID to the selected FS FSURSA AD TE Pulse 51 2 LOAD 1 LOAD 7 are assigned to LOGO IDs 6 Starts or Stops respective LOUDNESS measurements Ub A 7 Level Shorted to GND Starts LOUDNESS measurement OPEN Stops LOUDNESS measurement LOUD1 2A CLEAR Pulse Clears respective LOUDNESS measurements LOUD1 2B CLEAR 7 Shorted to GND Clears LOUDNESS measurement 145 BY PASS OP A 3 BY PASS OP B 1 Shorted to GND BY PASS ON OPEN Level BY PASS OFF Sets BY PASS ON OFF for FA 95AIO I O in slots A amp B 1 The BY PASS that is displayed as disabled in the BY PASS SETTING menu sec 5 9 11 will not turn on by setting the above to ON In such case the menu will be displayed as BYPASS SDIT1 To enable the BY PASS change associated settings in FS INPUT SELECT sec 5 6 1 and OUTPUT ASSIGN sec 5 7 1 2 Although FREEZE is set to ON the free
188. StatusChangeTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SOURCE CH7 Ditto fa952SDI3 40PutAudioCh7StatusChangeTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SOURCE CH8 Ditto fa952SDI3 40PutAudioCh8StatusChangeTral NOTIFICATION TYPE _ Change SOURCE CH9 Ditto fa952SD13 40PutAudioCh9StatusChangeTrap 9 NOTIFICATION TYPE f O Change SOURCE CH10 Ditto fa9525DI3 40PutAudioCh10StatusChangeTrap 10 NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SOURCE CH11 Ditto fa9525DI3 40PutAudioCh11StatusChangeTrap 11 NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SOURCE CH12 Ditto fa9525DI3 40PutAudioCh12StatusChangeTrap 12 NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SOURCE CH13 Ditto fa9525DI3 40PutAudioCh13StatusChangeTrap 13 NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SOURCE CH14 Ditto fa9525DI3 40PutAudioCh14StatusChangeTrap 14 NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SOURCE CH15 Ditto fa952SDI3 40PutAudioCh15StatusChangeTrap 15 NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SOURCE CH16 Ditto a952SDI3 4OPutAudioCh16StatusChangeTrap 16 NOTIFICATION TYPE Change OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 6 5 AES Audio TRAP O Loss 1 PCM 2 PCM 48kHz 3 PCM 44 1kHz 4 PCM 32kHz 5 PCM Other 6 Silence 7 Silence 48kHz SOURCE CH1 8 Silence 44 1kHz Fa952AES OutAudioCh1StatusChangeTrap 1 NOTIFICATION TYPE 9 Silence 32kHz 10 Silence Other 11 NON PCM 12 PCM Async 13 Silence Async 14 NON PCM Async 15 IN 16 Unknown OJO Q QJ dada o o oO oO OO a mij mi mj mj mi mJ 9 9 1 Ty TY yy m O Change 260 Objec
189. T REMAP for details Then the asynchronous audio signal will be properly embedded to the video signal 100 6 1 5 EMB2 IN GAIN Menu button PROCESS SDI AUDIO Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description Selects an FS2 embedded audio GHEE EN SHUT ORG channel for which to adjust the gain Sets the input gain for the SDI embedded GAIN SET o 0dB 00 200 dB Sudio channel that is selected under CH 0 1 dB SEL Sets the offset to the input gain for all 20 0 20 0 dB channels CH1 to CH16 of SDI embedded 0 1 dB audio 1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range If the range is exceeded the alert will be displayed as 20 0 dB or 20 0 dB MASTER 0 0 dB 6 1 6 EMB2 OUT MONO OUT Menu button C Hs aries ll MONO SUM DISABLE PROCESS SDI AUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Description CH SEL CH1 2 CH1 2 15 16 Selects a stereo pair of FS2 embedded audio channels ENABLE Outputs the stereo pair channels DISABLE selected under CH SEL as a mono sum MONO SUM DISABLE ENABLE The signals of the selected pair channels are added and devided by two to output from each channel 101 6 1 7 EMB2 IN SET Menu button PROCESS SDI AUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Description Enables or disables automatic phase adjustment for FS2 input embedded audio ALIGNMENT
190. T SEL FS2 fa9520utOpASel NOTIFICATION TYPE Change OpB OUT SEL EST 1 0 1 0 FS1 1 0 1 FS2 fa9520utOpBSel NOTIFICATION TYPE O O 0 0 Change 259 Object Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type Write Read Lap Trap Valid Event value O1D 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 6 3 SDI 1 2 Audio TRAP O Loss 1 PCM 2 PCM 48kHz 3 PCM 44 1kHz 4 PCM 32kHz 5 PCM Other 6 Silence 7 Silence 48kHz SOURCE CH1 8 Silence 44 1kHz fa952SDI1 2OPutAudioCh1StatusChangeTrap 1 NOTIFICATION TYPE 9 Silence 32kHz 10 Silence Other 11 NON PCM 12 PCM Async 13 Silence Async 14 NON PCM Async 15 IN 16 Unknown SOURCE CH2 Ditto fa952SDH 20PutAudioCh2StatusChangeTrap SOURCE CH3 Ditto fa9525DI1 20PutAudioCh3StatusChangeTrap SOURCE CH4 Ditto fa952SDH 20PutAudioCh4StatusChangeTrap SOURCE CH5 Ditto fa952SDH 20PutAudioCh5StatusChangeTrap SOURCE CH6 Ditto fa9525DI1 20PutAudioCh6StatusChangeTrap SOURCE CH7 Ditto fa952SDH 20PutAudioCh7StatusChangeTrap SOURCE CH8 Ditto fa952SDI1 20PutAudioCh8StatusChangeTrap NOT SOURCE CH9 Ditto fa952SDI1 20PutAudioCh9StatusChangeTrap NOT SOURCE CH10 Ditto fa952SDI1 20PutAudioCh10StatusChangeTrap 10 NOT SOURCE CH11 Ditto fa952SDI1 2OPutAudioCh1 1StatusChangeTrap 11 NOT SOURCE CH12 Ditto fa9525DI1 20PutAudioCh12StatusChangeTrap 12 NOT SOURCE CH13 Ditto fa9525DI1 20PutAudioCh13StatusChangeTrap 13 NOT SOURCE CH14 Ditto fa9525DI1 20PutAudioCh1
191. VI and BT1119 WSS states that appear as ABSENT indicate the absence of AFD data that allows for auto conversion For auto conversions using S2016 3 the data packet must be detected in the ANC IN STATUS1 2 menu If no AFD data is detected reset AFD system settings Also check if any AFD data is being inserted using a waveform monitor 271 FS1 and FS2 operation mode settings 4 Set the AFD auto conversion mode for CONV 1 in CONV MODE Sec 5 3 1 AFD output verification AFD data status in FA1 and FA2 output video signals can be verified as follows The ANC OUT menu Sec 5 10 23 allows you to verify whether and in which line the VI and WSS data has been inserted into output video signals VI and WSS output data details can be seen in VI OUT 5 10 25 and WSS OUT 5 10 26 S2016 3 output data details can be seen in S2016 OUT Sec 5 10 24 Into which line S2016 3 is inserted can be seen inANC OUT1 Sec 5 10 27 20 5 How to Insert AFD Data to Output Video Signals FA 9520 can insert AFD data into input video signals that have no AFD data inserted AFD system settings To insert AFD data into output video signals set basic operational settings in the VIDEO SYSTEM menus as follows Set ANC MODE to DETAIL in ANC SET Sec 5 9 6 Select the AFD data to insert and which output to insert the data in ANC DATA EMBED Sec 5 7 4 These settings are necessary when inserting AFD data into video signals to be output fro
192. Validity Bit V Bit is incorrect the audio signal may cause improper processing This setting may effective processing such audio signals with incorrect Validy Bits properly IMPORTANT Please use these settings only if there is audio noise or the audio is muted Otherwise do not change the default setting CORRECTION Normally set to NORMAL Set to DISABLE for a specific program or duration when audio output has noise or is muted The FA 9520 fades out audio or resets the delay circuit when a status change SDI signal input interruption signal switchover by a router etc is detected Faulty ancillary data in normal audio signals may also be detected as status changes 139 Audio signals with such faulty ancillary data may lead the FA 9520 s automatic correction to improperly process the audio input and produce noise or mute the audio Note that disableing the automatic correction can prevent such improper processing however the following functions will also be disabled After a signal switchover by router or the recovery of an interrupted SDI signal delay settings will lose their accuracy to within 1 3 msec max Audio signal phases among audio groups will not match Perform either of the following operations when setting CORRECTION to DISABLE or changing the setting from DISABLE to NORMAL a Change the 6 1 3 EMB1 IN SET ALIGNMENT setting from DISABLE to ENABLE b Disconnect and reinput the SDI input signal T
193. ained image may be dark Determines the minimum value of luminance for outputs The minimum luminance value of the image after correction 0 should approximate this value TARGET BLACK 40 0 The larger the value the dark area in pictures will appear 0 5 brighter which may however lower the contrast and the f noise will become apparent The smaller the value the higher the contrast which may however cause the image to be underexposed The figure below is a luminance histogram of output X axis Luminance level Y axis Number of pixels Reference values TARGET BLACK TARGET WHITE 51 The figures below compare the reference values dotted line for output and the actual values after correction full line TARGET BLACK TARGET BLACK Large TARGET BLACK setting Small TARGET BLACK setting TARGET WHITE TARGET WHITE Large TARGET WHITE setting Small TARGET WHITE setting Relationship between IN BLACK IN WHITE and TARGET BLACK TARGET WHITE levels Input image 0 100 IN BLACK IN WHITE Output image 100 TARGET BLACK TARGET WHIE 52 5 4 4 USER1 2 AREA SET Selecting USER1 or 2 AREA for AREA in the AVO SETTING menu opens the USER1 2 AREA SET menus 13 Menu button AVO EL MAPPING E To set the sample area set the start point and the size 3 3 Parameter Default ends Description START H 0 Pixel Pixel Specifie
194. amp re you sure you want to load EVENT Data from file Click OK to start loading the data To cancel loading the data click Cancel IMPORTANT The data saved in FA 9500 mode cannot be loaded Do not attempt to load the data saved in FA 9500 mode 221 9 7 Status Display Click oe utility Status J Network Ancillary Status Video Audio System GPI gt Unit Video Status Audio Status Unit Information Click the Status tab at the top of the page The Unit Video Status page will be displayed To go to the Audio Status page click Audio Status at the top left of the page In the same way click Unit Video Status to go to the Unit Video Status page and click Unit Information to go to the Unit Information page Click Changeover Status to go to the Changeover Status page The Changeover Status page will open only if the FA 95CO option is installed 9 7 1 Unit Video Status The video and unit statuses are shown on the Unit Video Status page FA 9520 Logout Video Audio system Ger umiy status Network gt Unit Video Status Audio Status Unit Information Ancillary Status Video Input Status Video Output Status Unit Status SDI In 1 1080 59 94i SDI Out 1 2 1080 59 94i Unit Name FA 9520 SDI In 2 1080 59 94i SDI Out 3 4 1080 59 94i Fan 1 Normal Composite In 525 60 Composite Out 525 60 Fan 2 Normal Reference 525 60 Option A 1080 59 94i Power 1 Normal Option A 1080 59 94i O
195. ance RGB signal correction mode Allows you to adjust the white balance Gray scale can be changed by adjusting R G and B levels Balance Jm f Correction Mode Balance Differential Differential Color difference signal mode Sepia Allows you to adjust contrast without changing white balance R G and B levels can be changed without affecting gray scale This adjustment is effective for images with different color saturation levels Sepia Sepia mode Useful for creating black and white images 1 Sepia will not be displayed while changing FS1 and FS2 settings simultaneously If Correction Mode is set to Sepia the White Level Black Level or Gamma Level R B setting cannot be changed Also it cannot be changed if AVO Control is set to Auto or Hold in the Auto Video Optimizer AVO menu 9 2 2 Correction Mode cannot be set to Sepia if LINK setting mode is enabled in the FA 9520 or connected FA 95RU To set to Sepia disable LINK setting mode See section 4 2 8 Switching Between 2 Channel Frame Synchronizers for details on LINK settings 169 White Level Parameter Default PUR UE Description R G B 100 0 0 0 200 0 Adjusts the white level of R G and B RGB White Level bbs 0 596 components separately o Enables you to adjust white level R G and B n components simultaneously retaining Group Adjust Off Off separately adjusted R G and B proportion by changing the val
196. annot properly pass through as AUTO or Sync SDI IMPORTANT Use this Alignment enable disable function only if the audio output has noise or is muted Do not change the setting for normal audio output Note that the audio output will be temporally muted when ALIGNMENT is changed from DISABLE to ENABLE while audio signal phases are aligning 102 6 1 8 EMB2 AUDIO CLOCK GROUP1 REFERENCE GROUPS REFERENCE SUE GROUP4 REFERENCE Sieur Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an audio clock signal per group AUTO for SDI embedded audio output from REFERENCE _ FS2 GROUP 1 REFERENCE INPUT CH 1 2 INPUT CH 3 4 AUTO Automatically selects audio clock input in the NON PCM signal channel if an input NON PCM signal is in the selected SDI embedded audio group HEEERENDE Automatically selects audio clock signal ROUP2 REFERENCE in the smallest numbered channel if all PS e INPUT CH 5 6 signals in the audio group are NON PCM INPUT CH 7 8 Automatically selects audio clock signal synchronized to the output video signal if all signals in the audio group are PCM AUTO REFEFENCE Audio clock signal REFERENCE synchronized to the output video signal GROUP 3 REFERENCE INPUT CH 9 10 Used to synchronize audio with the video INPUT CH 11 12 Signals processed in the SRC CH 1 2 to 15 16 Audio clock input in SOURCE channels CH 1 2 to 15 16 To output asynchronous audio signa
197. ary data without processing Processed audio data cannot be embedded Blank Deletes all horizontal ancillary data and embeds the processed audio data V ANC Pass Pass Blank Embeds audio signals into vertical ancillary data of FS1 FS2 output videos Pass Embeds the vertical ancillary data without processing Blank Deletes all vertical ancillary data H ANC and V ANC settings are effective if input and output formats are the same If such formats are different both H ANC and V ANC will be set to BLANK FS1 FS2 Audio Group Parameter Default Setting range Description Group1 Enable Disable Disable Does not insert GROUP 1 embedded audio Enable Enable Inserts GROUP 1 embedded audio Group 2 Enable Disable Disable Does not insert GROUP 2 embedded audio Enable Enable Inserts GROUP 2 embedded audio Group 3 Enable Disable Disable Does not insert GROUP 3 embedded audio Enable Enable Inserts GROUP 3 embedded audio Group 42 Enable Disable Disable Does not insert GROUP 4 embedded audio Enable Enable Inserts GROUP 4 embedded audio 1 Operative if H ANC under FS1 FS2 Ancillary Setting is set to Overwrite or Blank 2 GROUP4 embedded audio cannot be inserted into SD SDI output signals regardless of the GROUPA setting 3 The setting is ineffective if the input and output formats are the same and H ANC is set to In Data under Co
198. as noise or is muted The FA 9520 fades out audio or resets the delay circuit when a status change SDI signal input interruption signal switchover by a router etc is detected Faulty ancillary data in normal audio signals may also be detected as status changes Audio signals with such faulty ancillary data may lead the FA 9520 s automatic correction to improperly process the audio input and produce noise or mute the audio Note that disableing the automatic correction can prevent such improper processing however the following functions will also be disabled After a signal switchover by router or the recovery of an interrupted SDI signal delay settings will lose their accuracy to within 1 3 msec max Audio signal phases among audio groups will not match Perform either of the following operations when setting Correction to Disable or changing the setting from Disable to Normal a Change the Alignment setting from Disable to Enable under SDI Input Audio in 9 4 2 Audio System b Disconnect and reinput the SDI input signal These operations reset the audio circuit and minimize the delay differences and group audio phase differences Output audio signals will be muted while performing the operations 208 Channel Status Mask Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects audio error sensor mode for each stereo channel pair of SDI and AES input audio signals whose channel status NON PCM flag is 1
199. asses the input signal in AIO OP B IN OUT OFF ON the FA 95AIO in option slot B to its output connector with a relay connection 1 Available only if the FA 95AIO is installed in option slot A 2 Available only if the FA 95AIO is installed in option slot B The AIO BY PASS SET menu does not appear if no FA 95AIO is installed in either option slot A or B T VIDEO SYS If any by pass setting is set to ON button flashes TAXE g AUDIO SYS Conditions for by passing AIO OP A IN OUT circuit The AIO OPT A IN OUT by pass circuit is enabled when the FS1 input signal is assigned to OPTION A and AIO A ASSIGN output is set to FS1 or when the FS2 input signal is assigned to OPTION A and the AIO A ASSIGN output is set to FS2 If AIO BY PASS SET cannot be set to ON an AlO OP A DISABLED message will be displayed Conditions for by passing AIO OP B IN OUT circuit The AIO OPT B IN OUT by pass circuit is enabled when the FS1 input signal is assigned to OPTION B and AIO B ASSIGN output is set to FS1 or when the FS2 input signal is assigned to OPTION B and the AIO B ASSIGN output is set to FS2 If AIO BY PASS SET cannot be set to ON an AlO OP B DISABLED message will be displayed 78 5 9 13 SD LINE MASK 73 Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Parameter Default Setting range Description LINE SEL LINEG LINE6 23 Selects a line from lines 6 through 23 of an S
200. ate the adjustment FULL 10 options are available Eight fixed areas and SCREEN two custom areas 2 e Fixed areas BOTTOM FULL SCREEN LETTER BOX PILLAR BOX AREA FULL RIGHT CENTER TOP LEFT TOP RIGHT Sample area SCREEN BOTTOM LEFT BOTTOM RIGHT USER See Sample Area in the next page AREA Custom areas USER Selecting USER AREA or 2 opens the USER AREA2 AREA SET page See section 5 4 4 USER1 2 AREA SET for details Sets sample area display ON OFF If set to ON AREA the sample area appears as a semi transparent DISPLAY OFF OFF white rectangle on all output videos Marker ON It is set to OFF at startup Also if MODE is set to display OFF AREA DISPLAY is automatically set to OFF 1 MODE cannot be set to AUTO or HOLD when LINK setting mode is enabled in the FA 9520 or a connected FA 95RU To set to AUTO or HOLD disable LINK setting mode See sec 4 2 8 Switching Between 2 Channel Frame Synchronizers for details on LINK settings IMPORTANT The Auto Level Adjustment will provide optimal results in many cases but it does not always yield optimal results Sample Area determines the area where the data are sampled and the level adjustments are applied to whole images 47 Sample Area Fixed area Eight available sample areas are as shown below Data are continuously sampled within each area See section 5 4 4 USER1 2 AREA SET for USERAREA 1 and 2 C Sample Sample area Sampl
201. aterials that prefer minimum loudness adjustment set each setting to a small value Loudness Channel Assign 1 2 Parameter Default Setting range Description Monaural Allows you to select the audio mode Mode Stereo Stereo of an audio signal for its loudness 5 1 CH level to be measured and adjusted EMB1 CH1 16 Allows you to select audio signals to EMB2 CH 1 16 be measured and adjusted EMB1 FS1 IN input audio signals m E A EMB2 FS2 IN input audio signals nalog CH 1 AES AES input audio signals EMBA Down Mix 1 Left Analog Input analog audio signals Left CH1 3 Down Mix 1 Right Down Mix Internally generated Down Mix 2 Left downmixed audio signals Down Mix 2 Right ed Decoder Slot A B CH 1 8 Dolby Decoder Slot A B CH 1 8 4 olby decoder output audio signals add 9 Dolby Decoder Slot A B Downmix Dolby Decoder Slot A B Downmix L Dolby decoder downmixed output Dolby Decoder Slot A B Downmix R audio signals Right ate The same as above The same as above Center ate The same as above The same as above LFE eae The same as above The same as above Ls 2 SHE S The same as above The same as above Rs CHE s The same as above The same as above 200 1 Selectable if Mode is set to Stereo or 5 1ch 2 Selectable if Mode is set to 5 1ch 3 Under Loudness Channel Assign 2 menus values are EMB2 CH1 6 respectively 4 Shown if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E is installed in option slot
202. ation of the optional installed expansion card in SLOT B If no card is installed None will be shown Option Information Displays the installation status and information on options other than the expansion cards installed into SLOT A and SLOT B 227 9 7 4 ANC Status Unit Video Status Audio Status Unit Information ANC Status Changeover Status Ancillary Input Status 1 CEA 608 CC Absent Line 2 BT 1119 2WSS Present Line 23 3 RP186 VI Present Line 11 324 AFD Input Status Detected S2016 3 AFD amp Bar AFD 1011 BNR AR 4 3 Letterbox 14 9 image vertically centered in the coded frame Data 58 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 HEX Ancillary Data Packet Input Status 1 RP165EDH Line 5 2 2016 3 AFD Bar Line 8 3 RP165EDH Line 318 4 S2016 3 AFD Bar Line 321 5 0 Line 6 Line a Line 8 Line CONV1 Ancillary Output Status 1 CEA 608 CC Absent Line 2 BT 1119 2WSS Present Line 23 3 RP186 VI Present Line 11 324 CONV1 5S2016 3 Output Status Status Present AFD 1111 BNR AR 4 3 Letterbox 16 9 image with alternative 4 3 center Data 78 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 HEX CONV1 VI Output Status Status Present AFD 1111 BNR Scan 625 50 4x3 16 9 with shoot and protecte 4 3 center Data1 7A HEX Data2 02 HEX Data3 02 HEX CONV1 WSS Output Status Status Present AFD 1011 BNR box 16 9 centre Bit 13 0 00 0B HEX CONV1 Ancillary Data Packet Output Status 2016 3 AFD
203. ations By purchasing FA 9520 Frame Synchronizer you have entered the world of FOR A and its many innovative products Thank you for your patronage and we hope you will turn to FOR A products again and again to satisfy your video and audio needs FOR A provides a wide range of products from basic support units to complex system controllers which have been increasingly joined by products for computer video based systems Whatever your needs talk to your FOR A representative We will do our best to be of continuing service to you 1 2 Features The FA 9520 is a multipurpose signal processor loaded with all the functions you need for video production 3G SDI HD SD SDI and analog composite I O is supported in addition to its functionality as a frame synchronizer The unit provides dual up down cross aspect converters color corrector and automatic video optimizer AVO as standard features allowing for the conversion of many types of video and audio signals Numerous additional optional features include analog component I O logo generator Dolby E encoder and Dolby E decoder By combining these varied options a single unit can provide optimal functionality for all your video production scene requirements including transmission live production news reporting video production editing and distribution As long as you have the FA 9520 you will never need another piece of peripheral video equipment Standard Features 3G SDI HD SDI SD SDI Ana
204. ble a952SDIIn2 Out3Bypass NTEGER BY PASS Composite isable nable o alo alo a Fa952Compositeln Out1Bypass NTEGER TEST SIGNAL FS1 VIDEO TEST SIGNAL OFF Full CB 75 CB SMPTE CB RAMP PONR ASAP ISO a952FS1VideoTestSignal INTEGER O O FS2 VIDEO TEST SIGNAL g Oo a952FS2VideoTestSignal INTEGER FS1 AUDIO TEST SIGNAL Off 1KHz Tone a952FS1AudioTestSignal INTEGER FS1 AUDIO TEST SIGNAL Off 1KHz Tone a952FS1AudioTestSignal INTEGER EXT AUDIO TEST SIGNAL Off 1KHz 0 2 9 O Tone a952ExtAudioTestSignal of NI A opojojo opojojo INTEGER OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 2 175 1 307 5 1 Unit alarm UNIT UNIT ALARM FAN1 Normal Stopped a952Fan1Status INTEGER FAN2 Normal Stopped a952Fan2Status INTEGER Power1 Normal Ab normal a952Power1Status 11 INTEGER Power2 Normal Ab normal 0 20 0 03 a952Power2Status 12 opojojo INTEGER OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 5 2 Input Output Video signal forma VIDEO STATUS VIDEO STATUS IVIDEO IN STATUS IVIDEO IN STATUS SDI 1 IN el el Loss 525 60i 625 50i 1080 58i 1080 50i 1080 24PsF 1080 23 98PsF 1080 59p 1080 50p 720 59p 720 50p Unknown BY PASS DISABLE 32 none 33 cannotdetection o N 2 05000 OVONOOAIAN WANN
205. blinking indicating the FA 9520 is in the setting change confirming state because a parameter in one of the menus requiring a setting change confirmation has been changed Consecutive display mode will be canceled when a setting is changed Order of Consecutive Menu Display VIDEO Menus Lit green The single down arrow button consecutively displays menu pages from VIDEO PROC AMP of PROCESS to ANC OUT1 of STATUS in the menu list in section 4 2 2 On the other hand the single up arrow button consecutively displays menu pages from ANC OUT1 of STATUS to VIDEO PROC AMP of PROCESS in the menu list 32 AUDIO Menus Lit orange The single down arrow button consecutively displays menu pages from EMB1 IN GAIN of SDI AUDIO to SOFT OPTION2 of OTHER in the menu list in section 4 2 2 On the other hand the single up arrow button consecutively displays menu pages from SOFT OPTION2 of OTHER to EMB1 IN GAIN of SDI AUDIO in the menu list The EVENT button assigned menus cannot be consecutively viewed The consecutive display mode is not suppported for EVENT menus While the menu display is in consecutive display mode pressing the EVENT button cancels the mode 4 2 5 Page Jump Feature Some menu buttons allow you to directly go to specific menus when they are held down for at least 1 second This feature helps you quickly check the state of specific settings VIDEO Button Destination Reference Button
206. by DEC OUT Uses the metadata of the Dolby E signal input to the Dolby decoder The program configuration and bit depth selected in the 6 10 1 7 Dolby ENCODER SETTING will be ineffective 131 6 10 2 Automatic Loudness Adjustment FA 95ALA Automatic Loudness Adjustment is the function that measures and automatically adjusts the input audio signal loudness level to the target level The FA 95ALA in one option slot can measure and adjust the loudnes level of 2 signals monaural stereo or 5 1 ch selectable simultaneously The following menus allow you to set the loudness measurement and adjustment parameters See section 6 5 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING for details on the output assignments of the adjusted signals to SDI AES or analog audio output Available only if the FA 95ALA option is installed 6 10 2 1 LOUDNESS MEASUREMENT When installed in option slot A Channel 1 Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Menu names and menu pages for the second channel of the FA 95ALA in option slot A and the first and second channels of the FA 95ALA in option slot B change as shown below Channel 2 of the FA 95ALA in option slot A LOUD MEASURE 2A 221 Channel 1 of the FA 95ALA in option slot A LOUD MEASURE 1B 261 Chabnnel 2 of the FA 95ALA in option slot B LOUD MEASURE 2B 271 Parameter Default Setting range Description Displays the measured loudness level of the FA 95ALA input audio signal i
207. ce RGB White Clip didi 0 596 threshold Black Clip 200 0 200 50 Sets the lower RGB color space RGB Black Clip POEM 0 596 threshold Selectable when Clip Mode is set to RGB 173 9 2 10 Output Assign Clicking block 11 on the video block diagram opens the Video Output Setting dialog box Video Output Setting al 6 E 4 192 168 0 10 Output Assign SDI 1 2 9 FS1 Loss gt gt SDI 3 4 O FS1 Loss gt gt Composite FS1 Loss gt gt AIO Slot A 9 FS1 Loss gt gt Mode AIO Slot B FS1 Loss gt gt Mode eo Internet O Fs2 525 60 O FS2 525 60 O Fs2 525 60 O Fs2 525 60 YPbPr SMPTE v O Fs2 525 60 b ay Rio Output Assign Allows you to assign video signals to output from video output connectors Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects FS1 or FS2 of which signal to be SDM 2 FS1 FS1 output from SDI1 and 2 connectors I O FS2 formats of the selected FS are displayed under the radio buttons Selects FS1 or FS2 of which signal to be SDI3 4 FS2 FS1 output from SDI3 and 4 connectors I O FS2 formats of the selected FS are displayed under the radio buttons Selects FS1 or FS2 of which signal to be FS1 output from Composite connectors I O Composite FS1 FS2 formats of the selected FS are displayed under the radio buttons Outputs a black signal for HD output signals Selects the signal to b
208. ch ancillary data is inserted A line can be selected for different ANC and FORMAT selections separately If ANC is set to RP186 VI lines can be selected for fields 1 and 2 respectively This parameter allows you to select a line for Field 1 Field 2 If ANC is set to RP186 VI lines can be selected for fields 1 and 2 respectively This parameter allows you to select a line for Field 2 Shown only if ANC is set to RP186 VI The setting range varies according to the ancillary data type and video format Ancillary data type FORMAT LINE Default ANC CEA 608 CC 525 60 21 284 Line HIZE 1 ANC S334 1 CC SD 525 60 12 275 to 19 282 Line 1 12 275 Line 1 ANC CEA708 CC HD 1080i 9 to 20 Hine 9 ENS 720p 9 to 25 Line 9 Line 525 60 12 275 to 19 282 Line 1 12 275 Line 1 625 50 8 321 to 22 335 Line 1 8 321 Line 1 ANC S2016 3 AFD 1080i PsF 9 to 20 Line 9 Line 720p 9 to 25 Line 9 Line 1080p 3G 9 to 41 Line 9 Line 525 60 Field 1 12 to 19 Fils 14 EIE ANC RP186 VI Field 2 275 to 282 Line 277 Line 625 50 Field 1 8 to 22 Line 11 Line Field 2 321 to 335 Line 324 Line ANC BT1119 WSS 625 50 Field 1 8 to 23 Line 23 Line 1 Field2 line number displayed in parentheses 211 If CEA608 or S334 1 CC closed caption data is detected in the input signal and the FS1 and or FS2 converter output signal format s is are 1080 59i or 720 59p the
209. cked up and 0 5 cause the results to become unstable If the value is too small it increases contrast but it may cause the images to be overexposed The minimum value of luminance in the sample data is defined as 0 Based on this reference value this 1 0 determines the lowest level of luminance for level control IN BLACK 20 0 If the value is too small some noise may be picked up and 0 5 cause the results to become unstable If the value is too large it increases contrast but it may cause the images to be underexposed 50 The figures below are luminance histograms of input X axis Luminance level Y axis Number of pixels Minimum value of inputs 0 Maximum value of inputs 100 IN BLACK IN WHITE IN BLACK IN WHITE IN BLACK IN WHITE Wide correction range setting Narrow correction range setting TARGET WHITE and TARGET BLACK These two parameters determine the highest and lowest levels of luminance for target images outputs See figures below and in the next page Setting Parameter range Description step Determines the maximum value of luminance for outputs The maximum luminance value of the image after 60 0 correction should approximate this value TARGET WHITE 100 0 The larger the value the brighter the image which may 0 5 however cause the image to be overexposed The smaller the value tones of the bright part are kept However the overall obt
210. d Data are displayed in hexadecimal format 18 D X C O3 m gt P F 0 1 1 ee See section 20 6 AFD Code Abbreviations for details on AFD types 5 10 26 WSS OUT When no BT1119 2 WSS is in the FS1 FS2 output video signals Menu button BT1119 WSS ABSENT STATUS OTHER FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK If ANC MODE in 5 9 6 ANC SET is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting PASS or BLANK is displayed When BT1119 2 WSS is in the FS1 FS2 output video signals Menu button 1119 TT STATUS X 16 9 TOP Te 9024 OTHER FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Displays the status of BT1119 2 WSS AFD Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format SS Scanning System is displayed in hexadecimal format The detected AFD type is shown on the third row D1 D3 Detected Data are displayed in hexadecimal format ee See section 20 6 AFD Code Abbreviations for details on AFD types 96 5 10 27 ANC OUT1 Menu button 334 1 CEA608 L 11 STATUS OTHER FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK L indicates the line number into which ancillary data is inserted Displays the ancillary data packet name and line number for the inserted ancillary data in the FS1 FS2 output signals The status of up to 4 ancillary data can be displayed See section 19 FA 9520 Ancillary Data Packet Name List for details on ancillary data names 97 6 AUDIO Settings Make the menu buttons light up orange using the VIDEO AUDIO b
211. d frame Image with a 16 9 aspect ratio as a letterbox on top of a 4 3 BOX 16 9 TOP 4 3 L 16 9 T coded frame Image with a 14 9 aspect ratio as a letterbox on top of a 4 3 BOX 14 9 TOP 4 3L 14 9 T coded frame Image with an aspect ratio greater than 16 9 as a vertically centered letterbox in BOX 16 9 CTR 4 3 L gt 16 9 a 4 3 coded tramo MEE Image is full frame with an aspect ratio the same as that F 4 3 4 3 F 4 3 of the 4 3 coded frame AS M Image with a 16 9 aspect ratio as a vertically centered letterbox in a 4 3 coded BOX 16 9 CTR 4 3L16 9PRTD frame Image with a 14 9 aspect ratio as a vertically centered letterbox in a 4 3 coded BOX 14 9 CTR 4 3 L 14 9 frame Image with a 4 3 aspect ratio and with an alternative 14 9 F14 9CTRPRTD 4 3 F ALT14 9 SPIRI ako goded tame esis Image with a 16 9 aspect ratio and alternative 14 9 center as None 4 3 L ALT 14 9 a vertically centered letterbox 1 in a 4 3 coded frame Image with a 16 9 aspect ratio and alternative 4 3 center as None 4 3 L ALT 4 3 a vertically centered letterbox in a 4 3 coded frame 265 AFD 16 9 code WSS name None F 16 9 AMRPH None None None None None None FA 9520 specified name VI 82016 16 9 L gt 16 9 16 9 F 16 9 16 9 P 4 3 16 9 F PRTD 16 9 P 14 9 16 9PALT 14 9 16 9FALT 14 9 16 9 F ALT4 3 Illustration in a 16 9 coded frame 266 Description Image with an a
212. data S2020AudPr11 12 45 07 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata S2020AudPr13 14 45 08 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata S2020 AudP15 16 45 09 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata RP215 Film Xfer 51 01 RP215 Film Codes in VANC space ARIB TRB 18 5F CF Color information packets standarized in ARIB TR B18 Color Frame Information for Component Interface of 525 60 Television System ARIB B 37 1D0 Closed caption data packets for expansion standarized in ARIB STD B37 Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets 2DB ARIB B 37 Mob 5F DC Caption format used in digital television broadcasting for mobile receivers standarized in ARIB STD B37 Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets ARIB B 37 Ana 5F DD Analog signal closed caption data packets standarized in ARIB STD B37 Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets ARIB B 37 SD 5F DE SD signal closed caption data packets standarized in ARIB STD B37 Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets ARIB B 37 HD 5F DF HD signal closed caption data packets standarized in ARIB STD B37 Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets ARIB TR B 22 5F EO HD ancillary data packet for transmission standarized in ARIB TR B22 Operational Guidelines for Transport of the Ancillary Data for HDTV Contribution ARIB
213. ded1OutAssignCh14 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh15 INTEGER Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh16 INTEGER AAIAAGqqgqaszs 8 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 3 1 2 fa952AudioEmb2Assign Audio Asdio SDI Audio Emb2 Assign 0 emb1Ch1 1 emb1Ch2 2 emb1Ch3 3 emb1Ch4 4 emb1Ch5 5 emb1Ch6 6 emb1Ch7 7 emb1Ch8 8 emb1Ch9 9 emb1Ch10 10 emb1Ch11 11 emb1Ch12 12 emb1Ch13 13 emb1Ch14 14 emb1Ch15 15 emb1Ch16 16 emb2Ch1 17 emb2Ch2 18 emb2Ch3 19 emb2Ch4 20 emb2Ch5 21 emb2Ch6 22 emb2Ch7 23 emb2Ch8 24 emb2Ch9 25 emb2Ch10 26 emb2Ch11 27 emb2Ch12 28 emb2Ch13 29 emb2Ch14 30 emb2Ch15 31 emb2Ch16 32 aesCh1 33 aesCh2 34 aesCh3 35 aesCh4 36 aesCh5 37 aesCh6 38 aesCh7 39 aesCh8 40 analogCh1 41 analogCh2 42 analogCh3 43 analogCh4 44 downMix1 L 45 downMix1 R 46 downMix2 L 47 downMix2 R 48 tone500Hz 49 tone1kHz 50 silence 51 dolbyDecodeOpACh1 52 d 53 d 54 d 55 d 56 d 57 d 58 d 59 d ol ol ol ol ol ol ol olbyDownMixOpA L 160 dolbyDownMixOpA R 61 dolbyEncodeOpACh1 62 dolbyEncodeOpBCh2 163 dolbyDecodeOpBCh1 64 do 65 do 66 do 67 dol 68 dol 69 dol 70 do 71 do o o byDownMixOpB L 72 dolbyDownMixOpB R 73 dolbyEncodeOpBCh1 74 dolbyEncodeOpBCh2 75 Loudness1 OpA L 76 Loudness1 OpA R 77 Loudness1 OpA C 78 Loudness1 OpA LFE 79 Loudness1 OpA LS 80 Loudness1 OpA RS 81 Loudness2 OpA L 82 Loudness2
214. detected closed caption data will be automatically converted to CEA708 However if CEA708 closed caption insertion is disabled the data will not be inserted If FS1 and or FS2 converter output format s is are 1080 PsF or 1080 59p the CEA708 closed caption data insertion will be automatically terminated er Meanwhile if CEA708 closed caption data is detected in the 1080 59i or 720 59p HD SDI input signal and the FS1 and or FS2 converter output signal format s is are 525 60 the detected closed caption data will be automatically converted to S334 1 CC and or CEA608 CC However if S334 1 CC and or CEA608 closed caption insertions are disabled the data will not be inserted If the input signal is 1080 59p or 1080 PsF detection and automatic conversion to S334 1 CC and or CEA608 CC will not be performed IMPORTANT Closed caption data output to SD SDI ancillary data will stop when data input is lost If closed caption data input is lost the ancillary data output will be conducted according to the ANC LOSS SET settings See section 5 9 7 ANC LOSS SET for details Ancillary data combinations that cannot be simultaneously embedded to the same line ideo Ancillary data type S334 1CC S2016 3AFD RP186VI BT1119WSS Can be set to Unable to set 2016 3 CC same line to same line Can be set to Unable to set to 925 60 S2016 3 AFD same line same line Unable to set Unable to set RETSONI to sam
215. dio signals CH1 through CH16 embedded to the FS2 video signal LOSS LOSS No audio signals PCM PCM Normal audio signal SDI input SILENCE SILENCE Mute signal SDI input CH1 CH16 NON PCM NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 PCM Async PCM Async Normal audio signal Asynchronous SDI SILENCE Async NON PCM Async UNKNOWN input SILENCE Async Mute signal Asynchronous SDI input NON PCM Async Compressed audio data such as AC3 Asynchronous SDI input UNKNOWN Unidentifiable Co 8 5 10 12 AES IN AUDIO AES IN AUDIO 559 Menu button CH 1 LOSS CH 2 L0OSS STATUS C Hs 3 25 0 SS CH d 9ss SIHENS AES IN AUDIO 560 CH 5 OS S CH 6 L08585 G Hr dps CH 8 L0858 Parameter Display Description Displays the status of the audio signal input to the LOSS DIGITAL AUDIO IO connectors PCM 48kHz LOSS No audio signals PCM 44 1kHz PCM 48kHz Normal audio signal approx 48kHz PCM 32kHz PCM 44 1kHz Normal audio signal approx 44 1kHz PCM Other PCM 32kHz Normal audio signal approx 32kHz CH1 CH8 SILENCE 48kHz PCM Other Normal audio signal Non AES input SILENCE 44 1kHz SILENCE 48kHz Mute signal approx 48kHz SILENCE 32kHz SILENCE 44 1kHz Mute signal approx 44 1kHz SILENCE Other SILENCE 32kHz Mute signal approx 32kHz NON PCM SILENCE Other Mute signal Non AES input OUTPUT SETTING NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 OUTPUT SETTING Connector
216. dolbyDecodeOpBCh8 71 dolbyDownMixOpB L 72 dolbyDownMixOpB R ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo 73 dolbyEncodeOpBCh1 74 dolbyEncodeOpBCh2 75 Loudness1 OpA L 76 Loudness1 OpA R 77 Loudness1 OpA C 78 Loudness1 OpA LFE 79 Loudness1 OpA LS 80 Loudness1 OpA RS 81 Loudness2 OpA L 82 Loudness2 OpA R 83 Loudness2 OpA C 84 Loudness2 OpA LFE 85 Loudness2 OpA LS 86 Loudness2 OpA RS 87 Loudness1 OpA L 88 Loudness1 OpA R 89 Loudness1 OpA C 90 Loudness1 OpA LFE 91 Loudness1 OpA LS 92 Loudness1 OpA RS 93 Loudness2 OpA L 94 Loudness2 OpA R 95 Loudness2 OpA C 96 Loudness2 OpA LFE 97 Loudness2 OpA LS 98 Loudness2 OpA RS INTEGER O Ditto a952AudioAnalogOutAssignCh2 NTEGER Ditto a952AudioAnalogOutAssignCh3 NTEGER Ditto a952AudioAnalogOutAssignCh4 AJOJN NTEGER OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 3 4_ fa952AudioMaster Audio Audio Master Audio Master Mute FF N a952AudioMasterMute NTEGER Emb1 Master Mute FF N a952AudioEmbedded1MasterMute NTEGER Emb2 Master Mute FF N zoj o 5 a952AudioEmbedded2MasterMute NTEGER olojo OJOO oO oj OF 1900 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 2 175 1 307 3 10 1 fa952LoudnessOpA Audio Loudness OpA Loudness1 OpA Control FF N a952Loudness1 OpAControl
217. e on a PC to register logos to the FA 9520 via Ethernet See the FA 95LG GUI Operation Manual downloaded with the software for details on logo management The from The VIDEO OP AUDIO OP VIDEO OP AUDIO OP button LED flashes red while storing logo data to the FA 9520 the FA 95LG GUI Once the data is stored it will be transmitted to the video memory button LED flashes green during this transmission Do not turn the power of the unit off while the button is flashing in order not to obstruct the data storage process IMPORTANT The FA 9520 front panel button control operation and web browser will be slowed down while storing logo data using FA 95LG GUI Complete necessary settings before storing logo data 5 8 1 1 LOGO SELECT Allows you to select a logo function mode for FS1 and FS2 11 Menu button LOGO ID NAME FOR A VIDEO OP LOGO FORMAT HD 1080 AUDIO OP ees SAEPE FS FORMAT 1080 591 Parameter Default Setting Description range LOGO ID 4 1 256 Was a logo to be output to FS1 or FS2 output Displays the registered name of the ID selected logo NAME NAS Displays if the logo is not registered L Displays the format of the ID selected logo POETA Logo formats SD 525 SD 625 HD 1080 HD 720 Displays if the logo is not registered FS FORMAT Displays the video format of the FS1 or FS2 output signal 1 NAME and LOG
218. e Description n Normal Sets the polarity for each channel den 4 Normal Invert Invert Reverses the polarity l 185 9 3 7 Audio Mapping Clicking block 8 on the audio block diagram opens the Audio Mapping dialog box See section 6 5 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING for details 7 Audio Mappine Mozillo Firefox 102168010 Mtm maoprelos SDI 12 Om Mapping SDI 34 Out Mapping AES Out Mapping CH 1 SDI 1 CHT CH 1 SOI 2 CH 1 CH 1 AES CH 1 CH2 SDI 1 CH2 CH 2 SD2 CH2 CH 2 AES CH2 CH 3 SDI1 CH3 CH 3 SD 2 CH 3 CH 3 AES CHI SDI 1 CH4 CH 4 SOI 2 CH 4 AES CH4 SDI 1 CH5 CHS S02 CHS CH 5 AES CHS CH 6 SDI 1 CH6 SD 2 CHG CH 6 AES CHE CH 7 SDI1 CH SOI 2 CH7 CH i AES CH x a la mul ll a a X CH8 SDI 1 CHE CH8 S02 CHB CH8 AES CHB CH 3 SDI 1 CH9 Analog Out Mapping CH 10 SDI 1 CH 10 J soi CHi Analog CH 1 CH nt SDI 1 CH 11 SOI2C CH 2 Analog CH 2 v CH 12 SDI 1 CH 12 SD 2 CH3 Analog CH 3 v ons S011 CH 13 S02 CH 4 Analog CH 4 CH Mu SDI 1 CH 14 CH 15 SDI 1 CH 15 H 16 SDI 1 CH 16 Close Refresh After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings SDI1 2 3 4 Out Mapping Parameter Default Setting range Description SDI 1 CH1 16 SDI 2 CH1 16 AES CH1 8 ANALOG CH1 4 DOWN MIX1 L DOWN MIX1 R DOWN MIX2 L DOWN MIX2 R 500Hz TONE 1KHz TONE SILENCE Dolby Decoder A CH1 8 7 Selects an audio signal to CH1 1
219. e Group 2 Reference CH 3 4 O Disable Enable Group 2 Reference CH 5 6 O Disable Enable Group 3 Reference CH 5 6 Disable Enable Group 3 Reference CH 7 8 Disable Enable Group4 Reference CH 7 8 O Disable Enable Group4 Reference CH 9 10 9 Disable Enable CH 9 10 9 Disable Enable CH 11 12 Disable Enable CH 11 12 Disable Enable CH 13 4 Disable Enable CH 13 4 9 Disable Enable CH 15 16 Disable Enable CH 15 6 Disable Enable After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings SDI1 2 3 4 Audio Mono Sum Parameter Default Setting range Description Disable Enable Outputs the stereo pair CH1 2 CH15 16 Disable Enable channels de a mano sun SDI 1 2 3 4 Output Clock Select Parameter Default Setting range Description Auto Selects an audio clock per group for SDI Reference embedded audio output ore Reterenee CH 1 2 Auto Automatically selects audio clock input in CH 3 4 the NON PCM signal channel if an input Auto NON PCM signal is in the selected SDI Ref embedded audio group Automatically selects Group 2 Reference eterence audio clock signal in the smallest numbered CH 5 6 channel if all signals in the audio group are CH 7 8 NON PCM Automatically selects audio clock Auto signal synchronized to the output video Signal if Reference all signals in the audio g
220. e area i MM Sample area FULL SCREEN LETTER BOX PILLAR BOX CENTER area area area area TOP LEFT TOP RIGHT BOTTOM LEFT BOTTOM RIGHT 5 4 2 AVO SETUP 19 Menu button RESPONSE S ULRES Bek 3 SCENE CUT OFF AVO Parameter Default Setting range Description Sets the filtering strength for calculating the mean distances that are applied to histograms created using the sample RESPONSE LEVEL data Filtering LEVEL 3 1 5 The larger the value the more gradually strength filtering is performed with a more stable image but slower response The smaller the value the less stable the image but with a faster response SCENE CUT When set to ON the cut transitions are Scene cut OFF OFF detected and images are properly f ON adjusted even if there are sharp detection luminance changes When set to ON signal levels are epe MODE ON OFF adjusted using the GAMMA LEVEL Gamma ON settings See section 5 2 3 GAMMA correction LEVEL 1 The follwoing delay will be produced when performing scene cut detection depending on the input signal format Interlaced formats 2 fields 1 frame some lines Progressive and PsF formats 2 frames some lines Scene cut detection images will be properly adjusted and output when enough frame delay is set If the amount of frame delay is insufficient Scene cut detection will not be properly processed To perform AVO scene cut detection properly set enough delay
221. e embedded audio signal from the input SDI video signal then embeds the processed audio data on the video signal Whether to embed is determined by the AUDIO GROUP setting in section 5 10 10 EMB 1 IN AUDIO The input SDI data will be embedded on the video signal after audio signals are embedded IN DATA Passes the input SDI horizontal ancillary data without processing Processed audio data cannot be embedded BLANK Deletes all horizontal ancillary data and embeds the processed audio data V ANC PASS PASS BLANK Embeds audio signals into vertical ancillary data of FS1 or FS2 output videos PASS Embeds the vertical ancillary data without processing BLANK Deletes all vertical ancillary data 74 Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively HANC and V ANC settings become available when ANC MODE is set to H V ANC H ANC and V ANC settings are effective if input and output formats are the same If such formats are different both H ANC and V ANC will be set to BLANK 5 9 7 ANC LOSS SET Allows you to select an operation mode when input AFD data is lost or unsupported AFD code is input 6 7 Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Parameter Default Setting range Description 2016 3 920103 AED Selects an ancillary data type to insert oe AFD ee into the SDI signal BT1119 WSS gnal Selects a video format compatible with SD the ancillary data
222. e line to same line edidi P sanewe sameline gt 625 50 RP186 VI oe Lai can D set to E cone eme If the same line is set for the ancillary data combination described as Unable to set to same line and both ancillary data types are set to be embedded under ANC Data Embed an error message Identical ANC line location settings will appear If the sign is displayed ancillary data will not be properly embedded The line settings must be properly set Usually the default value will properly embed the ancillary data Keep this in mind when changing the value to configure a system with other devices 212 FS1 FS2 ANC Loss Mode Settings Allows you to select an operation mode when input signal ancillary data is lost Parameter Default Setting range Description 2016 3 AFD c Selects an ancillary data type to insert ANG Sao AED Bo ES into the SDI signal Selects a video format compatible with Format SD SD the ancillary data selected under ANC HD 1 Only compatible Video formats will be displayed If Format is set to SD Remove 2 Hold 2 4 3 L 16 9 T 2 4 3 L14 9 T 2 Mode can be set for respective ANC ye Ve ES and Format selections 32 Remove Does not embed the ancillary pU UD 2 data to either FS1 or 2 4 3 F ALT14 9 2 Hold Retains the last ancillary data _ 4 3 L ALT14 9 aspect ratio and outputs video signal in 4 3 LALT 4 3 the aspect ratio 16 9 L gt 16 9 Other values operate accordin
223. e of the menus requiring a setting change confirmation is changed To confirm the change press the single down arrow button Pressing the single up arrow button cancels the change and the parameter before change will be displayed While single arrow buttons are blinking all buttons except single arrow buttons are disabled until either single arrow button is pressed Menus that request a setting confirmation are shown with a black circle e in the menu list in section 4 2 2 Menu Buttons IMPORTANT NORMAL and LIVE SAFE modes can be switched in the FRONT OPERATION menu see section 7 4 4 2 4 Consecutive Viewing of Settings lt NORMAL mode gt While a menu button is turned on the menu display will be in consecutive display mode when both single up and down arrow buttons are pressed simultaneously Both single arrow buttons blink when they are in consecutive display mode To exit the mode simultaneously press both arrow buttons again Then arrow buttons will stop blinking The single down and up arrow buttons while in consecutive display mode can consecutively display all menus in which menu list settings can be changed from the first to last or last to first menu item Meanwhile holding down the single down or up arrow button also allows you to consecutively view menus lt LIVE SAFE mode gt Button functions are the same as NORMAL mode however consecutive display mode is inoperative while single arrow buttons are
224. e on composite signal inputs 1 Selecting ODD EVEN for Forced Field while FS Input Select 9 2 1 is set to Composite Synchro Mode to Frame Sync and Frame Delay 9 2 3 to 0 frame the Frame Delay setting value will always reset to 1 frame Set Frame Delay to between 1 and 8 frames 2 Frame Delay 9 2 3 cannot be set if Synchro Mode is set to Line Sync or AVDL 3 Forced Field cannot be set if Synchro Mode is set to Line Sync or AVDL 4 The Freeze function via GPI input is disabled if Synchro Mode is set to Line Sync or AVDL See section 9 5 GPP for details 5 Changing the Synchro Mode setting will reset 1080 V Phase and 720 V Phase settings in HD Phase menu and the V PHASE setting in SD Phase menu to their default values according to the set Synchro Mode 6 Switching input signals with a phase difference using a router or such device may cause shock noise to occur on video or audio signals if the phase difference compared to the genlock signal exceeds the range shown in the following table If the difference is within range shock noise will not occur 7 This item is disabled if an FA 95CO option is installed and Format Error Trigger in section 9 2 1 FS Input Select is enabled Video format Phase difference from genlock signal SD 1H with line differences depending on video format to 1 2H HD 5H with line differe
225. e output FS1 or FS2 4 FS1 from the FA 95AIO output connector in slot ADA Ded FS2 A I O formats of the selected FS are displayed under the radio buttons YPbPr SMPTE ines YPbPr BETACAM Selects the signal format for the FA 95AIO SMPTE RGB video output in slot A Y C Selects the signal to be output FS1 or FS2 2 FS1 from the FA 95AIO output connector in slot AIO SlotB FS2 FS2 B I O formats of the selected FS are displayed under the radio buttons YPbPr SMPTE Mode 2 YpbPr EDAM Selects the signal format for the FA 95AIO oce SMPTE RGB video output in slot B Y C 1 Shown only if the FA 95AIO is installed in option slot A 2 Shown only if the FA 95AIO is installed in option slot B 174 Composite Output Format Table CONV 1 and 2 output signals Output signal from COMPOSITE connector 525 60 CONV signals in 525 60 625 50 CONV signals in 625 50 1080 59 B B in 525 60 1080 50i B B in 625 50 1080 24PsF B B in 625 50 1080 23 98PsF B B in 525 60 720 59p B B in 525 60 720 50p B B in 625 50 1080 59p B B in 525 60 1080 50p B B in 625 50 YPbPr RGB Output Format FS1 or 2 output signal FA 95AIO YPbPr RGB output signal 525 60 525 60 signal in FS 1 or 2 625 50 625 50 signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 59i 1080 59i signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 50i 1080 50i signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 24PsF 1080 24PsF signal in FS 1 or 2 1080 23 98PsF 1080 23 98PsF signal in FS 1 or 2
226. e that internal switch settings should not be changed from factory defaults If you have accidentally changed the setting refer to the Dipswitch S1 settings below to return to the factory default setting Futher note that adjustments and maintenance should only be performed by qualified technical personnel familiar with FOR A equipment Do not access MU internal cards or make connections with unit power ON Always power OFF the main unit prior to accessing the interior Do not touch other components on the card to avoid damage from static electricity Dipswitch S1 settings Pin No Default Description 1 OFF Do not change 2 OFF Do not change 3 OFF Do not change 4 OFF Do not change 5 OFF Do not change 6 OFF Do not change 7 OFF Do not change 8 OFF Do not change 247 17 System Requirements To use with the FA 9520 your computer must meet the following requirements OS Windows XP operating Windows Vista Windows 7 operating system SP2 or later operating system system Professional 32bit Business 32bit Professional 32bit 64bit Browser Firefox 20 0 Firefox 20 0 Windows Internet Explorer 10 Firefox 20 0 CPU Pentium 4 processor Intel Core 2 Duo Intel Core 2 Duo 2 8GHz or higher processor processor 2GHz or higher 2GHz or higher Memory 512MB or more 2GB or more 2GB or more Display 1280x1024 pixels or more resolution 24 bit full
227. e to audio menus that are indicated on the bottom row of each menu button Pressing a menu button displays the corresponding menu on the menu display Menus are divided into categories The single arrow buttons allow you to move between menus if the selected menu button has multiple menu pages in the category The single arrow button lights up when there are more menus to be accessed in the direction If the single arrow button is unlit the direction is not accessible The double arrow buttons allow you to go to the first menu of the menu button The FS1 LOCK or FS2 LOCK button lights green as well as the selected VIDEO button for menus in which settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 separately If the FS1 LOCK button is pressed and lit green settings for FS1 are enabled Settings for FS2 are enabled in the same manner These menus are described in the menu list in section 4 2 2 Menu Buttons Menu Buttons PROCESS CC CONV1 CONV2 SDI AUDIO AES AUDIO J ANALOG MASTER f AVO f cuP f IN SEL OUTSEL MODE MAPPING J A DELAY J omy L y SN ff S VIDEO OP VIDEO SYS STATUS VIDEO AUDIO OP gt AUDIO SYS OTHER U AUDIO Menu Title Page number POR HD SD FRAME SYNCHRONIZER FA 9520 Parameter Value In the example above the
228. ecoder Output Output signal from the Dolby decoder When Direct Input When Input Selection is set to Direct Selection is selected Input Selection Embedded1 2 CH1 CH16 Embedded1 2 CH1 CH16 OURCE AES CH1 CH8 signal selected in the 6 5 AUDIO Analog CH1 CH4 MAPPING MAPPING menu Down Mix 1 2L 1 2R AES CH1 8 AES input channel 500Hz TONE Analog CH1 4 Analog audio input 1KHz TONE channel Silence Down Mix 1 2L 1 2R Down mixed 1 2 output audio signal 500Hz 1KHz TONE 500Hz 1KHz test signal TONE Left Silence Mute signal Loudness 1A Right Loudness 1 2 A B Left Loudness 2A Center Loudness 1 2 A B Right CH 1 8 a yet Loudness 1B 2 LFE Loudness 1 2 A B Center 3 IL Loudness 1 2 A B LFE Loudness 2B Loudness 1 2 A B Ls Loudness 1 2 A B Rs Loudness processed 1 2 A B output audio signal When Input Selection is set to Dolby When Dolby Decoder Decoder Output Output is selected Dolby Decoder CH 1 8 PCM signal Dolby Decoder CH 1 8 output from the Dolby decoder Dolby Down Mix L DolbyDown Mix L R Down mixed DolbyDown Mix R signal generated from Dolby decoded 500Hz TONE PCM signal 1KHz TONE 500Hz 1KHz TONE 500Hz 1KHz test Silence signal TONE Silence Mute signal 197 1 Direct Input Selection and Dolby Decoder Output settings are retained until changed When the Direct Input Selection or Dolby Decoder Output is changed Ch1 8 signal assignments will be changed to that of the In
229. eene nnne nennen 58 5 0 T ES INPUT SELECT 5000 eds ere Recte e Cep tee Toe e tr Pc e eere dd 58 5 6 2 VIDEO INPUT SET dee a 59 5 6 3 ANC DETECT EINE radi erp A de ete GET ete Perd dn 60 5 6 4 ANC DETECT SE eaa a a a a a eren enne a a aaa daea nennen 60 5 0 5 AIO AIN MODE occ cack aviv nhl oaa EEEO it seta a C E RENEE LER BAL heeeay ened 61 5 6 6 AIQ B IN MODE 3 oreet rectore dei t e E EE ee eA ee 61 ber VIDEO QUT SELECT OUT SEL tette ede te bd 62 57 A OUTPUT ASSIGN Siria 62 5 7 2 AIQ A ASSIGN etcetera A Di P Oed Eten ee 63 SAIO B ASSIGN NA eni ete Ead Qik innate n etaed e A agere 64 9 7 4 ANG DATA EMBE D ri rer Eee t EXC SERE SEE AT EYES RRR ENERO ERES AERE RE YR RAE 65 S O ANC EMBED LEINE iode e ettet ger Eee Metodi tue Oase erra 66 5 8 VIDEO OPTION VIDEQO QP itte eterne rad nente tbe Peste bei Eben des 68 5 8 1 Logo Generator uio eet dee i eerie ate er aec e es 68 5 817 T COGO SELECT ii eto hereditate Maen Tease 68 5 8 1 2 KEYER SET inier tert ete ene euet Se druidite 69 5 8 1 3 Logo Position Setting Range ssssssssssssseeeeeeenen enn 69 5 9 VIDEO SYSTEM VIDEO SY SJ a oa aee eea e e Eaa ea a cnn nana nnns nnne rennes 70 5 9 1 4ES MODE SET retro tcl fe passat tase deest etr Eee etae HO E 70 59 2 AD PHASE SET zd edd teet erg eter ret a pudet a 71 5 9 3 SD PHASE SET dccccccccccccononnononcnnnnonononnannnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnenennnnn ranas anne teneret nnne nein nere retener nnns 7
230. eiert ide dete Pee ades 86 5 10 10 EMB 1 IN AUDIO cerei tte ete ttn e HER e Re n RR EE ERE ERR AERES tae 87 510 11 EMB 2 IN AUDIO coccion 88 5 10 12 AES IN AUDBIQ iot at nee ete euet eee E pd deae tds 89 5 10 13 ANALOG IN AUDIQ tee eet id bere tes 89 5 10 14 SBI 1 2 7OU T AUD IQ 35e ott rat me eec et redet 90 5 10 15 SDI 3 4 OUT AUDIO sss m eene nmmerrr enhn nenne nennen nennen ns 91 52 10 16 AES OUT AUDIO ir Canet pet ee xe ld tev te ee He idad 91 9 10217ANALOG OUT AUD Osio et e edet de p eee eA A 92 5 10 18 Dolby OPA AUX tetti ode A oe tet tee dt vede ederet dieit hls 92 5 10 19 Dolby OPB AUX scada pillar 93 5 110 20 AFD INSSTATUS lt a rp age chs a iin wee ee 94 52 10 21 ANC 1 IN STATU S a A ae eae 94 5 10 22 ANCA1 IN STATUS 1 2 ion eee ete aerea 95 9210223 ANG OUT iieri A AA 95 5 10 24 92016 QUT itte lidia 95 5 10725 WOOD iniret eph etre sert edes de e dd 96 5210 26 WSS ODIT s o eitis e ean Mine tet fene Yr ertt ca ane ER antes 96 5 10 27 ANG OUT A iie iie teet toe Ye du ene HERR ee XE REN See Ve TERR Rasse 97 6 AUDIO Settings 4 Seth wa ee eon indt de oce xy dee eae eae eG E 98 6 1 SDI AUDIO Settings SDI AUDIO ooooccccccinocononcccnnnoconncononnnonononnoncnnnnnnnnnncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnoninnns 98 ERR AD 98 6 1 2 EMBL OUT MONO hiret tieden ena aeaa eaa te bie Le pua be tite tesi EUR bead eite t 98 6 1 3 EMBdAUIN SET E S E eee e d ert ee RE e tet ii 99 06 1 4 EMB1 OUT CLOCK
231. ely and disconnect power cord to avoid potentially hazardous conditions If problems similar to above occur contact authorized service representative before attempting to again operate unit Rack Mount Brackets Ground Terminal and Rubber Feet e Caution To rack mount or ground the unit or to install rubber feet do not use screws or materials other than those supplied Otherwise it may cause damage to the internal circuits or components of the unit If you remove the rubber feet attached on the unit do not reinsert the screws securing the rubber feet AN Caution Consumables The consumables used in unit must be replaced periodically For further details on which parts are consumables and when they should be replaced refer to the specifications at the end of the Operation Manual Since the service life of the consumables varies greatly depending on the environment in which they are used they should be replaced at an early date For details on replacing the consumables contact your dealer Upon Receipt Unpacking FA 9520 units and their accessories are fully inspected and adjusted prior to shipment Operation can be performed immediately upon completing all required connections and operational settings Check your received items against the packing lists below FA 9520 ITEM QTY REMARKS FA 9520 1 AC Cord 1 set Incl
232. en nennen nenne rennen 110 6 5 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING oooccccccocccccononcnccncononcnnconnncnccnnnnnnconnnonc enne nre 111 6 6 1 EMB1 OUT REMAP in tirerai pee ec uec a A nba a de oe e eee aed ue 111 6 5 7 EMB2 OUT REMAR a eec tenete 112 6 5 3 AES OUT REMADP eredi edel regii dde credet pn eade chee De redet Aides 113 6 5 4 ANALOG OUT REMAP sssssssseeee eene nennen ener canon cnc nennen nnne 114 6 6 AUDIO DELAY Settings viii havens vans eene eel e e iu dete Lane to 115 6 6 1 EMB1 IN DELAY eror rt eerte dete eee ee n rus 115 6 6 2 EMB2 IN DELAY civic a te iv decet eee es teda eee ee eei Duo needed e 115 6 6 3 AES IN DELEAY da t bti ri e tried 115 6 6 4 ANALOG IN DELAY sssssesseeeeeemeem eene enne nnnn cn nc n eene nennen 116 6 7 DOWN MIXT SET aaa aeree Mae ted Mig iet sheds A ipe eget i 117 6 7 1 DOWN MIX1 ASSIGN a E nennen nn carr rennen nennen 118 6 8 DOWN MIX2 SE Tico ep tr Huet gl dite nied baie 119 6 8 1 DOWN MIX2Z ASSIGN supiste b optio Eg 120 6 9 AUDIO MOBE SET MOBDBE noue Reader o e d t Ep 121 6 9 1 EMB1 SRC MODE sierran a eene eene nnne nenne nennen at i rennen nennen 121 6 9 2 EMB2 SRC MODE sssseeeeeeeeeem eene merenti en nre nennen rennen nennen 121 6 9 3 AES SRC MODE eere ie t e e Re eR T RI KEEN air 122 6 9 4 EMBT POLARU TY crece tue A ee EXER cae aaae Yee ko eae EYE 122 0 9 5 EMBZ POLARITY ertet prebere Hb Rede ee tx pecie pega 122 6 9 0 AES POLARIS Me
233. eo Level FS1 FS2 100 04 pH By Video Leve Fs2 gt FS1 _1000 HH E Chroma Level FS1 gt FS2 1000 HH Y Chroma Level FS2 FS1 100 0 j Y Setup Black FSi gt FS2 004 j ff Setup Black ojs i FS1 Proc Amp Window FS2 Proc Amp Window After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description Video Level 100 0 0 0 200 0 0 1 Adjusts the video level Chroma Level 100 0 0 0 200 0 0 1 Adjusts the chrominance level Setup Black 0 0 20 0 100 0 0 1 Adjusts the black level Hue 0 0 179 8 180 0 0 2 Adjusts the color phase FS1 lt gt FS2 Copying The FS1 gt FS2 button in the FS1 Proc Amp dialog box next to Video Level allows you to copy the Video Level setting of FS1 to FS2 A confirmation dialog as shown below appears Message from webpage 2 Are you sure you want to Copy Video Level Click OK to copy the FS1 Video Level setting to FS2 Click Cancel to stop copying Chroma Level Setup Black and Hue settings can also be copied to FS2 in the same manner To copy FS2 settings to FS1 click the FS2 gt FS1 button in the FS2 Proc Amp dialog box and proceed in the
234. ernet Explorer may not save data having a long file name properly In such case save data in Internet Explorer using a short file name then rename the file in Windows Explorer A data file can also be saved under its default file name in any version of Internet Explorer Loading the Data Saved in a File In Apply Setting Below select the checkboxes of the items you wish to load the data If no checkbox is selected no settings are loaded See section 9 8 2 NETWORK SETTING for details on the checkboxes in Network Setting See section 9 8 3 SNMP SETTING for details on the checkboxes in SNMP Setting Selecting the Parameter checkbox loads all parameters except for Event Memory Selecting the Event Name checkbox loads the event memory names See Set Event Name in section 9 6 1 Event Control for details After selecting the items to be loaded and clicking Browse the Choose file dialog appears Choose File to Upload Look in 5 Desktop my Documents EG y My Computer My Recent Amy Network Places Documents 8 3 Desktop My Documents My Computer My Network File name fa9520 Places Files of type All Files Specify the destination directory and click Open 219 Click Load A confirmation message appears Message from webpage Jj amp re you sure you want to load this event data Click OK to start transferring the file to the FA 9520 To stop transf
235. erring the file click Cancel IMPORTANT BY PASS On Off and Freeze On Off settings cannot be saved The data saved in FA 9500 mode cannot be loaded Do not attempt to load the data saved in FA 9500 mode IMPORTANT The FA 9520 uses the CSV file format to backup the configuration data which enables commercially available spreadsheet software to edit the data However Unit ID or event names that consist only of numbers may be recognized as numeric values by such software and appear differently after being recalled to the FA 95RU It is recommended that alphabetical values be included in names to enable editing using such software 9 6 3 Downloading a MIB File The MIB file used when the FA 9520 is monitored and operated through the external SNMP manager can be downloaded from the FA 9520 The downloaded file is in zip format and so you will need to unzip the file before its use Download MIB File Click Download under Download MIB File on the Utility page The File Download dialog appears File Download Do you want to open or save this file 8 Name fora fa9520 mib zip Type Compressed zipped Folder 8 05KB From 192 168 0 10 pen Save v Always ask before opening this type of file 5 While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially Q harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or save this file What s the risk Click OK fora fa9520 mib zip will be downloaded
236. etting changes only for the corresponding FS IMPORTANT FS1 and FS2 cannot be changed simultaneously by pressing FS1 LOCK and FS2 LOCK buttons at the same time in the following cases 1 When the Color correction mode for either FS1 or FS2 is set to SEPIA See section 5 2 4 COLOR CORRECT C C for details on Color correction mode 2 When FS1 AVO mode is set to AUTO or HOLD See section 5 4 1 AVO SETTING for details on AVO modes In FS1 FS2 simultaneous setting mode each control knob applies identical adjustment values to both FS1 and FS2 Menus supported for simultaneous setting mode are shown with in the menu list in section 4 2 2 Menu Buttons Example 4 Disabling FS1 FS2 settings or front panel buttons To prevent unexpected operation settings for FS1 or FS2 or front panel buttons can be disabled Button light color Lek i Inhibit f tt ll FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK nhibition o Setting procedure Cancelling procedure Hold down the Hold down the Orange Green FS1 settings FS1 LOCK button gt 3 FS1 LOCK button gt 3 sec sec Hold down the Hold down the Green Orange FS2 settings FS2 LOCK button gt t FS2 LOCK button gt 3 3 sec sec Hold down both Hold down either the Front panel FS1 LOCK and FS1 LOCK or Orange Orange butore FS2 LOCK buttons gt FS2 LOCK button gt 3 8 3 sec for them to light sec for either one to orange lock FS operations e
237. f Used for reference signal input black burst or tri level sync to synchronize the system The bottom connector is z 44 2 GEBEQUISIN for a loop through It must be terminated at 75 ohm when Spe not in use DIGITAL AUDIO Used for digital audio inputs and outputs Select whether 8 IO to use for input or output as in section 6 2 4 AES I O 6 2 4 1 2 7 8 SETUP A 1000 100BASE TX 10BASE T Ethernet LAN port 9 LAN1 Used to connect an external remote control unit or to 3 5 transfer data to an external device RJ 45 A 1000 100BASE TX 10BASE T Ethernet LAN port 10 LAN2 Used to connect an external remote control unit or to transfer data to an external device RJ 45 For future use Used to ground the unit to protect operators against static BEI Ground Terminal electricity and electrical shock No Name Description Ref 12 AC IN 2 Used to connect the unit to an AC power source AC100V 240V 50 60Hz Enabled only when the optional redundant power unit FA 95PS is installed The operation status can be viewed from the DC POWER 2 menu as described in section 5 10 1 UNIT ALARM The menu is displayed if the optional FA 95PS is installed 13 FAN1 Used to air cool the unit to prevent overheating Do not block the ventilation with other equipment or objects The operation status can be viewed from the FAN1 menu as described in section 5 10 1 UNIT ALARM 5 10 1 14 SLOTA OPTION SLOT A
238. firming state Pressing the single down arrow button while blinking confirms the change and the blinking arrow button and control knob lights turn on Pressing the single up arrow button cancels the change the setting returns to the value before it was changed and the blinking arrow button and control knob lights turn on 4 2 8 Switching Between 2 Channel Frame Synchronizers Independent 2 channel frame synchronizers FS1 and FS2 can be switched to one from another using the FS1 LOCK or FS2 LOCK button Menus that allow FS1 and FS2 setting selections are shown with or in the menu list in section 4 2 2 Menu Buttons Either the FS1 LOCK or FS2 LOCK button lights green in a menu that can be set for FS1 and FS2 separately The setting for the frame synchronizer corresponding to the lit button can be changed Pressing both the FS1 LOCK and FS2 LOCK buttons simultaneously for LINK setting menus shown with in the menu list in section 4 2 2 Menu Buttons makes one button turn on and light green and the other blink Changing settings for one frame synchronizer will also change settings for the other Example 1 Setting VIDEO PROCESS AMP for FS1 VIDEO PROC AMP 1 VIDEO LEVEL 100 0 Menu button Lit green Unlit CHROMA LEVEL 100 0 PROCESS 0 oH BLACK um m SDI AUDIO FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK 1 Press the PROCESS SDI AUDIO button to open the VIDEO PROCESS AMP menu Press the FS1 LOCK button for it to light green
239. for an optional expansion card 15 15 SLOT B OPTION SLOT B for an optional expansion card 15 16 ANALOG AUDIO Used for four channel analog audio input and output See section 12 Analog Audio Connection for details 12 17 REMOTE Used for remote control Assign functions to each pin See section 7 6 GPI SETTING for details on assigning functions See section 14 REMOTE for connections 7 6 14 18 FAN2 Used to air cool the unit to prevent overheating Do not block the ventilation with other equipment or objects The operation status can be viewed from the FAN2 menu as described in section 5 10 1 UNIT ALARM 5 10 1 19 AC IN1 Used to connect the unit to an AC power source AC100V 240V 50 60Hz The operation status can be viewed from the DC POWER 1 menu as described in section 5 10 1 UNIT ALARM The menu is displayed if the optional FA 95PS is installed 5 10 1 FA 9520 with the FA 95DACBL option installed 21 SERNO ao No Name Description Ref 20 DIGITAL AUDIO IO 1 2 7 8 Digital audio input and output connectors Used only for inputs when the FA 95DACBL option is installed 6 2 4 21 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT 1 2 7 8 Digital audio output connectors FA
240. g to the 16 9 F 16 9 2 selected AFD as an input AFD 16 9 P 4 3 BT1119 WSS selected under ANC can 16 9 F PRTD only select AFD codes indicated by Mode Remove 16 9 P 14 9 16 9 P ALT 14 9 16 9 F ALT 14 9 16 9 F ALT4 3 If Format is set to HD Remove Mode can be set for respective ANC Hold and Format selections 16 9 L gt 16 9 Remove Does not embed the ancillary 16 9 F 16 9 data to either FS1 or 2 16 9 P 4 3 Hold Retains the last ancillary data 16 9 F PRTD aspect ratio and outputs video signal in 16 9 P 14 9 the aspect ratio 16 9 P ALT14 9 Other values operate according to the 16 9 F ALT14 9 selected AFD as an input AFD 16 9 F ALT4 3 1 HD is selectable only when ANC is set to S2016 3 FS1 FS2 WSS AFD Error Allows you to select the WSS AFD ancillary operation mode when the input signal WSS AFD ancillary data is lost Parameter Default Setting range Description Remove Does not embed BT1119 WSS to Mode Beniove Remove FS1 and or 2 F 4 3 F 4 3 Embeds BT1119 WSS F 4 3 code 8 to FS1 and or 2 IMPORTANT Ancillary data insersion line settings specified under ANC Settings sec 9 4 3 take priority over the line settings specified under the FS1 FS2 SD LINE MASK sec 9 4 1 and will take effect 213 9 4 4 Composite Settings FA 9520 Logout Video Audio system Ge utility status Network gt FS1 Video System FS2 Video System Audio System ANC Settings Co
241. gnal Displays BY PASS if the function is enabled Displays Disable if there is no signal output SDI Out 3 4 Same as above Displays the video format of the SDI2 output signal Displays BY PASS if the function is enabled Displays Disable if there is no signal output Composite Out 525 60 625 50 BY PASS Disable PAL M Displays the video format of the COMPOSITE output signal Displays Disable if there is no signal output Displays PAL M if PAL M Mode Set is enabled in the 9 4 1 FS1 FS2 Video System menu and the format setting for the converted output video signal under Composite Output Setting in the 9 2 10 Output Assign menu is 525 60 223 525 60 625 50 1080 59i ER Displays the video format of the FA 95AIO output signal in Option A 750 505 option slot A 1080 23PsF Displays Disable if there is no signal output 1080 24PsF BY PASS Disable 12 Displays the video format of the FA 95AIO output signal in Option B Ditto option slot B CREDIS S Displays the output signal format of FA 95AIO installed in option slots A and B Suput Mode LM See section 9 2 10 Output Assign for details on output YIC signal format settings 1 Shown if the FA 95AIO option is installed in option slot A 2 Shown if the FA 95AIO option is installed in option slot B Unit Status Item Display Description Unit Name FA 9520 D
242. gs AUDIO SYS ssssssssssssseeeeene emen 137 6 11 1 FADE IN OUT niii EH p ecce path heheh noria cre ev eode 137 6 11 2 DIGITAL AUDIO ite tepd a 138 011 3 AUDIO ERR SENSE dein a Mantis 138 6 11 4 DIGITAL SILENCE ourense dao BEER ER RR CR Raga 140 Other Settings amp Information OTHER sssssssssssseeeeeeene eene nennt 141 1 1 EST ES2 COPY iode ricas 141 52 MU OPERATION caco Ai Freie se igo es 142 7 2 1 Important Note on Changing the Operation Mode cocooocnccoccccccccccncconanccnconococcnnnnnos 142 7 2 2 FA 9520 Operation Mode Change Procedure sssssssssseeeee 142 539 CONTROL SETTING iiiter AAA Ree i ences 143 7 4 FRONT OPERATION rne pue ar cdta 143 17 5 FRONT PANEL SET ere te Leni i ee T dette REED weet daddies Enea RD ERE aan fece bead 143 E mcub izmul erm Ep 144 flo NETWORK INFO tovt eite e eee tien eB Ane Aa Gites 147 FEMINIS 147 19 OPTION A Ver A Iun d De n Dade een eae 148 1 10 OPTION dm ELE 148 LAT OTHER OPTION icit Mirena te Ei Ces eere deo deett ee te ue es Ae 149 T12 SOF T OPTIONT denter eet dete Irene e HD puede drea 149 7 13 SOFT OPTION 5 hi ettet ette ld 149 Event Memiory in tei e et Eo be ete eit 150 98 1 EVENT LOAD aeia tetto thiet eie ettet efe emt ere eae ftatu lord 150 8 2 EVENT SAVE enr es a iaa 151 8 3 EVENT SETUP eni e pee Lebe t eet ec re lumens iere dae dace be aL renta dar eeeatey 151 8 4 Parameters That Are Not S
243. h the unit operates functions almost the same as the former FA 9500 and FA 9520 mode with 2 independently operational frame synchronizers After purchase select an FA 9520 operational mode for the first time Refer to section 7 1 MU OPERATION for details on the mode selection procedure This operation manual describes the operation in FA 9520 mode When operating in FA 9500 mode refer to the separate FA 9520 operation manual FA 9500 mode Check Check to ensure no damage has occurred during shipment If damage has occurred or items are missing inform your supplier immediately Trademark Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Pentium and Intel Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U S and or other countries Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories All other trademarks are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Rack Mounting FA 9520 RPS can be mounted to EIA standard rack units When rack mounting a unit remove the rubber feet and use the accessory rack mount brackets rack ears Installing the AC Cord Retaining Clip Secure the AC cord with the supplied ladder strap retaining clip assembly to prevent accidental removal from the FA 9520 Installing the clip 1 Wrap the retaining clip around the AC cord with the anch
244. hannel will be displayed with an as AES CH1 and no audio signal will be output To change AES I O settings see section 6 2 4 AES I O SETUP for details 2 Not shown if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is not installed in option slot A 3 Not shown if the FA 95DE E option is not installed in option slot A 4 Not shown if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is not installed in option slot B 5 Not shown if the FA 95DE E option is not installed in option slot B 6 Not shown if the FA 95ALA option is not installed in option slot A 7 Not shown if the FA 95ALA option is not installed in option slot B Auto Channel Pairing for NON PCM Audio Inputs The FA 9520 recognizes NON PCM audio input signals in L R channel pair units and adjusts assignments according to the signal selected for the L channel L R channel pairs are such as CH1 and CH2 CH3 and CH4 CH15 abd CH16 as an example in EMB1 The channel assignments that are changed by the adjustment will be shown with as CH1 x EMB1 CH1 113 6 5 4 ANALOG OUT REMAP Menu button CONV1 ANALOG Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an audio output CH SEL CH1 CH1 8 channel to output analog audio signal from CH1 through 8 ANALOG OUT EMB1 CH1 16 EMB2 CH1 16 AES CH1 8 ANALOG CH1 4 DOWN MIX1 L DOWN MIX1 R DOWN MIX2 L DOWN MIX2 R 500Hz TONE pug Selects a signal to be output from the analog audio ou
245. hat POLARITY NORMAL NORMAL is selected under CH SEL INVERT Reverses polarity 124 6 10 AUDIO OPTION AUDIO OP 6 10 1 FA 95D D FA 95DE E 6 10 1 1 Dolby AUX OUT This menu is displayed only if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is installed in slot A Menu button VIDEO OP y OUTPUT DEC CH1 2 AUDIO OP Menu names and menu pages for the option in slot B change as shown below Dol by AUX OUT B 231 Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an audio signal to be output from the optional Dolby output connector Dolby OUT DEC CH1 2 CH7 8 DEC CH1 2 CH7 8 Dolby decoded DolbyDM L R PCM signals ENC CH1 2 DolbyDM L R Down mixed signals OUTPUT DEC CH1 2 500Hz TONE generated from Dolby decoded PCM 1kHz TONE signale l SILENCE ENC CH1 2 Encoded Dolby E signal NONE of selected SOURCE channel signals 500Hz 1KHz TONE Test signal TONE SILENCE Mute signal NONE No signal output 1 Shown only if the FA 95DE E option is installed 125 6 10 1 2 Dolby DEC IN This menu is displayed only if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is installed in slot A Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Menu names and menu pages for the option in slot B change as shown below Dolby DEC IN B 133 Parameter Default Setting range Description AUX IN Selects an audio signal to be input to the EMB1 CH1 2 15 16 Dolby decoder INPUT AUXIN EMB
246. he genlock signal 5 INPUT Locks the system to an input video signal The delay can be adjusted by System Phase and or Frame Delay However the minimum delay is 520clk common in all formats HD 74MHz SD 27MHz Does not use a genlock signal AUTO DET 525 60 625 50 Teaser Sets a system format for the FA 9520 AUTO AUTO DET Detects and sets the detected input video SYNC ERMT DET EE format to the system format 1080 23f Other values make the system work in the format 1080 24f 1080 59p 1080 50p OFF BELA 12 OFF 1 FRAME to Sets the amount of frame delay 8 FRAME FORCED OFF aa Selects which field to be used twice to compose a frame FIELD EVEN Effective on composite signal inputs Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively 1Selecting ODD EVEN for FORCED FIELD while IN SEL in section 5 6 1 FS INPUT SELECT is set to COMPOSITE SYNCHRO to FRAME and FRAME DELAY is set to OFF FRAME DELAY will always reset to 1 frame Set FRAME DELAY beween 1 and 8 frames 2FRAME DELAY cannot be set if SYNCHRO is set to LINE or AVDL In such case the menu will be displayed as FRAME FRAME DELAY NOT ADJ 3FORCED FIELD cannot be set if SYNCHRO is set to LINE or AVDL In such case the menu will be displayed as FORCED FIELD NOT ADJ 4 The FREEZE function via GPI input is disabled if SYNCHRO is set to LINE or AVDL See section 7 6 GPI SETTING for details 5 Changing the SYNCHRO setting will reset V 1
247. he line number in which the ancillary data is in is displayed 94 5 10 22 ANC1 IN STATUS 1 2 Menu button 131 16BP4103 STATUS 334 1CDP 708 6352M VPID OTHER FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Displays the status of ancillary data packets in an FS1 FS2 input SDI signals Displays the detected DID and SDID of the ancillary data in hexadecimal format such as DID SDID 15 30 if they are different from that of supported formats Displays the ancillary data name such as S334 1CDP 708 if the DID and SDID of the ancillary data match that of supported formats See section 19 FA 9520 Ancillary Data Packet Name List for details on ancillary data names and DID and SDID of formats The status of up to 8 ancillary data can be displayed 5 10 23 ANC OUT 41 Menu button 21 08 PRESENT L ABSENT STATUS PRESENT L 14 277 OTHER FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Displays the status of CEA608 WSS and VI ancillary data inserted into luminance signal of FS1 FS2 output The line number in which the ancillary data is in is displayed Displays PRESENT if ancillary data is inserted Displays ABSENT if no anceillary data is inserted If ANC MODE is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting PASS or BLANK will be displayed In such case no line number will be displayed See section 5 9 6 ANC SET for details on ANC MODE and V ANC setting 5 10 24 S2016 OUT Displays whether the S2016 3 ancillary data is inserted into FS1 FS2 output vide
248. he proportion of p AQ g the separately adjusted levels Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 separately If MODE is set to SEPIA in the COLOR CORRECT C C menu 5 2 4 the menu as shown below will be displayed 37 5 2 2 BLACK LEVEL Menu button 3 RED 100 0 cc GREEN 100 0 FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK BLUE 100 0 AES AUDIO GROUP ADJ UST Setting Parameter Default range Description Steps RED GREEN BLUE 100 0 0 0 200 0 Adjusts the black level of R G and B RGB Black Level nu 0 596 components separately Adjusts the black level of R G and B GROUP ADJUST 100 09 0 0 200 096 components all together while Group Adjustment uk 0 596 retaining the proportion of the separately adjusted levels Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 separately If MODE is set to SEPIA in the COLOR CORRECT C C menu 5 2 4 the menu as shown below will be displayed RED ADJ UST GRE l ADJUST BLU ADJ UST C C MODE IS SEPI 1 If AVO is enabled the m 5 2 3 GAMMA LEVEL essage AVO IS USING IT will be displayed Menu button RED 100 0 GREEN 100 0 CC SAA o aa A Setting range AE Parameter Default Steps Description RED GREEN BLUE 100 0 0 200 Adjusts the gamma level of R G RGB Gamma level aoe 0 5 and B components separately Adjusts the gamma level of R G GROUP ADJUST 100 09 0 200 and B compo
249. hese operations reset the audio circuit and minimize the delay differences and group audio phase differences Output audio signals will be muted while performing the operations 6 11 4 DIGITAL SILENCE Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description Sets the duration to determine the SDI embedded audio and SILENCE TIME 2sec 1 10sec AES input signals are silent The audio status display appears as Silence after the set duration 72dBFS 66dBFS Sets the audio level to determine SILENCE LVL 72dBFS 60dBFS the SDI embedded audio and 54dBFS AES input signals are silent 48dBFS 1 According to this setting the audio status is displayed in the EMB 1 IN AUDIO 5 10 10 EMB 2 IN AUDIO 5 10 11 and AES IN AUDIO menus 5 10 12 140 7 Other Settings amp Information OTHER Allows you to set other settings other than video and audio settings Also information on the various versions and installation states of FA 9520 option items can be viewed 7 1 FS1 FS2 COPY Menu button STATUS OTHER Parameter Default Setting range Description MODE COPY FS1 gt FS2 COPY FS1 gt FS2 COPY FS2 gt FS1 COPY FS1 lt gt FS2 Allows you to copy settings between FS1 and FS2 Select a mode and press the F2 UNITY button to copy COPY FS1 gt FS2 Copies FS1 settings to FS2 FS1 and FS2 settings will become the
250. hronous SD 12 channels Group 1 to 3 48 kHz 16 20 24 bit synchronous only Unbalanced 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC x 4 for AES EBU input output Maximum 4 pairs of stereo channels 48 kHz 16 bit to 24 bit Balanced or unbalanced 4 outputs 2 stereo channels 25 pin D sub female x 1 for analog audio input output less than 100Q 48 kHz 24 bit 2 ms 1 000 ms adjustable in 1 ms steps Sampling rate converter SRC Gain control Down mix Channel re mapping Channel mute 10 Base T 100 Base TX 1000 Base T RJ 45 x 2 279 Remote GPI 9 pin D sub male 7 terminals x 1 IN TTL negative logic level signal or Make contact OUT Rated current 10mA each terminal Absolute maximum current 40mA FA 95D D FA 95DE E Option Audio Input AES EBU Unbalanced 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC x 1 48 kHz 16 bit to 24 bit Audio Output AES EBU Unbalanced 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC x 1 48 kHz 16 20 24 bit Reference Input BB NTSC 0 429 Vp p PAL 0 45 Vp p or Tri level Sync 0 6 Vp p 75Q BNC x 1 Internally 750 terminated FA 95AIO Analog Component I O Option Input Video 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 1080 24PsF 1080 23 98PsF 720 59 94p Formats 720 50p 525 60 NTSC 625 50 PAL Output Video 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 1080 24PsF 1080 23 98PsF 720 59 94p Formats 720 50p 525 60 NTSC 625 50 PAL PAL M FA 95ALA Automatic Loudness Adjustment Option Supported standard ARIB TR B32 ATSC A 85 EBU R128 ITU R BS 1770 Temperature 0 C to 40 C Humid
251. i aliasing for the output video image Weak 8 1 Weak 8 to Strong 8 low to high Vertical Normal Normal This setting cannot be changed if the Strong1 8 conversion is set to the formats indicated as BYPASS in the CONV Conversion Table in section 5 3 2 The Antialias setting cannot be changed if Converter Process Mode is set to BY PASS or if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV Conversion Table 5 3 2 Enhance Setting range un Parameter Default Steps Description Sharpens the output video image Enhance Level 0 Level 0 8 Level 0 to 8 low to high The Enhance setting cannot be changed if Converter Process Mode is set to BY PASS Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV Conversion Table 5 3 2 Converter Size Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description H Size 100 0 50 0 150 0 Adjusts the width of the video Horizontal Size DEUS 0 196 displayed on the monitor V Size 100 0 50 0 150 0 Adjusts the height of the video Vertical Size 0 1 displayed on the monitor The Converter Size setting cannot be changed if Converter Process Mode is set to BY PASS Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV Conversion Table 5 3 2 Converter Position Parameter Default Sett
252. ing range Steps Description H Position 0 Pixel Variable Adjusts the horizontal position of Horizontal Position 2 Pixel the video displayed on the monitor V Position 0 Line Variable Adjusts the vertical position of the Vertical Position 1 Line video displayed on the monitor The Converter Position setting cannot be changed if Converter Process Mode is set to BY PASS Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV Conversion Table 5 3 2 1 The Converter Position setting range varies depending on Converter Process Mode and Sync Format settings in FS Mode 9 4 1 FS1 FS2 Video System 167 Converter Crop Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description H Left 0 Pixel rud Crops the left side of the video H Right 0 Pixel Merced Crops the right side of the video V Top 0 Line Kod Crops the top of the video V Bottom 0 Line ee Crops the bottom of the video The Converter Crop setting cannot be changed if Converter Process Mode is set to BY PASS Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV Conversion Table 5 3 2 1 The Converter Crop setting range varies depending on the Sync Format settings in FS Mode 9 4 1 FS1 FS2 Video System IMPORTANT The cropping setting range resets itself if the video input changes If the set value exceeds the setting range due t
253. input video format of the FA 95AIO 1080 50 installed in slot A OPA 720 59p Displays LOSS if there is no input signal 720 50p Displays UNKNOWN if there is an unsupported 1080 23PsF input signal 1080 24PsF BY PASS UNKNOWN YPbPr SMPTE YPbPr BETACAM MODE A ae E Displays the input signal format of the FA 95AIO installed in slot A Y C Displays the input video format of the FA 95AIO installed in slot B OP B Same as OPA Displays LOSS if there is no input signal Displays UNKNOWN if there is an unsupported input signal MODE B Same as MODE A Displays the input signal format of the FA 95AIO installed in slot B 83 5 10 4 VIDEO OUT STATUS Displays the status of output video signals 511 Menu button STATUS OTHER Parameter Display Description 525 60 625 50 1080 59i 1080 50i R Displays the video format of the SDI1 2 output SDI1 2 p signals 1080 23PsF i l 1080 24PsF Displays DISABLE if there is no signal output 1080 59p 1080 50p BY PASS DISABLE Displays the video format of the SDI3 4 output SDI3 4 Same as above signals Displays DISABLE if there is no signal output 525 60 Displays the video format of the COMPOSITE 625 50 output signal Displays DISABLE if there is no signal output MPOSITE Es ABE Displays PAL M if 5 9 15 COMPOSITE SET2 is enabled and the format of the output video PAL M signal from COMPOSITE OUT is 525 60
254. iption OFF FULL CB VIDEO OFF 75 CB Selects an internal video test signal SMPTE CB RAMP OFF Outputs an internal embedded audio test AUDIO OFF 4KHZTONE signal in FS1 or FS2 respectively OFF Outputs an audio test signal to AES and EXT AUDIO ORF 1KHzTONE analog audio outputs Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively If VIDEO AUDIO and EXT AUDIO of the TEST SIGNAL menu are set to other than OFF VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS button flashes 5 9 11 BY PASS SETTING This setting is used to bypass through input signals Input signals will be output to output connectors without being internally processed 14 Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description E OFF Setting to ON bypasses SDI1 input signals SOU IN SPIT OUT DRE ON to SDI 1 output with a relay connection E OFF Setting to ON bypasses SDI2 input signals SO ie IN DIS OUT OEF ON to SDI 3 output with a relay connection OFF Setting to ON bypasses composite input VBS IN VBS OUT OFF ON signals to composite output with a relay connection VIDEO SYS If any by pass setting is set to ON button flashes AUDIO SYS Conditions for by passing SDI1 IN SDI1 OUT circuit The SDI1 IN to SDI1 OUT by pass circuit is enabled when the FS1 input signal is assigned to SDI1 and SDI 1 2 output is set to FS1 or when the FS2 input signal is assigned to SDI1 and the SDI 1 2 output is set t
255. isplays the unit name The default setting is FA 9520 Displays the status of Fan Normal Normal Operating normally Fan1 st d Stopped FAN1 has stopped oppe Turn the unit power off and contact your dealer if a replacement is needed Displays the status of Fan2 Normal Normal Operating normally Fan2 St d Stopped FAN2 has stopped oppe Turn the unit power off and contact your dealer if a replacement is needed Displays the status of DC Power1 Normal The power supply is normal Power Normal Abnormal DC Power has failed Abnormal A power failure has occurred Although the unit is working properly It is recommended that the power supply unit be replaced Contact your dealer if a replacement is necessary Displays the status of DC Power2 Normal The power supply is normal Power Normal Abnormal DC Power2 has failed Abnormal A power failure has occurred Although the unit is working properly It is recommended that the power supply unit be replaced Contact your dealer if a replacement is necessary 1 Displays if the optional FA 95PS is not installed 224 9 7 2 Audio Status The audio statuses are shown on the Audio Status page FA 9520 Logout Video Audio System GPI Utility Status Network Unit Video Status Audio Status Unit Information SDI 1 Input Audio SDI 2 Input Audio AES Input Audio Analog Input Audio CH 1 PCM CH 1 PCM C
256. ity 30 to 90 no condensation Power 100 VAC 240 VAC 10 50 60 Hz Power Consumption FA 9520 60 VA 59 W at 100 120 VAC 62 VA 56 W at 220 240 VAC with FA 95PS 60 VA 59 W at 100 120 VAC 70 VA 59 W at 220 240 VAC Add the amount of power consumption of options installed FA 95D D DE E 4 VA 4 W at 100 120 VAC 5 VA 5 W at 220 240 VAC FA 95D D DE E 6 VA 6 W at 100 120 VAC 7 VA 7 W at 220 240 VAC FA 95AIO 8 VA 9 W at 100 120 VAC 9 VA 9 W at 220 240 VAC FA 95ALA 8 VA 9 W at 100 120 VAC 9 VA 9 W at 220 240 VAC Dimensions 430 W x 350 D x 44 H mm Weight 3 0 kg without options FA 95D D DE E 0 3 kg FA 95AIO 0 3 kg with a connection cable PC 3307 1 FA 95ALA 0 2 kg FA 95PS 0 3 kg without AC cord Consumables Recommended replacement timespans Power unit within 5 years Cooling fan P 1437 FAN 1 and FAN 2 within 6 years Accessories Operation manual AC cord rack mount brackets Options lt gt FA 95PS Redundant power supply unit FA 95DACBL Digital audio expansion connector cable lt FA 95CO Changeover function FA 9500 mode function lt gt FA 95D D Dolby E Dolby Digital decoder FA 95DE E Dolby E encoder C FA 95AIO Analog component I O card FA 95ALA Automatic Loudness Adjustment lt gt FA 95RU Remote control unit lt gt FA 10DCCRU Remote control unit for color correction 280 24 2 External Dimensions All dimensio
257. k diagram opens the AES Audio Output Setting dialog box AES Audio Output Setting Mozilla Firefox AE 1921680 10 html aes out2 cei AES Audio Mono Sum CH 12 9 Disable CH 3 4 Disable CH 5 6 2 Disable CH 7 8 9 Disable O Enable O Enable O Enable O Enable Refresh After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings AES Audio Mono Sum Parameter Default Setting range Description f Disable Enable Outputs the stereo pair Ci Ne iS Disable Enable channels as a mono sum IMPORTANT To use AES audio signals 1 2 through 7 8 for Source the AES connector must be set to be used for input See AES 1 2 3 4 IO Setting and AES5 6 7 8 IO Setting in section 9 4 2 Audio System for details 9 3 12 Analog Audio Output Settings Clicking block 17 on the audio block diagram opens the Analog Audio Output dialog box 2 Analog Audio Output OBS 192 168 0 10 html ana out2 cgi Analog Audio Output Level CH 1 4dBm CH 2 4dBm CH 3 4dBrn After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps CH4 4d8m Analog Audio Mono Sum CH 12 Disable Enable CH3 4 Disable Enable Analog
258. l Adjustment feature Set to Off to enable only Satie Off A loudness measurement The On Off setting can only be changed while loudness measurement is being stopped Allows you to select the loudness level adjustment NA speed SLOW to achieve the target level for ARO long term loudness level adjustment allowing Se role Normal ere E 1 gradual leveling orma The larger the value the faster the responce 1 2 3 4 allowing greater adjustment NA Disables the SLOW adjustment function Allows you to select the loudness level adjustment NA speed FAST to achieve the target level for 4 3 2 instantaneous loudness level adjustment allowing epar Normal MORE sudden leveling leveling down only The larger the value the faster the response 1 2 3 4 allowing greater adjustment NA Disables the FAST adjustment function 2n Allows you to set the target loudness level offset TADA 0 0 LU d tU LU The target level of the standard selected under Standard is displayed to the left of the setting box Minimum 20 0 dB 20 0 to 0 0 dB Allows you to set the minimum gain lower Gain 1 0 dB threshold to limit the attenuation Maximum 0 0 dB 0 0 to 5 0 dB Allows you to set the maximum gain upper Gain 1 0 dB threshold to limit the magnification IMPORTANT Change Response settings according to the audio material characteristics For materials with a wide audio level range set each setting to a large value For m
259. l audio signal CH1 CH16 Non PCM Silence Mute signal Unknown Non PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 Blank Unknown Unidentifiable x Blank No audio signal embedding PXSEASS BY PASS By passed through AES Input Audio Item Display Description L Displays the status of the audio signal input to the Ose DIGITAL AUDIO IO connectors PCM 48kHz Loss No audio signals PCM 44 1kHz PCM 48kHz Normal audio signal approx 48kHz PCM 32kHz PCM 44 1kHz Normal audio signal approx PCM Other 44 1kHz CH1 CH8 Silence 48kHz PCM 32kHz Normal audio signal approx 32kHz PCM Other Normal audio signal Other AES Silence 48kHz Mute signal approx 48kHz Silence 44 1kHz Mute signal approx 44 1kHz Silence 32kHz Mute signal approx 32kHz Non PCM Silence Other Mute signal Other AES Non PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 Suput Seting Output Setting Connector is set to Output AES Output Audio Item Display Description Displays the status of the audio signal output from the PCM DIGITAL AUDIO IO connectors Silence PCM Normal audio signal CH1 CH8 Non PCM Silence Mute signal Unknown Non PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 Input Setting Unknown Unidentifiable Input Setting Connector is set to input Analog Input Audio Item Display Description Displays status of the input audio signal in the Loss ANALOG AUDIO connector CHT Cha In Loss No audio signals In Input signal is present Analog Ou
260. l be embedded according to the WSS AFD ERROR settings Sec 5 9 8 for non WSS aspect ratio conversions Motion Sense Default Setting range Steps Description Parameter Field Generates a progressive scan image from one field of an interlaced scan image The created image has no motion artifacts but vertical resolution will be reduced Adaptive Detects whether there is motion or no motion in the scene and generates an optimal progressive scan image Frame Odd 1st Generates a progressive scan image from two fields odd even of an interlaced scan image Suitable for the progressive segment frame input of progressive scan signals Frame Even 1st Generates a progressive scan image from two fields even odd of and interlaced scan image Field Adaptive Frame Odd 1st Frame Even 1st Motion Sense Adaptive IMPORTANT Setting Motion Sense to Frame Odd 1st or Frame Even 1st for input signals other than progressive segment frame inputs cause motion artifacts In such case change Motion Sense setting to Field or Adaptive 166 Antialias Parameter Default E Description Performs horizontal anti aliasing for the output video image Weak 8 1 Weak 8 to Strong 8 low to high Horizontal Normal Normal This setting cannot be changed if the Strong1 8 conversion is set to the formats indicated as BYPASS in the CONV Conversion Table in section 5 3 2 Performs vertical ant
261. l from among AES audio CH SEL en ae aa channels for which to set polarity Sets the polarity for the channel that is POLARITY NORMAL UE selected under CH SEL INVERT Reverses the polarity 6 9 7 ANALOG POLARITY Menu button OUT SEL MODE Parameter Default Setting range Description p Selects a channel from among analog CH SEL GA EE audio channels for which to set polarity Sets the polarity for the channel that is POLARITY NORMAL NORMAL selected under CH SEL INVERT Reverses the polarity 123 6 9 8 Dolby A POLARITY This menu is accessible only if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E is installed in option slot A Dol byA POLARITY Menu button OUT SEL MODE Item Default Setting range Description DEC CH1 8 Selects a channel from among Dolby CH SEL DEC CH1 DolbyDM L decoder output channels for which to DolbyDM R set polarity Sets the polarity for the channel that POLARITY NORMAL NORMAL is selected under CH SEL INVERT Reverses polarity 6 9 9 Dolby B POLARITY This menu is accessible only if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E is installed in option slot B Dol byB POLARITY Menu button OUT SEL MODE Item Default Setting range Description DEC CH1 8 Selects a channel from among Dolby CH SEL DEC CH1 DolbyDM L decoder output channels for which to DolbyDM R set polarity Sets the polarity for the channel t
262. ler if the replacement is needed Displays the status of FAN2 NORMAL Operating normally NORMAL FAN2 STOPPED FAN2 has stopped TOPPED SIS Turn the unit power OFF and contact your dealer if the replacement is needed Displays the status of DC POWER1 NORMAL The power supply is normal NORMAL ABNORMAL DC POWERT has failed DC POWER ABNORMAL A power failure has occurred Although the unit is working properly It is recommended that the power supply unit be replaced Contact your dealer if a replacement is necessary Displays the status of DC POWER2 NORMAL The power supply is normal NORMAL ABNORMAL DC POWERZ2 has failed ABNORMAL A power failure has occurred Although the unit is working properly It is recommended that the power supply unit be replaced Contact your dealer if a replacement is necessary DC POWER 1 Displayed only if FA 95PS is installed 81 5 10 2 VIDEO IN STATUS DEO Menu button FS 1 Dl 1 080 59 FEST SDI 2 25 60 STATUS COMPOSITE 525 60 REFERENCE 525 60 OTHER Parameter Display Description LOSS 525 60 625 50 1080 59i Displays the video format of the SDI1 input signal 1080 50i Displays LOSS if there is no input signal 720 59p Displays UNKNOWN if there is an unsupported input FS1 SDI1 720 50p signal 1080 23PsF Displays video format LOSS or UNKNOWN only if 1080 24PsF FS1 IN SEL or FS2 IN SEL i
263. log Composite I O Digital Analog Audio I O Main Converter Up Down Cross Aspect conversion Second Converter Up Down Cross Aspect conversion Color Corrector Auto Video Optimizer AVO Powerful Frame Synchronizer Performance Logo Generator Other Features Video delay 2D 3D comb filter for Y C separator composite Web browser based monitoring and control possible SNMP monitoring and partial control function VVVVVVVVV Additional Features Redundant power supply unit Digital audio expansion cable Changeover function in FA 9500 mode only Dolby E Digital decoder and Dolby E encoder Analog component I O Automatic Loudness Adjustment Function Remote control unit via Ethernet VVVVVVV 1 3 FA 95LG GUI Download The FA 9520 Logo generator function is designed to be used with logo management software FA 95LG GUI enabling logo data import to FA 9520 via Ethernet The FA 95LG GUI can be downloaded from FOR A s website http www for a com products fa9500 fa95lg qui zip The operation manual for the FA 95LG GUI will download automatically along with the software 15 2 Panel Descriptions 2 1 Front Panel DISPLAY AREA z J F2 Ea SEH sso FRAME SYSNCHRONIZER FA 9500
264. ls AUTO select one input channel pair for each roup GROUP4 REFERENCE REFERENCE 9 9 P INPUT CH 13 14 INPUT CH 15 16 For SD SDI outputs REFERENCE is automatically selected regardless of the settings 1 See section 6 5 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING for details on SOURCE settings 2 Embedded audio signals are divided into 4 groups Each group consists of 4 audio channels Group 1 CH 1 to 4 Group 2 CH 5 to 8 Group 3 CH 9 to 12 Group 4 CH 13 to 16 The audio signals in the same group are transmitted together using the same audio clock 48kHz PCM audio signals will be synchronized to a genlock signal in the SRC sampling rate converter so as to synchronize with the output video signal Non PCM audio signals compressed audio data such as AC 3 do not go into SRC If the NON PCM audio input signal is asynchronous with the output video signal the NON PCM audio output signal will be asynchronous The asynchronous NON PCM audio signals can be embedded to SDI video signals by selecting an audio clock for each audio group To do so all 4 channels in the respective audio groups must be synchronous Assign 4 synchronous audio signals to channels in a group See section 6 5 2 EMB2 OUT REMAP for details Then the asynchronous audio signal will be properly embedded to the video signal 103 6 2 AES AUDIO Settings AES AUDIO Allows you to set the DIGITAL AUDIO IN OUT settings 6 2 1 AES IN GAIN
265. ls return to their state before auto Mode Off Auto 1 level adjustment is applied When set to Off the Hold signal levels can be manually adjusted See B section 9 2 7 Color Corrector for details AVO Control Mode cannot be changed from Off when LINK setting mode is enabled in the FA 9520 or a connected FA 95RU To set to Auto or Hold disable LINK setting mode See sec 4 2 8 Switching Between 2 Channel Frame Synchronizers for details on LINK settings Darker Selects a type of signal level adjustment Dark 10 options are available Five fixed options and Standard five custom options Level Bright Adjustmen Standard ited Darker lt Dark lt Standard lt Bright lt Brighter t level User2 User1 User5 Customizable User3 Clicking Set User opens the USER1 5 LEVE User4 SET dialog box See section9 2 2 2 User 1 5 User5 LEVEL SET for details Sets the sample area to calculate the adjustment Full 10 options are available Eight fixed areas and Sereen tow custom areas ne lt Fixed areas gt Sample Full Bottom TopLett Top Right Pillar Box Center Area Screen Right Bottom Left Bottom Right TOU Custom areas ser Area inki User Area2 dion bel Area opens the User Areal 2 setting See section 9 2 2 3 User Area 1 2 for details Area Sets sample area display On Off If set to On the Display Off sample area appears as a semi transparent white Mark Off O rectangle on all output videos It is set to Off at h 2 er s
266. m FS1 and or 2 To enable devices that receive signals from FA 9520 to detect ancillary data select the ancillary data type output video format s for FS1 and or 2 output s and line number into which the data is to be inserted in ANC EMBED LINE Sec 5 7 5 The default setting should be set to the line number usually used FS1 and FS2 operation mode settings Set the converter operation mode in CONV MODE Sec 5 3 1 Set the specific aspect ratio under ASPECT in CONV MODE Sec 5 3 1 Select an aspect ratio from among 4 3 L 16 9 T to 16 9F ALT4 3 for SD SDI output video signals from FS1 FS2 Select from among 16 9 L gt 16 9 to 16 9F ALT4 3 for HD SDI output video signals from FS1 FS2 AFD output verification AFD data status in FS1 and FS2 output video signals can be verified as follows The ANC OUT menu Sec 5 10 23 allows you to verify whether and in which line the VI and WSS data has been inserted into CONV1 output video signals VI and WSS output data details can be seen in VI OUT 5 10 25 and WSS OUT 5 10 26 S2016 3 output data details can be seen in S2016 OUT Sec 5 10 24 Into which line 82016 3 is inserted can be seen in ANC OUT1 Sec 5 10 27 272 20 6 AFD Code Abbreviations SMPTE S2016 3 AFD aspect ratio table In a 4 3 coded frame In a 16 9 coded frame AFD Code UNDEFINED Undefined UNDEFINED Undefined 0000 RESERVED Reserved RESERVED Reserved 0001 4 3
267. ment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense 07 08 2014 Printed in Japan FORA FOR A COMPANY LIMITED Head Office 3 8 1 Ebisu Shibuya ku Tokyo 150 0013 Japan Overseas Division Phone 81 0 3 3446 3936 Fax 81 0 3 3446 1470 Japan Branch Offices Osaka Okinawa Fukuoka Hiroshima Nagoya Sendai Sapporo R amp D Production Sakura Center Sapporo Center FOR A America Corporate Office 11155 Knott Ave Suite G amp H Cypress CA 90630 USA Phone 1 714 894 3311 Fax 1 714 894 5399 FOR A America East Coast Office 2 Executive Drive Suite 670 Fort Lee Executive Park Fort Lee NJ 07024 USA Phone 1 201 944 1120 Fax 1 201 944 1132 FOR A America Distribution amp Service Center 2400 N E Waldo Road Gainesville FL 32609 USA Phone 1 352 371 1505 Fax 1 352 378 5320 FOR A Corporation of Canada 346A Queen Street West Toronto Ontario M5V 2
268. mposite Settings SC Phase Composite Setting SC Phase ol j E Comb Filter Adaptive 3D GAdaptive2D OTrap Only NR Level Off v Cross Color Off vi VITS Goff on NTSC Setup Off O On PAL M Mode Disable O Enable If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click Refresh to update the settings SC Phase Parameter Default Setting range Description Adjusts the subcarrier phase of composite and Y C output signals referring to the B B SC Phase 0 179 8 180 genlock signal Not adjustable with the tri level genlock signal Composite Setting Parameter Default Setting range Description Adaptive 3D Adaptive Selects a mode to separate the Y luminance Comb Filter 2D Adaptive 2D and C chrominance of composite signals Trap Only Off Sets the noise reduction level for the composite Eu qu Level 1 4 signal inputs Cross Color Off ee 3 Sets the cross color noise reduction level On Passes through VITS V ANC lines 10 to VITS off Off 21 NTSC or 6 to 23 PAL of composite input On signals For SD SDI output signals inserts VITS lines into Y signals Select Off when using signals without 7 5 IRE NTSC Setu off o 2D P On Select On when using signals with 7 5 IRE setup PAL M Mode Disable Disable Disable Allows NTSC signals to be output Set Enable Enable Allows PAL M
269. n Normal Sets polarity for the Dolby decoder Ch 1 8 Normal Invert output Dolby Decoder Gain Parameter Default Setting range Description 20 0 20 0dB Sets offset for all Dolby decoded Master 0 0 dB 0 1 dB signals AS 20 0 420 0 dB 1 in f hD Down Mix L Ch 0 0 dB 20 0 20 0 Sets gain for each Dolby decoder 0 1 dB channel Down Mix R Ch 1 Audio signals will be clipped if the sum of Master and Ch gain settings exceed the upper or lower threshold of the setting range 195 9 3 14 Dolby AUX Output Select Clicking block 17 on the audio block diagram when the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is installed in option slot A B opens the DolbyAUX Output dialog box The options in slots A and B can be set separately Dolby AUX Output EBR b 192168010 html dolby aux2 cei Dolby AUX Output Select Output Dolby Decoder CH 1 2 After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a signal to be output from the optional Dolby output connector Dolby OUT Decoder Output CH 1 2 CH Dolby Decoder CH 1 2 7 8 Dolby Decoder CH 3 4 Dolby decoded PCM signals Dolby Decoder CH 5 6 Dolby Down Mix L R ED CH 7 8 Downmixed signal generated olby Decoder from Dolby decoded PCM Output Dolby Decoder Dolby Down Mix L R signals CH 1 2 Dolby Encoder CH
270. n LKFS See section 6 10 2 4 LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT for details on input settings MOMENT Momentary loudness level SHORT Short term loudness level LONG Long term loudness level Displays the loudness level of the audio signal adjusted by the FA 95ALA in LKFS O Displays if the adjustment is disabled OUTPUT MOMENT Momentary loudness level SHORT Short term loudness level LONG Long term loudness level Pressing the F3 control knob starts loudness measurement and adjustment Press again to stop Pressing the F3 control knob alternates the STR START menu display between STR and STP STP STOP STR Starts measuring and adjusting STP Stops measuring and adjusting Once the measurement and adjustment starts the elapsed time will be displayed F4 gt CL Pressing the F4 control knob clears all measured loudness levels and the elapsed time display 1 Displays NA for no input signal All values measured as over 0 0 LKFS will be displayed as 0 0 INPUT F3 STR IMPORTANT Measurement and adjustment can be performed for up to 6 59 59 6 hr 59 min 59 sec If measurement continues for the maximum duration the elapsed time display restarts from 0 00 00 132 6 10 2 2 LOUDNESS CONTROL ENABLE When installed in option slot A Channel 1 Menu button OM Ds 5C Te Rs SES NGASESA 212 CONTROL spo par VIDEO OP AUDIO OP RESPONSE
271. n for FADE IN and FADE TIME 12 msec 24 msec OUT transitions 1 To use this function the audio delay must be set longer than the sum of the FADE TIME and error detection time 2 msec Ex If FADE TIME is set to 12 msec the audio delay must be longer than 14 msec i e 12 2 msec error detection time Input signal Internal Process Error detection Return to normal l 12 msec 24 msec IMPORTANT FADE IN OUT may not function properly for the switching between AES input signals whose sampling rates are different or that are asynchronous 137 6 11 2 DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO Menu button REF LEVEL 20dBFS GRADE PROFESSIONAL VIDEO SYS RESOLUTION 24bit AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects the reference level for 18dBFS digital audio signals REF LEVEL 20dBFS 20dBFS See section 11 2 Digital Output 24dBFS Level Relative to the Analog Input Level for details Selects an audio application for AES and SDI AUDIO outputs PROFESSIONAL PROFESSIONAL Optimized for GRADE PROFESSIONAL CONSUMER professional use CONSUMER Optimized for consumer use RESOLUTION 24bit e Selects an audio word length for 16bit AES and SDI AUDIO outputs 6 11 3 AUDIO ERR SENSE AUDIO ERR SENSE NM e Ente E SEL STA DI o A mMm TU L TY S 2 83 1 FS SRC SRC CO OO lt lt nr PASS PASS Menu button VIDEO
272. n unsupported input signal Unknown Displays BY PASS if the function is enabled Loss 525 60 625 50 1080 59i E 1080 50i Displays the video format of the genlock input signal Reference 720 59p Displays Loss if there is no input signal 720 50p Displays Unknown if there is an unsupported input signal 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF PAL M Unknown Loss 525 60 625 50 gt 1080 59i Displays the video format of the Component input signal of 1080 50i the FA 95AIO installed in option slot A Option A 720 59p Displays Loss if there is no input signal 720 50p Displays Unknown if there is an unsupported input signal dor Displays BY PASS if the function is enabled BY PASS Unknown 3 Displays the video format of the Component input signal of Option B Ditto the FA 95AIO installed in option slot B YPbPr SMPTE Imput Mode BEN Displays the input signal format of FA 95AIO installed in p RGB option slot A and B Y C 1 Shown when PAL M Mode Set in the 9 4 1 FS1 FS2 Video System is set to Enable or an input signal in GENLOCK IN connector is 525 60 or PAL M signal 2 Shown if FA 95AIO is installed in option slot A 8 Shown if FA 95AIO is installed in option slot B Video Output Status Item Display Description SDI Out 1 2 525 60 625 50 1080 59i 1080 50i 720 59p 720 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF 1080 59p 1080 50p BY PASS Disable Displays the video format of the SDI1 output si
273. na 123 6 9 7 ANALOG POLARITY sss eene nennen enne nen nnne nnne rennen nen 123 6 9 8 Dolby A POLARITY ti era ater e tedio d a ere eran 124 6 9 9 Dolby B POLARUTY iio v ode eri a e EE eee Eee ue PEE Ye e cene Rea 124 6 10 AUDIO OPTION AUDIO OP sssssseseeeenememeememeenem emere 125 6 10 1 FA 95D D J EA 95DE E 1 5 n hA PP euin atn ER e 125 6 10 1 1 Dolby AUX OUT sse emere ener nennen nennen nnne 125 6 10 1 2 Dolby DEC IN 5 ert rer er nec oie reels erra 126 6 10 1 3 Dolby DECODER REFERENCE esee eene 127 6 10 1 4 Dolby DOWNMIIX essseeseeeneenemeemmeeeenme nennen eere eene nernenn enne nnne 127 6 10 1 5 Dolby DECODER GAIN i eroinei atrape ner aa nae araeo t len iarann reia 128 6 10 1 6 Dolby ENCODER INPUT orride niria t emen emere nnne nennen 129 6 10 1 7 Dolby ENCODER SETTING seseseeeeee emere nennen 130 6 10 1 8 METADATA INPUT ooooocononcccnnononincononcnnonononincannnnnnnonenonnnnnn rn enne nennen 131 6 10 2 Automatic Loudness Adjustment FA 9SALA oococcccocococononocccncccconconnnnncnccnonnnnannnnos 132 6 10 2 1 LOUDNESS MEASUREMENT sessi 132 6 10 2 2 LOUDNESS CONTROL ENABLE sse enne 133 6 10 2 3 LOUDNESS CONTROL SETTINGS sse 134 6 10 2 4 LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT see eene 135 6 10 2 5 LOUDNESS STANDARD ssssseseeeeeeeee nennen mener nennen nennen 136 6 11 AUDIO SYSTEM Settin
274. nces depending on video format to 1 2H Table of Reference signals and Input formats that can lock Reference signal Input signal 525 60 1080 59i 720 59p 625 50 1080 50i 720 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF 525 60 PA ELA 4 4 1080 59i VMS VMS 4 4 720 59p PA VIS VIS 4 1080 59p ES ELA EA 4 625 50 VMS VMS 4 4 1080 50i EA EA 4 4 720 50p VMS VMS VMS 4 1080 50p VIS EA EA 4 1080 23PsF Y Y Y VIS 1080 24PsF 4 4 4 VIS SIN SYNCHRO can be set to FRAME LINE or AVDL A SYNCHRO can only be set to FRAME Unable to synchronize 205 FS1 FS2 Ancillary Setting Parameter Default Setting range Description ANC Mode H V ANC H V ANC Detail Selects ancillary data processing mode for the FS1 FS2 output signal H ANC and V ANC menu settings will become available when H V ANC is selected Set to Detail to enable ANC Data Embed settings in 9 4 3 ANC Settings H ANC Overwrite Overwrite In Data Blank Embeds audio signals into horizontal ancillary data of FS1 FS2 output videos Overwrite Removes the embedded audio from the input SDI video then embeds the processed audio data in the video signal Whether to embed is determined by the FS1 FS2 Audio Group setting The input SDI data will be embedded in the video signal after audio signals are embedded In Data Passes the input SDI horizontal ancill
275. nch screws 11 10 9 2992999999999 Or iO OOOO Pin Assignments Pin No Setting 1 CH4 OUT 2 CH4 OUT COM 3 CH3 OUT 4 CH2 OUT 5 CH2 OUT COM 6 CH1 OUT 7 CHA IN 8 CH4 IN COM 9 CH3 IN 10 CH2 IN 11 CH2 IN COM 12 CH1 IN 13 NC 14 CH4 OUT 15 CH3 OUT 16 CH3 OUT COM 17 CH2 OUT 18 CH1 OUT 19 CH1 OUT COM 20 CH4 IN 21 CH3 IN 22 CH3 IN COM 23 CH2 IN 24 CH1 IN 25 CH1 IN COM 239 13 Dolby E Decoder Encoder Channel Assignment Table Dolby E Decoder Output Encloder Input Channel Assignment Out In Out In Out In Out In Out ln Out In Out in Out In Program Configuration Chi Ch2 Ch3 cha Ch5 che Ch7 che 5 1 2 1L 1R 1C 1LFE 1Ls 1Rs 2L 2R 5 1 2x1 1L 1R 1C 1LFE 1Ls 1Rs 2C 3C 444 1L 1R 1C 1S 2C 28 2L 2R 4 2x2 1L 1R 1C 1S 3L 3R 2L 2R 4 2 2x1 1L 1R 1C 1S 3C 4C 2L 2R 4 4x1 1L 1R 1C 1S 4C 5C 2C 3C 4x2 1L 1R 3L 3R 4L 4R 2L 2R 3x2 2x1 1L 1R 3L 3R 4C 5C 2L 2R 2x2 4x1 1L 1R 3C 4C 5C 6C 2L 2R 2 6x1 1L 1R 4C 5C 6C 7C 2C 3C 8x1 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C Dolby E 5 1 1L 1R 1C 1LEF 1Ls 1Rs None None 4 2 1L 1R 1C 1S None None 2L 2R 4 2x1 1L 1R 1C 1S None None 28 3C 3x2 1L 1R 3L 3R None None 2L 2R 2x2 2x1 1L 1R 3C 4C None None 2L 2R 2 4x1 1L 1R 4C 5C None None 2C 3C 6x1 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C None None 4 1L 1R 1C 1S None None None None 2 2 1L 1R No
276. ncoder B CH2 Loudness 1 A 5 Right Loudness 2 A Center Loudness 1 B LFE Loudness 2 B a Selects an audio signal to embed into respective FS1 FS2 audio channels 1 Selectable when the FA 95D D option is installed in option slot A 2 Selectable when the FA 95DE E option is installed in option slot A 3 Selectable when the FA 95D D option is installed in option slot B 4 Selectable when the FA 95DE E option is installed in option slot B 5 Selectable when the FA 95ALA option is installed in option slot A 6 Selectable when the FA 95ALA option is installed in option slot B 187 9 3 8 Audio Master Gain Settings Clicking block 9 on the audio block diagram opens the Audio Master Gain Setting dialog box 3 Audio Master Gain Settings Mozilla Firefox 192 169 0 10 Master Caine Master mute cer After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps Audio Master Settings Parameter Default Setting range Description 20 0 20 0 dB Sets the offset to the audio gain for Master Gain 0 0dB 0 1 dB all audio channels CH1 through 16 Off On Mutes all audio channels that Master Mute Off On will be internally processed Master Mute
277. nction IMPORTANT Set RESPONSE according to the input signal Larger values under both RESPONSE RESPONSE S NORMAL RESPONSE F NORMAL settings are recommended for materials with dynamic loudness level ranges Smaller values under both settings are recommended for materials for which only minimum leveling is preferred such as music materials 133 6 10 2 3 LOUDNESS CONTROL SETTINGS When installed in option slot A Channel 1 Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Menu names and menu pages for the second channel of the FA 95ALA in option slot A and the first and second channels of the FA 95ALA in option slot B change as shown below Channel 2 of the FA 95ALA in option slot A L OUr D CTR E SE T2 223 e Channel 1 of the FA 95ALA in option slot B O CR A a TUB 263 Channel 2 of the FA 95ALA in option slot B LEO UD CR b SSEST 2B 273 Parameter Default Setting range Description Allows you to set the target loudness level 2 0 to 2 0 LU The target level specified by the standard that is TARGET SOM 0 1 LU selected under the LOUDNESS STANDARD menu sec 6 10 2 5 is displayed to the left 20 0 to 0 0 dB Allows you to set the minimum gain lower MINSA 720 008 1 0 dB threshold to limit attenuation 0 0 to 5 0 dB Allows you to set the maximum gain upper MAX GAIN 0 0 dB 1 0 dB threshold to limit magnification 134
278. nd the control knob LED lights Pressing the single up arrow button cancels the change and everything reverts to the previous state Refer to section 4 Front Panel Operation for details The FRONT OPERATION menu in the FA 95RU allows you to select a front panel operation mode for the FA 95RU 7 5 FRONT PANEL SET Menu button STATUS OTHER Parameter Default Setting range Description Sets brightness of the menu VFD BRIGHT 50 10 50 display 10 50 dark to bright DISABLE Sets the idle time before turning 5min off the menu display EAU cece 10min DISABLE Does not turn off the 30 min menu display Sets the brightness of all LED LED BRIGHT LEVEL4 LEVEL1 8 indicators on the front panel LEVEL 1 8 dark to bright DISABLE DISABLE Disable buzzer BEZES ee ENABLE ENABLE Enable buzzer This menu cannot be accessed from the FA 95RU 143 7 6 GPI SETTING Menu button O A OSES Eee 0 T IN OUT SEL INPUT STATUS ASSIGN NONE OTHER Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a GPI pin of the GPI1 7 SEL GPI1 GPI1 7 REMOTE port Selects whether to use the IN OUT SEL INPUT INPUT GPI pin that is selected 1 OUTPUT under GPI1 7 SEL for input or tally output In case IN OUT SEL is set to INPUT NONE DEFAULT EVENT1 100 SDI1 BY PASS SDI2 VBS FREEZE FULL CB 75 CB SMPTE CB RAMP SDI1 FS1 FS2 SDI2 OP A
279. ne None None None 2L 2R 2 2x1 1L 1R None None None None 2C 3C 4x1 1C 2C 3C 4C None None None None 7 1 1L 1R 1C 1LFE 1Ls 1Rs 1Bsl 1Bsr 7 1screen 1L 1R 1C 1LFE 1Ls 1Rs 1Le 1Re Deolby Digital Decoder Output Channel Assignment Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Coding Mode Ch Ch2 ch3 cha Ch5 che Ch7 Ch8 3 2L 1L 1R 1C 1LFE 1Ls 1Rs None None 3 2 1L 1R 1C None 1Ls 1Rs None None 2 2L 1L 1R None 1LFE 1Ls 1Rs None None 2 2 1L 1R None None 1Ls 1Rs None None 3 1L 1L 1R 1C 1LFE 1S 1S None None 3 1 1L 1R 1C None 1S 1S None None Dolby Digital 2 1L 1L 1R None 1LFE 1S 1S None None 2 1 1L 1R None None 1S 1S None None 3 0L 1L 1R 1C 1LFE None None None None 3 0 1L 1R 1C None None None None None 2 0 1L 1R None None None None None None 1 0 None None 1C None None None None None 1 1 1C 2C None None None None None None PCM 1L 1R None None None None None None 240 14 REMOTE 14 1 REMOTE Connector The pin assignments of the REMOTE GPI connector are as shown in the table below The connector has seven ports Although the pin assignments below cannot be changed the input and output are selectable and the functions for GPI1 to GPI7 can also be selected REMOTE GPI Pin Assignments 9pin D sub male inch screws Pin No Setting 1 DC OUT Up to 200mA output current is available at 5 4V GPI 1 input output GPI 2 input output GPI 3
280. nents all together while Group Adjustment RN 0 596 retaining the proportion of the separately adjusted levels Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 separately If MODE is set to SEPIA in the COLOR CORRECT C C menu 5 2 4 the menu as shown below will be displayed Only the value of GREEN can be changed SEPIA 100 0 The menu appears as shown below if AVO is enabled 38 5 2 4 COLOR CORRECT C C 5 Menu button CC EStLOCK Fs2Lock Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description MODE Correcti on Mode CURVE Gamma Curve BALANCE CENTER BALANCE DIFFERENTIAL SEPIA CENTER BLACK WHITE Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 separately 1 SEPIA is unselectable when LINK setting mode is enabled in the FA 9520 or a connected FA 95RU To select SEPIA disable LINK setting mode See section 4 2 8 Switching Between 2 Channel Frame Synchronizers for details on LINK settings Selects a correction mode from BALANCE RGB DIFFERENTIAL YPbPr or SEPIA BALANCE RGB signal correction mode Allows you to adjust the white balance Gray scale can be changed by adjusting R G and B levels DIFFERENTIAL Color difference signal mode Allows you to adjust contrast without changing white balance R G and B levels can be changed without affecting gray scale This adjustment is effective for images with different colo
281. nge 21 3 Connections This section describes the connections and settings for specific usages The descriptions on the settings are based on the factory default If you are not sure of your current settings you can reset the unit to the default setting by selecting DEFAULT in the EVENT LOAD menu described in the section 8 1 EVENT LOAD 3 1 For 2 Channel Frame Synchronizer Use Input an HD SD SDI signal to SDI IN2 Reference signal BB or Tri level sync signal synchronized with the input signal Input an HD SD SDI signal to SDI IN1 ANALOG AUDIO REMOTE Outputs the SDI IN1 input signal Terminate at 75 ohm if not used synchronized with the SDI OUT1 and 2 reference signal Outputs the SDI IN2 input signal synchronized with the reference signal from SDI OUT3 and 4 Settings that need to be checked Set FS1 INSEL to SDI1 in the FS INPUT SELECT menu see section 5 6 1 Set FS2 INSEL to SDI2 in theFS INPUT SELECT menu see section 5 6 1 Set SDI1 2 to FS1 in the OUTPUT ASSIGN menu see section 5 7 1 Set SDI3 4 to FS2 in the OUTPUT ASSIGN menu see section 5 7 1 Adjust phase and position to match the reference signal in HD PHASE SET to VIDEO POSITION menus if necessary see sections 5 9 2 to 5 9 4 22 3
282. not effective on the SDI1 2 and SDI3 4 outputs To enable the Composite Clip menu set Clip Mode to Off in the YPbPr RGB Clip menu 9 2 9 Clip Mode Off Composite Clip Mode Setting range eR Parameter Default Steps Description 50 15096 Sets the upper threshold of analog White Clip 150 0 0 5 composite color space 50 50 Sets the lower threshold of analog Black Clip 50 0 0 5 composite color space 176 9 3 AUDIO Settings Click Click the Audio tab at the top of the page The audio block diagram will be displayed Each block in the diagram lets you to go to the corresponding windows or dialog boxes that allows you to change various settings Audio Block Diagram FA 9520 Logout Audio system cP utility Status Network 1 mm 1 q olari f SDI Out 1 2 14 1 O 8j SRC 3 Polarity E 2 SDI In 2 Delay Polarity 9 MEN 15 Master Gain 3 O AES In Delay Polarity B AES Out 1 6 4 oo Analog In Delay Polarity El oo Analog Out 17 8 a 10 Mapping Down Mix 2 1 0 13 Dolby Option AUXIN Option A AUX Out 11 is effective when the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is installed 12 is effective when the FA 95DE E option is installed 13 is effective when the FA 95ALA option is installed If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8
283. nput signal format Field 1 23 Line 8 23 Line ERE a line to detect ancillary data in FS1 FS2 ANC Detect Select Allows you to select the superimposed ancillary data type Parameter Default Setting range Description CEA608 CC Detects closed caption data CEA608 CC in luminance signal of 525 60 systems S334 1 CC 334 1 CC Detects closed caption data in 525 60 SDI signal ancillary data space Caption 1 CEA608 CC AFD S2016 3 AFD a er a Selects an ancillary data type to detect in BT1119 WSS SDTV input signals 1 Be sure to set to CEA608 CC when processing closed caption data in 525 60 composite signals Otherwise the caption data will not be detected 210 FS1 FS2 ANC Data Embed Allows you to set ancillary data insertion into FS1 FS2 output video signals Parameter Default Setting range Description ANC CEA608 CC CEA608 CC 334 1 CC SD CEA708 CC HD 2016 3 AFD RP186 VI BT1119 WSS Selects an ancillary data type to insert Format Selects a video format that supports the ancillary data selected under ANC Only selectable format will be shown Embed Disable Disable Enable Disable Does not insert ancillary data selected under ANC Enable Inserts ancillary data selected under ANC Settings can be respectively set for different ANC setting data types Line Field 1 Selects a line in ancillary data space into whi
284. ns in mm IT E oa m m SLE a e e um 0 E E io UT x iU qp MELIA eal al A c ts DISPLAY d d 281 Index 2 2 Channel Frame Synchronizer Use 22 A About AFD 264 About Closed Captioning 275 About Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay Settings Web 158 AC Cord Retaining Clip 6 Accessing Menus 29 AES Audio Input Hysteresis 180 AES Audio Input Settings Web 180 AES Audio Output Settings Web 192 AES AUDIO Settings AES AUDIO 104 AES HYSTERESIS 104 AES I O SETUP 105 AES IN AUDIO 89 AES IN GAIN 104 AES OUT AUDIO 91 AES OUT GAIN 109 AES OUT MONO 105 AES OUT REMAP 113 AES POLARITY 123 AES SRC MODE 122 AFD 264 AFD Based Auto Aspect Conversion Settings 271 AFD Code Abbreviations 273 AFD Codes 265 AFD IN STATUS 94 AFD Supported Video Formats 271 AIO A ASSIGN 63 AIO A IN MODE 61 AIO BASSIGN 64 AIO BIN MODE 61 AIO BY PASS SET 78 Alert 276 Analog Audio Connection 239 Analog Audio Input Web 182 Analog Audio Output Settings Web 192 ANALOG AUDIO Settings ANALOG
285. nverter1 Ancillary Setting FS1 FS2 SD Line Mask Parameter Default Setting range Description Pass Outputs the line to a composite Y C or SD SDI ANY Pass output signal without processing ENED eS dois Blank Blank Masks the selected composite Y C or SD SDI output signal line IMPORTANT Line settings specified under ANC Settings sec 9 4 3 take a priority over FS1 FS2 Line Mask line settings and will take effect 206 9 4 2 Audio System FA 9520 Logout Video Audio System GPI Utility Status Notwork FS1 Video System gt FS2 Video System gt Audio System gt ANC Settings gt Composite Settings Fade In Out Fado Mode Disable Enable Correction Disable normal Sensi Fade Time Arms Mans Chennel Status Mask Digital Audio EMB 1 On2 DSAC BYPASS Cecu Onur AES 1 2 34 VO Setting input Output EMB ICH CSRCBYPASS CPCM Otu AES S16 718 VO Sening input Output EMO 1 CHS6 CsRCBYPASS Cece Clu Reference Level wanes Godbrs OadBFS tubtCHp CsacBYPASS Cecu Otu Grade TProfessional Consumer EMB 1 CHINO GsRCBYPASS OPC Ohu Resolution 224 Ba 20 Be 16 Ba Eme cuna CsacBYPASS Cecu Ot Digital Audio Silence Setting tMO1CHMTYM CSRCBYPASS OPC Omu A Hos EMO 4 CMIS AG GsRcBYPASS Opcu Clu EuB 2 CH DSRC BYPASS OPCU Ow emp 2cHve OSACEYPASS CPC Olun emo 2cnse CsacBvPAss Cec Cun EMB 2 CHT DSRC BYPASS cu Mu EMB 2 CHewt0 SRC BYPASS Pou Mu Emo 2Cumrz GsacBYPASS OPCM OMu EMB 2
286. o FS2 If the BY PASS setting cannot be turned ON an SDI1 BYPASS DISABLED message will be displayed 77 Conditions for by passing SDI2 IN SDI3 OUT circuit The SDI2 IN to SDI3 OUT by pass circuit is enabled when FS1 input signal is assigned to SDI2 and SDI 3 4 output is set to FS1 or when FS2 input signal is assigned to SDI2 and SDI 3 4 output is set to FS2 If the BY PASS setting cannot be turned ON an SDI2 BYPASS DISABLED message will be displayed Conditions for by passing VBS IN VBS OUT circuit The VBS IN to VBS OUT by pass circuit is enabled when FS1 input signal is assigned to COMPOSITE and COMPOSITE output is set to FS1 or when FS2 input signal is assigned to COMPOSITE and COMPOSITE output is set to FS2 If the BY PASS setting cannot be turned ON a VBS BYPASS DISABLED message will be displayed See section 5 6 1 FS INPUT SELECT for details on FS1 and FS2 input signal assignments and 5 7 1 OUTPUT ASSIGN for details on output signal assignments 5 9 12 AIO BY PASS SET This setting is used to bypass through FA 95AIO input signals Input signals will be output to output connectors without being internally processed 12 Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description OFF Setting to ON bypasses the input signal in AIO OP A IN OUT OFF ON the FA 95AIO in option slot A to its output connector with a relay connection OFF Setting to ON byp
287. o an input change the set value will automatically reset itself to the default value If the set value exceeds the horizontal range the H Left and H Right settings will reset to their default values If the value exceeds the vertical range the V Top and V Bottom settings will also reset accordingly Side Cut Color Parameter Default Setting range Description Sets background color that will be visible if the converted image is set smaller than the original under Converter1 Size 5 3 3 Red Green Blue 0 0 255 R G and B components can be adjusted separately Control knob F4 allows you to adjust R G and B at the same time The Side Cut Color setting cannot be changed if Converter Process Mode is set to BY PASS Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV Conversion Table 5 3 2 168 9 2 7 Color Corrector Clicking block 7 on the video block diagram opens the Color Corrector dialog box for the corresponding FS See section 5 2 4 COLOR CORRECTOR C C for details Auto Video Optimizer AVO and Color Corrector use the same circuit The color corrector settings are not fully changeable when AVO mode 9 2 2 Auto Video Optimizer AVO is set to Auto See section 5 2 5 Color Corrector and AVO Modes for the available menu settings 2 Color Corrector FS1 Mozilla Firefox 2 Color Corrector FS2 Mozilla Firefox
288. o signals When no S2016 3 is in the FS1 output video signal 6 4 6 Menu button STATUS OTHER 2016 3 ABSENT FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK If ANC MODE in 5 9 6 ANC SET is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting PASS or BLANK is displayed When S2016 3 is in the FS1 output video signal 016 3 PRE D 02 AR 0 E T 1 SENT S2 AF 4 16 9 D 10000000 00000000 AFD Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format AR Aspect Ratio is displayed in binary format 0 4 3 1 16 9 The detected AFD type is shown on the third row D Detected Data1 8 are displayed in hexadecimal format ee See section 20 6 AFD Code Abbreviations for details on AFD types 95 5 10 25 VI OUT Displays whether the RP186 VI ancillary data is inserted into FS1 FS2 output video signals When no RP186 VI is in the output video signal Menu button RP186 VI ABSENT STATUS OTHER FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK If ANC MODE in 5 9 6 ANC SET is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting PASS or BLANK is displayed When RP186 VI is in the output video signal 647 Menu button VI 6 PRESENT 02 55 02 STATUS 16 9 TOP FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK 2 D2 02 D3 02 OTHER Displays the status of RP186 VI Video Index Class1 AFD Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format SS Scanning System is displayed in hexadecimal format The detected AFD type is shown on the third row D1 D3 Detecte
289. o will be determined 4 3 L 16 9PRTD according to the setting made under 5 9 7 ANC 43 L 14 9 LOSS SET AFD 4 3 4 3 F ALT14 To output video signals in 4 3 select either ratio 4 3 L ALT14 9 1_ With 4 3 To output in 16 9 select either ratio 4 3 L ALT 4 3 4 With 16 9 Other options will output video 16 9 L gt 16 9 signals in the specified aspect ratio See section 16 9 F 16 9 1 20 About AFD Active Format Description for 16 9P 4 3 i details Aspect 16 9 FPRTD 1 Options 4 3 L 16 9 T to 16 9 F ALT 4 3 other Ratio 16 9 P 14 9 1 than the above four require the input signal 16 9 P ALT 14 9 1 aspect ratio to be specified under SD Aspect in 16 9 F ALT14 9 1 9 2 1 FS Input Select if the input signal is an SD 16 9 F ALT4 3 1 Signal Selectable aspect ratios when CONV is set to AFD 1080i 720p 1080PsF or 1080 3G AFD ALT AFD and AFD ALT automatically select an 16 9 L gt 16 9 aspect ratio according to the AFD data in the 16 9 F 16 9 input signal If no AFD data is found in the input AED 16 9 P 4 3 signal the aspect ratio will be determined 16 9 F PRTD according to the setting made under 5 9 7 ANC 16 9 P 14 9 LOSS SET 16 9 P ALT14 9 Options other than the above two output in the 16 9 F ALT14 9 specific aspect ratio See section 20 About 16 9 F ALT4 3 AFP for details on conversions according to AFD data The Aspect Ratio setting cannot be changed if Converter Process Mode is set to BY PASS 1 BT1119 WSS wil
290. ogo format and converter output video format do not match The keyer of the relevant FS is turned off 8 Shown if the FA 95ALA option is installed in option slot A 9 Shown if the FA 95ALA option is installed in option slot B INPUT FUNCTION Function Mode Description NONE No function Sets BY PASS ON OFF for SDI IN 1 to SDI OUT 1 BY PASS SDI1 Level Shorted to GND BY PASS ON OPEN BY PASS OFF Sets BY PASS ON OFF for SDI IN 2 to SDI OUT 3 BY PASS SDI2 Level Shorted to GND BY PASS ON OPEN BY PASS OFF Sets BY PASS ON OFF for COMPOSITE IN to COMPOSITE OUT Se Level Shorted to GND BY PASS ON OPEN BY PASS OFF E Sets FREEZE ON OFF for each FS FS1 FS2 FREEZE Level Shorted to GND FREEZE ON OPEN FREEZE OFF Selects FULL CB color bar for the test signal for each FS FS1 FS2 FULL CB Level Shorted to GND FULL CB ON OPEN FULL CB OFF Selects 7596 CB for the test signal for each FS FS1 FS2 75 CB Level Shorted to GND 75 CB ON OPEN 75 CB OFF Selects SMPTE CB for the test signal for each FS FS1 FS2 SMPTE CB Level Shorted to GND SMPTE CB ON OPEN SMPTE CB OFF Selects RAMP for the test signal for each FS FS1 FS2 RAMP Level Shorted to GND RAMP ON OPEN RAMP OFF Sets AUDIO test signal ON for each FS FS1 FS2 AUDIO Level Shorted to GND AUDIO test signal ON OPEN AUDIO test signal OFF Sets AES and ANALOG AUDIO test signals ON EXT AUDIO Level
291. ompatible Added BY PASS function to FA 95AIO GPI FLOR Sind higher Added option slot change warning feature SOFT 2 00 or higher Enhanced FA 95ALA measurement accuracy FPGA1 1 00 FPGA2 1 10 FPGA1 1 12 or higher FA 10DCCRU Modified FA 10DCCRU to add FA 9520 support FPGA2 1 10 or higher FA 10DCCRU SOFT Ver 1 00 FPGA1 2 Ver 1 00 or FPGA3 1 00 or higher higher compatible SOFT 8 03 or higher 1 Version information can be seen as described in section 7 8 UNIT Ver Precautions Important Safety Warnings Power A Caution Operate unit only on the specified supply voltage Disconnect power cord by connector only Do not pull on cable portion Q A Stop Do not place or drop heavy or sharp edged objects on power cord A damaged cord can cause fire or electrical shock hazards Regularly check power cord for excessive wear or damage to avoid possible fire electrical hazards Grounding e Caution Ensure unit is properly grounded at all times to prevent electrical shock hazard gt Hazard Do not ground the unit to gas lines units or fixtures of an explosive or dangerous nature e Caution Ensure power cord is firmly plugged into AC outlet Operation gt Hazard Do not operate unit in hazardous or potentially explosive atmospheres Doing so could result in fire explosion or other dangerous results gt Hazard Do not allow li
292. on is not installed in option slot A 7 Not shown if the FA 95ALA option is not installed in option slot B Auto Channel Pairing for NON PCM Audio Inputs The FA 9520 recognizes NON PCM audio input signals in L R channel pair units and adjusts assignments according to the signal selected for the L channel L R channel pairs are such as CH1 and CH2 CH3 and CH4 CH15 abd CH16 as an example in EMB1 The channel assignments that are changed by the adjustment will be shown with gt as CH1 x EMB1 CH1 112 6 5 3 AES OUT REMAP Menu button PROCESS SDI AUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an AES audio channel to CH SEL CH1 CH1 CH8 output audio signal from CH1 through 8 EMB1 CH1 16 EMB2 CH1 16 AES CH1 8 ANALOG CH1 4 DOWN MIX1 L DOWN MIX1 R DOWN MIX2 L DOWN MIX2 R 500Hz TONE 1KHz TONE SILENCE Dolby DECA CH1 8 Selects an audio signal to be ASSIGN AES CH1 8 q output to the AES audio channel Fab Gh E 2 selected under CH SEL Dolby ENCA CH1 2 Dolby DECB CH1 8 Dolby DMB L 4 Dolby DMB R Dolby ENCB CH1 2 5 E LOUD1A 9 R LOUD2A C LOUD1B 7 LFE LOUD2B 7 Ls A Rs Displays the source signal input SDI IN1 channel of the embedded audio FROM SDI IN2 signal for EMB1 CH1 CH16 or Ep EMB2 CH1 CH16 selected under ASSIGN 1 If the AES connector is set to be used for input the selected AES c
293. op Letterbox gt 16 9 4 3 Fullframe 4 3 Letterbox 16 9 Letterbox 14 9 Fullframe 4 3 Alt 14 9 Letterbox 16 9 Alt 14 9 Letterbox 16 9 Alt 4 3 Letterbox gt 16 9 16 9 Fullframe 16 9 Pillarbox 4 3 Fullframe 16 9 Protected Pillarbox 14 9 Pillarbox 4 3 Alt 14 9 Fullframe 16 9 Alt 14 9 Fullframe 16 9 alt 4 3 Nas 000 X D0NAwDN fa952FS1ConverterAspectSD INTEGER FS1Aspect HD AFD AFD ALT Letterbox gt 16 9 Fullframe 16 9 Pillarbox 4 3 Fullframe 16 9 Protected Pillarbox 14 9 Pillarbox 4 3 Alt 4 9 Fullframe 16 9 Alt 14 9 Fullframe 16 9 alt 4 3 fa952FS1ConverterAspectHD INTEGER FS1CONV IMPROVE FS1Motion Sense Field Frame Odd 1st Frame Even 1st Adaptive PONAOBAOARWN RO fa952FS1ConverterMotionSense INTEGER FS1Enhance 0 8 fa952FS1ConverterEnhance INTEGER FS1Antialias H 8 0 8 fa952FS1ConverterAntiAliasH INTEGER FS1Antialias V 8 0 8 fa952FS1ConverterAntiAliasV INTEGER ggo O OJQO O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 2 7 FS2Converter FS2 Converter FS2 Converter FS2CONV MODE BY PASS SD 1080 720p 1080PsF 1080p 3G fa952FS2ConvertMode INTEGER O O FS2 Aspect SD AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 AFD 16 9 AFD 16 9 Letterbox 16 9 top Letterbox 14 9 top Letterbox gt 16 9 4 3 Fullframe 4 3 Letterbox 16 9 Letterbox 14 9 Fullframe 4 3 Al
294. or Fade In and Out transitions 1 To use this function the audio delay must be set longer than the total Fade In Out Time and Silence Detect Time Ex If Fade Time is set to 12 ms the audio delay must be longer than 14 msec i e 12 2msec Silence Detect Time IMPORTANT Fade In Out may not function properly for the switching between AES input signals whose sampling rates are different or that are asynchronous Digital Audio Parameter Default Setting range Description AES Input AES1 2 and 3 4 connectors are set to be 1 2 3 4 input Input input connectors l O Settin a Output Output AES1 2 and 3 4 connectors are set to be 9 output connectors AES Input AES5 6 and 7 8 connectors are set to be 5 6 7 8 indt Input input connectors l O Settin p Output Output AES5 6 and 7 8 connectors are set to be 9 output connectors Reference 18dBFS Selects the reference level for digital audio Level 20dBFS 20dBFS signals See section 11 ANALOG DIGITAL 24dBFS Audio Input Output Level for details ee Selects an audio application for digital audio f rofessional channels Grade Professional Consumer Professional Optimized for professional use Consumer Optimized for consumer use Resolution 24Bit ze Selects an audio word length for Digital Audio 16Bit output signals 1 All connectors are set to be input connectors and this menu will be disabled if the optional FA 95DACBL is in
295. or of the ladder strap toward the unit Insert the anchor into the hole next to the AC IN socket Lightly fasten the clip around the AC cord Plug in the power cord Slide the clip on the ladder strap toward the plug Fasten the clip tightly Gently pull on the AC cord to ensure it is secured 5 2 yc 4 Y 1 Unpluging the AC cord 1 Push the tab on the retaining up to unfasten the clip 2 Push the tab on the ladder strap up and slide the clip back 3 Unplug the AC cord Table of Contents Prior to Start iio rt td red 15 ll Wel COME sta e Oe bti ttes 15 A ee 15 1 3 FA 95LG GUI Download ra iin aea ea aiae na aoa A ERa aaa enne ener e AEEA aa nnn nennen nens 15 2 Panel Descriptions oooccnccccccnncnnnnnnnnonnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnin 16 2 1 Front Panel EE E S 16 2 2 Rear Pane lae A AA a E reed einen 18 2 3 Internal Settings dete A fee EV ve eee fede 21 2 3 1 Dipswitch Settings 6t etre e P n Pa ier ele eee UE ba Perte 21 Ss Gonriectlons ser dete oT teret eec el de bte en a el Ee ee tes 22 3 1 For 2 Channel Frame Synchronizer Use ssssssssssssssseeee eene 22 3 2 For HD SD SDI Simul Output ssssssssssssssseeeeeenene eene nennen 23 3 3 To Embed AES Input Signals on SDI Signals ssssssssseeeee 24 3 4 To Embed Analog Audio Signals on
296. otal amount of delay set TOTAL for the audio channel that is selected under CH SEL OFFSET MASTER 6 6 2 EMB2 IN DELAY Menu button CH SEL CLIP ORFAS EGTA 0 ms MASTER 4 ms DELAY TOTAL 4ms Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an embedded audio channel CHISEE ST Cite CHIG in FS2 for which to set delay Sets the delay for the audio channel that OFFSET Omsec 996ms 996ms ig selected under CH SEL Sets the offset to the delay for all MASTER 4msec 4ms 1000ms audio channels CH1 to 16 Displays the total amount of delay set TOTAL for the audio channel that is selected under CH SEL OFFSET MASTER 6 6 3 AES IN DELAY Menu button CH SELS CLIP OFFSET 0ms MASTER 4 ms DELAY TOTAL 4ms Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an AES audio channel for CHSEL eH Cit Hs which to set delay Sets the delay for the audio channel that OFFSET Omsec 996ms 996ms ig selected under CH SEL Sets the offset to the delay for all MASTER 4msec 4ms 1000ms audio channels CH1 to 8 Displays the total amount of delay set TOTAL for the audio channel that is selected under CH SEL OFFSET MASTER 115 6 6 4 ANALOG IN DELAY ANALOG IN DELAY Menu button C H aS EEC HT CEPS ET 0 ms CLIP MASTER 4 ms DELAY TOTAL 4ms Parameter Default Setting range Description
297. output video image LEVEL 0 to 8 low to high Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively 1 ANTIALIAS and ENHANCE settings cannot be changed if CONV MODE is set to BY PASS or the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV Conversion Table see section 5 3 2 In both cases the menu as shown below will be displayed IMPORTANT Setting MOTION to FRM ODD 1st or FRM EVEN 1st for input signals other than progressive segment frame inputs causes motion artifacts to appear In such case change the MOTION setting to FIELD or ADAPTIVE 45 5 3 6 CONV SIDE RGB 10 Menu button CONV1 ANALOG FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Parameter Default Setting range Description Sets background color that will be visible if the converted image is set smaller than original in CONV SIZE POS 5 3 3 0 0 255 R G and B components can be adjusted separately F4 control knob allows you to adjust R G and B at the same time Adjusts the R G and B components separately then turns this Group Adjust Group Adjust 0 0 255 on Changing any R G or B value will Group Adjustment change the values of the three components accordingly while retaining the proportion Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively RED GREEN BLUE Background color If the CONV mode is set to BY PASS the CONV SIDE RGB setting cannot be changed Also it cannot be changed if the con
298. p of the page The Network page will be displayed in os LE es ey EE atthe top left click NETWORK SETTING to go to the NETWORK SETTING screen In the same way click SNMP SETTING TRAP SETTING USER SETTING or NETWORK RESTART to go to the respective page 9 8 1 Network Information Network Information LAN 1 IP Address 192 168 0 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Unused MAC Address 00 10 B1 08 40 0B Remote Port Number 50010 Logo Port Number 50020 Displays the network settings of the LAN1 port on the rear panel 9 8 2 NETWORK SETTING LAN 1 Port Setting IP Address 192 168 0 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Remote Port Number 50010 Logo Port Number 50020 Refresh Time 10 second 1 65535 IMPORTANT The web page may not be properly displayed if your PC does not have sufficient capacity CPU memory etc In such case set Refresh Time to a value larger than 30 The LAN1 port network settings screen will be displayed Item Default Description Allows you to set the LAN1 port IP address A IP Address 192 168 0 10 period is used to separate each octet Allows you to set the LAN1 port subnet mask A Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 period is used to separate each octet Allows you to set the gateway A period is used to Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 separate each octet Remote Port 50010 Allows you to set the TCP port number for the Number FA 95RU
299. p p Pb Pr 0 525 Vp p Analog RGB 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC R G and B 1 ea 3G SDI 3 Gbps or HD SDI 1 5 Gbps or SD SDI 270Mbps 750 BNC x 4 2 x 2 outputs Analog Composite 1 0Vp p 750 BNC x 2 SDTV YPbPr 750 BNC Y Pb and Pr 1ea Y 1 0 Vp p Pb Pr 0 525 Vp p SMPTE level 0 757 Vp p BETACAM level SMPTE and BETACAM menu selectable Analog RGB 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC R G and B 1 ea Y C 1 0Vp p 750 BNC Y and C 1 ea HDTV YPbPr 750 BNC Y Pb and Pr 1ea Y 1 0 Vp p Pb Pr 0 525 Vp p Analog RGB 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC R G and B 1 ea 3 inputs standard or 4 inputs maximum input gt 1 processing lt 2 x 2 outputs 4 2 2 Digital Component 3G HD SD SDI 10 bit Analog Composite 12 bit 100 kHz to 4 2 MHz 0 5 dB to 0 5 dB 4 2 MHz to 5 0 MHz 1 0 dB to 1 0 dB roll off above 5 0 MHz NTSC composite 100 kHz to 4 2 MHz 0 5 dB to 0 5 dB 4 2 MHz to 5 5 MHz 1 0 dB to 1 0 dB roll off above 5 5 MHz PAL composite 1 1 composite 60 dB without quantization noise composite BB NTSC 0 429 Vp p PAL 0 45 Vp p or Tri level Sync 0 6 Vp p 750 BNC x 1 loop through Terminate with 750 terminator if unused 278 Synchronizer mode System Phase Control Frame Sync mode Line Sync mode AVDL mode Video Delay Video Processing Functions Proc Amp Video Clip Color Correction Audio Input Embedded Audio AES EBU Analog Audio Audio Output Embedded Audio AES
300. pairs CH 1 2 to 7 8 to GROUP A CH 1 2 will be the reference Other channel pairs will be synchronized to the word clock of CH1 2 When setting channels CH1 2 to 3 4 to GROUP A and channels CH5 6 to 7 8 to GROUP B CH 1 2 will be the reference pair for GROUP A and CH 5 6 the reference pair for GROUP B IMPORTANT Channel pairs in an audio group must be synchronous and must have the same sampling rate Changing the audio assignment of the reference channel pair may cause noise on other channel pairs in the same audio group Also changing the assignment may affect the phase alignment of the reference and other channel pairs If the alignment is turned off set MASTER MUTE see section 6 4 1 MASTER OUT GAIN on and off or turn the unit power off and on to regain the alignment 104 6 2 3 AES OUT MONO Menu button CC AES AUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Description CH SEL CH1 2 CH1 2 7 8 Selects a stereo pair of AES output audio channels MONO SUM DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE ENABLE Outputs the stereo pair channels that are selected under CH SEL as a mono sum The signals of the selected pair channels are added and devided by two to output from each channel If the AES connector is set to be used for input the menu display for the selected AES output audio channel appears as CH1 See section 6 2 4 AES I O SETUP and change the setting if nece
301. passes audio signals through SRC PCM SRC 7 and selects audio clock input in the Bypass NON PCM signal channel for SDI AUDIO AES Mute CLOCK CH1 2 CH7 8 PCM Treats audio signals as PCM standard audio signal By passes audio signals through SRC and select REFERENCE for SDI AUDIO CLOCK Mute Treats audio signals as mute signals 1 Channel status and Validity Bit of input audio channel status can be checked using a wave form monitor 2 Processes the audio signal as described if 9 3 5 SRC Mode is set to Auto 3 Processes the audio signal as described if 9 3 10 SDI Audio Output Settings is set to Auto e Validity FA 9520 determins whether the input audio signal is PCM or NON PCM by Validity Bit V Bit in audio signal If Validity Bit V Bit is incorrect the audio signal may cause inproper processing For such case this setting may effective processing the audio signal normally IMPORTANT Please use this setting only if there is audio noise or the audio is muted Otherwise do not change the setting from In Data 209 9 4 3 ANC Settings FA 9520 Logout gt FS1 Video System gt FS2 Video System gt Audio System gt ANC Settings Composite Settings FS1 ANC Detect Line FS1 ANC Data Embed FS1 ANC Loss Mode Settings Anc RP186 VI ANC CEA608 CO v ANC 52016 3 AFD Format 525 60 Y Format 525 60 Format SD Y Field 1 14Line v Embed Disable Y Mode Remove v Field 2 27
302. put Selection Direct Input Selection and Dolby Decoder Output signals cannot be input to the Dolby encoder together Dolby Digital signal output from the Dolby decoder Dolby Decoder Output cannot be encoded to the Dolby E signal 2 Not shown if the FA 95ALA option is not installed in option slot A 3 Not shown if the FA 95ALA option is not installed in option slot B Dolby Encoder Mode Setting Parameter Default Setting range Description 5 142 1 5 142x1 1 444 1 4 2x2 4 2 2x1 4 4x1 4x2 3x2 2x1 2x2 4x1 2 6x1 1 8x1 Program 5 1 Configuration pele 4 2 4 2x1 3x2 2x2 2x1 2 4x1 6x1 Selects Dolby E encoder program configuration L4 7 1 Screen 20bit Selects the bit width of the Dolby E Bit Depth 20bit 16bit encoder output FS1 Selects a video output to which the Frame REF FS1 FS2 Dolby E encoder output is S synchronized FS 1 or FS 2 Selects a metadata to be used for Dolby E encoding Internal Uses the Program Configuration and Bit Depth settings Other metadata will be reset to Meta Data Internal default Input intemal Dolby Decoder Output Dolby Decoder Output Uses the metadata of the Dolby E signal input to the Dolby decoder Program Configuration and Bit Depth will be ineffective 1 If Bit Depth is set to 16bit the gt will be displayed and the program functions as 5 1 To select these configurations set Bit Depth to 20bit 198
303. quids metal pieces or other foreign materials to enter the unit Doing so could result in fire other hazards or unit malfunction e If foreign material does enter the unit turn power off and disconnect power cord immediately Remove material and contact authorized service representative if damage has occurred Transportation e Caution Handle with care to avoid shocks in transit Shocks may cause malfunction When you need to transport the unit use the original packing materials or alternate adequate packing Circuitry Access Do not remove covers panels casing or access circuitry with power applied to the unit Turn power off and disconnect power cord prior to removal Internal servicing adjustment of unit should only be performed by qualified personnel oe Stop Do not touch any parts circuitry with a high heat factor Capacitors can retain enough electric charge to cause mild to serious shock even after power is disconnected Capacitors associated with the power supply are especially hazardous Avoid contact with any capacitors gt Hazard Unit should not be operated or stored with cover panels and or casing removed Operating unit with circuitry exposed could result in electric shock fire hazards or unit malfunction Potential Hazards A Caution If abnormal smells or noises are noticed coming from the unit turn power off immediat
304. r Default Setting range Steps Description H 1080 0 1375 1375 Adjusts the horizontal and Horizontal Phase CLK vertical phases of the 072 system referring to genlock V 1080 1 FRAME 563 563 signal This setting is Vertical Phase Mis LINE applied to 1080 format LINE AVDL output signals H720 0 2063 2063 Adjusts the horizontal and Horizontal Phase CLK vertical phases of the 072 system referring to genlock V 720 7 FRAME 375 375 signal This setting is Vertical Phase 12 LINE applied to 720 format LINE AVDL output signals 1 The settings are not available if there is no reference signal input In such case the menu as shown below will be displayed H V H V 1 1 7 7 2 The default value varies depending on the SYNCHRO setting in section 5 9 1 FS MODE SET and the setting in section 5 6 1 FS INPUT SELECT as shown in the below table The set value will be reset to its relevant default value whenever the SYNCHRO setting is changed SYNCHRO IN SEL Default FRAME 0 SDI1 2 1 COMPOSITE 525 60 3 LINE COMPOSITE 625 50 4 COMPONENT Y C 4 COMPONENT others 1 SDI1 2 1 COMPOSITE 525 60 3 AVDL COMPOSITE 625 50 4 COMPONENT Y C 4 COMPONENT others 1 71 5 9 3 SD PHASE SET 6 3 Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Setting range E Parameter Defaul
305. r I O settings AES CH1 8 1 OZTU v ANALOG CH1 4 85 AUD UTPUTI Menu button SDI1 2 EMB1 CH1 PPPP NNNN SSSS STATUS SDI 3 4 E MB 2 CH1 PPPP TEN 1 KMS Parameter Display Description Displays information on SDI 1 2 output audio signals CH1 P through 16 in 16 characters on the 2nd line from top S P PCM Normal audio signal ua chee N S Silence Mute signal E N NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 B No embedded audio B BY PASS Video signal is bypassed and output Displays information on SDI 3 4 output audio signals CH1 P through 16 in 16 characters on the 4th line from top S P PCM Normal audio signal uu er N S Silence Mute signal E N NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 B No embedded audio B BY PASS Video signal is bypassed and output 1 See section 5 3 1 CONV MODE for details on SDI output signal by pass settings AUD OUTP Menu button AES CH1 8 PPSS NN STATUS ANALOG CH1 4 OTHER PP Parameter Display Description Displays information on AES output audio signals CH1 P through 8 in 8 characters on the 2nd line from top S P PCM Normal audio signal AES CITUR N S Silence Mute signal N NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 I Input AES connector is set for input use ANALOG CH 1 4 Displays information on ANALOG output audio signals CH1 through 4 in 4 characters
306. r saturation levels SEPIA Sepia mode Useful for creating black and white images Selects a gamma curve type If MODE is set to SEPIA the menu as shown below will be displayed Setting range m Parameter Default Steps Description SEPIALEVEL 25 096 ovo Adjusts the color level in the SEPIA mode SEPIA COLOR 160 0 ii 250 Adjusts the color in the SEPIA mode 39 5 2 5 Color Corrector and AVO Modes Auto Video Optimizer and Color Corrector use the same circuit The color corrector settings are not fully changeable when AVO mode is set to Auto See section 5 4 1 AVO SETTING Changeable Color Corrector menus according to AVO modes AUTO T ar OFF Color Corrector Menus Y Y WHITE LEVEL Y Y BLACK LEVEL Y Y GAMMA LEVEL Y CORRECTION MODE CURVE Y Enabled setting Disabled setting IMPORTANT DIFFERENTIAL and SEPIA mode settings under COLOR CORRECT will automatically change to BALANCE mode whenever AVO is enabled While AVO is being used the color corrector performs correction as if MODE is set to BALANCE and CURVE is set to BLACK in the COLOR CORRECT menu Color correction enabled by setting AVO Control to HOLD is also performed in the above state 40 5 3 CONV UP DOWN CROSS CONVERTER Both FS1 and FS2 are supported in up down cross conversions as well as aspect ratio conversion according to S2016 VI or WSS
307. roup are PCM Group 3 Reference CH 9 10 Reference Audio clock synchronize with the CH 11 12 output video signal Used to synchronize audio with the video signals processed in the SRC CH 1 2 to 15 16 An input audio clock in channels Auto 1 2 to 15 16 Group 4 Reference Reference To output asynchronous audio signals select one CH 13 14 input channel pair for each group CH 15 16 For SD SDI outputs Reference is automatically selected regardless of the setting 1 Embedded audio signals are divided into 4 groups Each group consists of 4 audio channels Group 1 CH 1 to 4 Group 2 CH 5 to 8 Group 3 CH 9 to 12 Group 4 CH 13 to 16 The audio signals in the same group are transmitted together using the same audio clock 48kHz PCM audio signals will be synchronized to a genlock signal in the SRC sampling rate converter so as to synchronize with the output video signal Non PCM audio signals compressed audio data such as AC 3 do not go into SRC If the non PCM audio input signal is asynchronous with the output video signal the non PCM audio output signal will be asynchronous The asynchronous non PCM audio signals can be embedded to SDI video signals by selecting an audio clock for each audio group To do so all 4 channels in the respective audio groups must be synchronous Assign 4 synchronous audio signals to channels in a group 191 9 3 11 AES Audio Output Settings Clicking block 16 on the audio bloc
308. s ssssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeenee nennen nennen nennen rennen 214 O IEEE 215 9 6 Utility Settings 4 Ae wee A erie hese 217 9 6 1 Event Gontlol ente rena tia raise air gusten es 218 9 6 2 Backup Parameter cccccccssecceecccccceeseeceeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeeuaeeeeeeeeseeeaaaaeeeeeeeesaaes 219 9 6 3 Downloading a MIB File i i nn nr 220 9 6 4 Event Data BACKUP n He hc ede tt UR e diet 221 9 7 Status DIS play oo ro A eee ore dte ee AE 222 9 721 Urit Video Status uii tate ae a ferre o 222 9 7 2 Audio Status in eiie ee n Rp er eee e er ret e egal 225 9 7 3 Unit Information essssssssssssseseeeeeeneenmm nennen enne EEEE EEEE nennen nennen nenne 227 927 4 ANG Status Ree EU e Gr Re I ER Re Eee RU ned a Ue FERE A 228 9 8 Network Settings 2 0 2 2 ccecccccecce cece eeeeecee i eiaeaen SE eA DAAE EEEE EEE AAE AATRES AEE 231 9 8 1 Network Information neonoir e A A a eara E eaaa 231 9 8 2 NETWORK SETTING oooooooconccccccnononconononcnnononnncnnnnnnnononannncanannnnnnnnnnnnnanannenencnnanananas 231 9 8 3 SNMP SETTING 2000 id eee hd 232 9 8 4 TRAP SETTIN 00 en NA A e m a eR 234 9 8 5 USER SETTING itat c Dr e n M e 235 9 6 6 Restartz ii iw Re ess aget ete 235 10 Downmix Block DiagraM oocccccccncccnccnnncnnnnnnonnnonononononononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnonnnenaconecennss 236 11 ANALOG DIGITAL Audio Input Output Level sssss
309. s and the control knob for the setting that has changed will blink in the setting change confirming state Pressing the single down arrow button confirms the change and LEDs stop blinking then light Pressing the single up arrow button cancels the change the setting returns to before the change and LEDs stop blinking then light While the FA 9520 is in a setting change confirming state all buttons except single arrow buttons control knobs F1 to F4 and their Unity buttons are disabled To go to other menus press either single arrow button to complete the confirmation 34 4 2 7 Resetting to Default lt NORMAL mode gt The UNITY indicator light goes off when the setting value is changed from the default value Pressing the UNITY button while the light is off returns the corresponding setting value to the default value Then the light goes off Pressing the button again returns the value to the previous value before resetting to the default value NB F2 F3 FA Press the UNITY button to unr unm un unr reset the value The indicator a lights up orange lt LIVE SAFE mode gt The UNITY indicator light goes off when the setting value is changed from default Pressing the UNITY button while the light is off returns the corresponding setting value to default When a setting value is changed the single down arrow button and the LED around the control knob corresponding to the changed setting blinks in the setting change con
310. s determines the lowest level of luminance for level control If the value is too small some noise may be picked up causing the results to become unstable If the value is too large it increases contrast but it may cause the images to be underexposed Target White Level and Target Black Level These two parameters determine the highest and lowest levels of luminance for target images outputs Parameter Setting range step Description Target White Level 60 0 100 0 0 5 Determines the maximum value of luminance for outputs The maximum luminance value of the image after correction should approximate this value The larger the value the brighter the image which may however cause the image to be overexposed The smaller the value the brighter tones are kept However the overall obtained image may be dark Target Black Level 0 40 0 0 5 Determines the minimum value of luminance for outputs The minimum luminance value of the image after correction should approximate this value The larger the value the dark area in pictures will appear brighter which may however lower the contrast and the noise will become apparent The smaller the value the higher the contrast which may however cause the image to be underexposed 160 9 2 2 3 User Area 1 2 Clicking Set Area of Sample Area on the AVO setting dialog box opens the User Area 1 2 Setting dialog
311. s set to SDI1 in the FS gt INPUT SELECT menu section 5 6 1 Otherwise 1080 59p a is displayed 1080 50p BY PASS UNKNOWN LOSS 525 60 625 50 1080 59i Displays the video format of the SDI2 input signal 1080 50 Displays LOSS if there is no input signal 720 59p Displays UNKNOWN if there is an unsupported input 720 50p signal FS2 SDI2 E 1080 23PsF Displays video format LOSS or UNKNOWN only if 1080 24PsF FS1 IN SEL or FS2 IN SEL is set to SDI2 in the FS 1080 59p INPUT SELECT menu section 5 6 1 Otherwise 1080 50p is displayed BY PASS UNKNOWN LOSS 525 60 Displays the video format of the COMPOSITE input COMPOSITE 625 50 signal l BY PASS Displays LOSS if there is no input signal LOSS 525 60 625 50 uda Displays the video format of the genlock input signal Displays LOSS if there is no input signal REFERENCE e Bones Displays UNKNOWN if there is an unsupported input 1080 23PsF S19 1080 24PsF PAL M UNKNOWN 1 Shown when PAL M Mode in the 5 9 15 COMPOSITE SET is set to ENABLE and an input signal in GENLOCK IN connector is 525 60 or PAL M signal 82 5 10 3 VIDEO OPTION INPUT This menu is accessible only if the FA 95AIO option is installed in slot A or B D Menu button OP A 525 60 MODE A YPbPr SMPTE STATUS OP B 525 60 MODE B YPbPr SMPTE SINE Parameter Display Description LOSS 525 60 625 50 1080 59i Displays the
312. s the horizontal start point START V 0 Line Bling Specifies the vertical start point H SIZE 360 periods et horizontal size distance from the V SIZE 360 no signal ie vertical size distance from the START V START H HSIZE Default setting of sample area in 1080 59 94i IMPORTANT The sample area should be set within the effective lines and pixels Otherwise the sample area will automatically revert to their default values Be particularly careful in the following cases When the video format is changed to SDTV after the sample area has been set When the sample area settings are changed by loading an event While the USER 1 2 AREA SET setting menu is open and the AREA is changed via web browser or the connected FA 95RU to other than USER AREAs 1 and 2 in the AVO SETTING menu 5 4 1 the menu will change to display the AVO SETTING menu 5 4 1 53 5 4 4 1 Manual Level Adjustment The FA 9520 automatically adjusts the signal level if the MODE of the AVO SETTING menu is set to AUTO see section 5 4 1 The signal level can also be manually adjusted if the MODE is set to HOLD or OFF To provide fine adjustment on the automatically adjusted level Changing the AVO MODE selection from AUTO to HOLD will enable fine adjustment of the adjusted signal levels that are provided by the automatic level adjustment However the change will not be retained after restarting the unit The signal levels re
313. same COPY FS2 gt FS1 Copies FS2 settings to FS1 FS1 and FS2 settings will become the same COPY FS1 lt gt FS2 Copies FS1 settings to FS2 and FS2 settings to FS1 Exchanged Refer to the Menus of Which Settings are Copied for the settings that will be copied This menu cannot be accessed from the FA 95RU It is better to save settings to an event memory before copying Doing so enables you to recall the settings in case the copying fails See section 8 Event Memory for details on Event memory Copy Settings Menus Menu button VIDEO menus Lit green PROCESS US VIDEO PROC AMP CC WHITE LEVEL GAMMA LEVEL AES AUDIO BLACK LEVEL COLOR CORRECT CONV1 U D MODE VIDEO IMPROVE SIZE POS SET ANALOG CEOPP NG SIDE RGB AVO 2 AVO SETTING USER1 2 AREA SET MAPPING USER1 5 LEVEL SET AVO SETUP CLIP eM YPbPr RGB CLIP COMPOSITE CLIP IN SEL VIDEO INPUT SET DOWN MIX ANC DETECT LINE ANC DETECT SEL OUT SEL E ANC DATA EMBED ANC EMBED LINE VIDEO OP USO LOGO SEL KEYER SET ES MODE SET HD PHASE ee VIDEO SYS SD PHASE SET AUG OR Nee AUDIO SYS VIDEO POSITION TEST SIGHAL FREEZE SET SD LINE MASK ANG SET 141 7 2 MU OPERATION Menu button MU OPERATION MODE FA 9520 STATUS OTHER Parameter Default Setting range Description Allows you to select an FA 9520 operation mode FA 9500 Mode in which the unit operates the same as the
314. same manner Copy All to FS1 FS2 Click Copy All to FS2 in the FS1 Proc Amp dialog box to copy FS1 Video Level Chroma Level Setup Black and Hue settings to FS2 A confirmation dialog as shown below appears Message from webpage j re you sure you want to Copy All Parameters Click OK to copy all FS1 Video Level Chroma Level Setup Black and Hue settings to FS2 Click Cancel to stop copying To copy all FS2 Video Level Chroma Level Setup Black and Hue settings to FS1 click Copy All to FS1 in the FS2 Proc Amp dialog box in the same manner IMPORTANT If Correction Mode is set to Sepia in the Color Corrector menu 9 2 7 the Chroma Level and Hue settings cannot be changed 163 9 2 5 BY PASS Setting Clicking block 5 on the video block diagram opens the BY PASS setting dialog box 2 Bypass Setting Mozilla Firefox AE 192 168 0 10 html bypass2 cgi Operate BY PASS SDI In SDI 1 Out O off O On SDI2 In SDI 3 Out O off O On Composite In Composite Out off On After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Operate BY PASS Parameter Default Setting range Description n Off Setting to On bypasses SDI1 input signals to SO Hess Ou en On SDI 1 output with a relay connection Off Setting to On bypasses SDI2 input signals to DE nSP Out an On SDI 3 output with a relay connection Composite In Off Off Setting to On bypasses composi
315. scription S334 1 Future 62 02 ITU R BT 1619 SMPTE 334 1 DTV data broadcasting S334 RP208 62 03 ITU R BT 1619 SMPTE RP208 VBI data RP196 LTC 64 64 Time code RP196 VITC 64 7F Time code RP165EDH 1F4 SMPTE error detection indication 263 20 About AFD Active Format Description The FA 9520 can provide aspect ratio conversion according to S2016 3 RP186 VI Video Index or BT1119 2 WSS Wide Screen Signalling AFD code data in the ancillary data of input video signals The below figure depicts example aspect ratio conversions using AFD code data SD SDI 4 3 rex SD SDI 4 3 HD SDI 16 9 f FA LAN ES Postage stamp Down Full frame Pillar box N gt Full frame HD SDI 16 9 X AFD Active Format Description having the SD SDI 4 3 Pe c original aspect ratio information of the input ut video enables aspect ratio conversion with Full frame an optimal image display area 16 9 Letter box N EA Postage stamp Gray regions are picture areas that may be cropped by the receiving device with no signaficant picture loss for the viewer The bounding box indicates the TAS Screen size The white region contains important image data Black regions indicate picture areas containing no useful image data that is to be cropped by the receiver as necessary 264 20 1 AFD Codes AFD 4 3 code WSS name FA 9520 specified name illustration in a 4 3 Description VI 82016 code
316. sed audio data such as AC3 BLANK UNKNOWN Unidentifiable BY PASS BLANK No audio signal embedding BY PASS By passed through 5 10 16 AES OUT AUDIO Menu button CH 1 PCM i i STATUS CH 4 P C S E AES OUT AUDIO 588 CH obest CH 6 PCM CH 7 PC CH 8 PC Parameter Display Description Displays the status of the audio signal output from the PCM DIGITAL AUDIO IO connectors SILENCE PCM Normal audio signal CH1 CH8 NON PCM SILENCE Mute signal UNKNOWN NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 INPUT SETTING UNKNOWN Unidentifiable INPUT SETTING Connector is set to input ce 1 5 10 17 ANALOG OUT AUDIO 0G 0 Menu button CH IS IG EAN CE CH 2 09 LOENCCE STATUS CH 3 Sd ENG E CH 4 SILENCE SER Parameter Display Description Displays the status of the output audio signal CH1 CH4 SILENCE from the ANALOG AUDIO connector OUT SILENCE Mute signal OUT Output signal is present 5 10 18 Dolby OPA AUX This menu is displayed only if FA 95D D option is installed in option slot A DolBy OPA AUX 591 Menu button INPUT A LOSS OUTPUT A NONE STATUS REFERENCE A LOSS Parameter Display Description Displays status or type of signal input to the optional Dolby input connector Dolby IN in LOSS slot A PCM LOSS No audio signal DEITA NON PCM PCM Standard audio signal UNKNOWN NON PCM Compressed audio data such as Dolby E encoded data UN
317. selected under ANC PORMAT SD HD Only compatible Video formats will be displayed If FORMAT is set to SD REMOVE HOLD 2 4 3L 16 9 T 2 4 3 L14 9 T 2 4 3 L gt 16 9 4 3 F 4 3 2 4 3 L16 9PRTD 4 3 L 14 9 4 3 F ALT14 9 4 3 L ALT14 9 MODE can be set for respective ANC 4 3 L ALT 4 3 and FORMAT selections 16 9 L gt 16 9 REMOVE Does not embed the 16 9 F FRM ancillary data to either FS1 or 2 16 9 P 4 3 HOLD Retains the last ancillary data MODE REMOVE 16 9 F PRTD aspect ratio and outputs video signal in 16 9 E 14 9 the aspect ratio E A Other values operate according to the 16 9 F ALT4 3 selected AFD as an input AFD BT1119 WSS selected under ANC can If FORMAT is set to HD only select AFD codes indicated by REMOVE HOLD 16 9 L gt 16 9 16 9 F 16 9 16 9 P 4 3 16 9 F PRTD 16 9 P 14 9 16 9P ALT14 9 16 9F ALT14 9 16 9F ALT4 3 Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively 1 HD is selectable only when ANC is set to S2016 3 2 BT1119 WSS selected under ANC can only select the AFD codes above indicated by 75 5 9 8 WSS AFD ERROR Allows you to select the operation mode when the aspect ratio conversion result is not standarized by WSS and embedding WSS AFD ancillary data to FS1 and or 2 is enabled Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Parameter Default Setting range Description REMOVE REVOVE Does not embed BT1119 WSS to FS1 and or 2 MODE REMOVE F
318. settings To convert aspect ratios according to AFD codes set basic operational settings in the VIDEO SYSTEM menus as follows Set ANC MODE to DETAIL in ANC SET Sec 5 9 6 Specify the line to detect RP186VI or BT1119 WSS in ANC DETECT LINE Sec 5 6 3 The line must be correctly set for RP186VI and BT1119 WSS detection S2016 3 data is automatically obtained from input signals AFD data in S2016 3 is automatically obtained from the input HD SDI signals Select an AFD type to detect for SD SDI input signals under AFD in ANC DETECT SEL Sec 5 6 4 Select the AFD data to insert and which output to insert the data in ANC DATA EMBED Sec 5 7 4 These settings are necessary when inserting AFD data into video signals to be output from CONV1 and or 2 To enable devices that receive signals from FA 9520 to detect ancillary data select the ancillary data type output video format s for CONV1 and or 2 output s and line number into which the data is to be inserted in the ANC EMBED LINE menu Sec 5 7 5 The default setting should be set to the line number usually used Select the operation mode when AFD input is lost in ANC LOSS SET Sec 5 9 7 AFD verification Auto aspect ratio conversion according to AFD data cannot be performed if there is no AFD data present in the input signal Whether the AFD data is detected can be verified in AFD IN STATUS Sec 5 10 20 ANC1 IN STATUS Sec 5 10 21 and ANC1 IN STATUS 1 2 Sec 5 10 22 P186
319. signal Detection is disabled due to the input setting Displays information on EMB2 audio input signals CH1 through 16 in 16 characters on the 4th line from top P PCM Normal audio signal S Silence Mute signal N NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 No audio signal Detection is disabled due to the input setting 1 SDI IN1 and SDI IN2 indicate the detected SDI signal If it is displayed as SDI embedded audio signal detection is disabled due to the FS input video signal setting 2 Displayed when SDI embedded audio signal detection is disabled due to the FS input video signal setting See section 5 6 1 FS INPUT SELECT for details on FS input video signal settings EMB1 SDI IN CH1 16 1 ZOU EMB2 SDI IN2 CH1 16 1 ZOU 5 10 7 AUDIO IN DETECT2 DE T E C T 2 Menu button H N STATUS Chalet OTHER Parameter Display Description Displays information on AES input audio signals CH1 through 8 in 8 characters on the 2nd line from top P PCM Normal audio signal S Silence Mute signal N NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 O Output AES connector is set to for output use No audio signal Displays information on ANALOG input audio signals CH1 through 4 in 4 characters on the 4th line from top P Present An audio signal is present No audio signal 1 See section 6 2 4 AES I O SETUP for details on AES connecto
320. spect ratio greater than 16 9 as a vertically centered letterbox in a 16 9 coded frame Image is full frame with an aspect ratio the same as that of the 16 9 coded frame Image with a 4 3 aspect ratio as a horizontally centered pillarbox image in a 16 9 coded frame Image is full frame with a 16 9 aspect ratio and all image areas protected Image with a 14 9 aspect ratio as a horizontally centered pillarbox image in a 16 9 coded frame Image with a 4 3 aspect ratio and alternative 14 9 centered pillarbox image in a 16 9 coded frame Image with a 16 9 aspect ratio and alternative 14 9 center ina 16 9 coded frame Image with a 16 9 aspect ratio and alternative 4 3 center in a 16 9 coded frame 20 2 Aspect Ratio Conversion with AFD 4 3 to 16 9 conversion Input AFD Input AFD Illustration in a 4 3 SD AFD 16 9 conv SD AFD ALT 16 9 conv WSS VI S2016 coded frame HD AFD conversion HD AFD ALT conversion BOX 16 9 TOP 4 3L 16 9 T BOX 14 9 TOP 4 3 L 14 9 T BOX 16 9 CTR 4 3 L gt 16 9 MEE F 4 3 4 3 F 4 3 a M a PN se BOX 16 9 CTR 4 3L16 9PRTD BOX 14 9CTR 4 3 L 14 9 F 14 9 CTR 4 3 F ALT14 9 Aaa PRTD None 4 3L ALT 14 9 None 4 3 LALT 4 3 267 4 3 to 4 3 conversion Input AFD Input AFD Illustration in a 4 3 AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 WSS VI S2016 coded frame conversion conversion BOX 16 9 TOP 4 3L 16 9 T BOX 14 9 TOP 4 3L 14 9 T BOX 16 9CTR 4 3 L gt 16 9 M
321. spective ports to control the FA 9520 Connect a device to the REMOTE connector e See section 14 REMOTE for details on pin assignments and triggers e See section 7 6 GPI SETTING for details on function assignments for the ports 27 4 Front Panel Operation 4 1 Powering ON Turn the power ON after all system connections are complete The indicators on the front panel light up during startup When startup is complete the indicators will go off and the VIDEO IN STATUS menu showing the current input video and reference signal formats will be displayed If Logo data is stored A loading progress message is displayed in the menu display as shown below Logo data may take up to 2 5 minutes to load LOADING LOGO DATA 00 COMPLETE 4 2 Basic Operation This section explains how to select menus and parameters Most of the menus can be controlled by these basic operations However some menus work differently See the descriptions given for each menu for details The FA 9520 has two modes for the menu operation NORMAL mode in which setting changes immediately take effect and LIVE SAFE mode in which some settings request confirmation before changes take effect NORMAL and LIVE SAFE modes can be selected in the FRONT OPERATION menu sec 7 4 Fac
322. ssary 6 2 4 AES I O SETUP Menu button CC AES AUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Description INPUT AES1 2 and 3 4 connectors are INPUT set to be input connectors AEST NEUT OUTPUT OUTPUT AES1 2 and 3 4 connectors are set to be output connectors INPUT AES5 6 and 7 8 connectors are INPUT set to be input connectors ARIES INPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT AES5 6 and 7 8 connectors are set to be output connectors All connectors are set as input connectors and this menu is not displayed if the FA 95DACBL option is installed 105 6 3 ANALOG AUDIO Settings ANALOG 6 3 1 ANALOG IN LEVEL Menu button C Hi Seek CHI LEVEL SET 4dBm CONV1 ANALOG Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an analog audio input CH SEL CH1 CH1 CH4 channel for which to set the signal level from channels CH1 to CH4 10dBm OdBm Sets the signal level for the analog LEVEL SET 4dBm 4dB audio input signal that is selected u under CH SEL 8dBm 6 3 2 ANALOG IN GAIN ANALOG N GAIN CH SEL CHI Menu button GAIN SET 0 0d8B MASTER 0 0dB COn ANALOG Parameter Default Seng range Description Steps CH SEL Selects an analog audio input CH1 CH1 CH4 channel for which to set the input gain from channels CH1 to CH4 Sets the input gain for the analog GAIN SET 0 0dB ES gt aay dB audio input signal that is selected f under CH SEL Sets the
323. ssseeee 237 11 1 Analog Output Level Relative to the Digital Input Level sseessesssss 237 11 2 Digital Output Level Relative to the Analog Input Level sssssssessssss 238 12 Analog Audio Connection or ri a eea ei a eae e aae aT 239 13 Dolby E Decoder Encoder Channel Assignment Table cc cccceceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeteeeees 240 14 ze 241 14 1 REMOTE Connector ree n eee re oe rte rente a Fete ea ted des 241 14 2 GB Input CC o tete edite e eo ts 241 14 3 GPI Input Control eee ettet traten it besitos Pel ber b Me egg 242 14 4 GPI Output Circuit enne errem enn nmrerrr nnn enne 243 15 How to Install the FA 95DACBL sssssssseseeee e eene enhn en nennen nnns 244 15 1 PrOCedure 5 rot ree to dfe eb a na ird vas 244 15 2 Installation Confirmation sss 245 16 Iexenim 246 16 1 FA 95AIO Pin Assignments ssssssssssssseeeeeeeee eee ener nnne nens 246 16 2 FA 95AIO Switch Setting S ren drati arinaa ei e a e ie E L o 247 17 System Requirements seiere n ae aak eE deoe eE e aa aaar 248 18 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol occcncinccociccccccccccnncoccnccnonoccnnnnnos 249 19 FA 9520 Ancillary Data Packet Name List sessseeemRHR Hee 262 20 About AFD Active Format Description eene 264 20212 AF Di COdeS p 265 20 2 Aspect Ratio Conversion with AFD
324. stalled 207 Digital Audio Silence Setting Parameter Default Setting range Description Sets the duration to determine the SDI Silence Detect 2sec 1 10sec embedded audio and AES input signals are June silent 72dBFS 66dBFS Sets the audio level to determine the SDI Silence Level 72dBFS 60dBFS embedded audio and AES input signals are 54dBFS silent 48dBFS 1 According to this setting the audio status 9 7 2 Audio Error Sense Slilence is displayed in the Audio Status page Parameter Default Setting range Description Disable Normal Sensitive Correction Normal FA 9520 can fade and mute audio when it detects a change in the audio status due to e g signal switchover This parameter allows you to select whether to detect changes and how sensitive detection should be to such changes Disable Disables mute function when change in audio status is detected Normally not selected Normal Mutes when a change on an SDI signal ADP Audio Data Packet or DBN Data Block Number is detected Normally selected Sensitive Mutes when a change on channel status or EDP Extended Data Packet presence only for SD SDI as well as the above items is detected 1 Fade function depends on the Fade Mode setting in the Fade In Out menu Correction Normally set to Normal Set to Disable for a specific program or duration when audio output h
325. t The above alert that appears after turning on the FA 9520 indicates an alarm or alarms for an option card or cards installed in the expansion slot A and or B This indication appears only after powering on the FA 9520 Indicates failure of the option card installed in the slot indicated as FAILED If this indiation appears turn the power of the unit off immediately and contact your service agency or distributor 277 24 Specifications and Dimensions 24 1 Unit Specifications Input Video Formats Output Video Formats Video Input Video Input FA 95AIO option Video Output Video Output FA 95AIO option Video I O Process Video Processing Quantization Frequency Response NTSC PAL DG DP S N Ratio Genlock Input 1080 59 94p Level A 1080 50p Level A 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 1080 24PsF 1080 23 98PsF 720 59 94p 720 50p 525 60 NTSC 625 50 PAL 1080 59 94p Level A 1080 50p Level A 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 1080 24PsF 1080 23 98PsF 720 59 94p 720 50p 525 60 NTSC 625 50 PAL PAL M 3G SDI 3 Gbps HD SDI 1 5 Gbps or SD SDI 270 Mbps 75Q BNC x 2 Analog Composite 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC x 1 SDTV YPbPr 750 BNC Y Pb and Pr 1ea Y 1 0 Vp p Pb Pr 0 525 Vp p SMPTE level 0 757 Vp p BETACAM level SMPTE and BETACAM menu selectable Analog RGB 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC R G and B 1 ea Y C 1 0Vp p 750 BNC Y and C 1 ea HDTV YPbPr 750 BNC Y Pb and Pr 1ea Y 1 0 V
326. t Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type Write Read Trap Event value OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 01 6 5 AES Audio Tl AP SOURCE CH2 Ditto Fa952AES OutAudioCh2tatusChangeTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SOURCE CH3 Ditto Fa952AES OutAudioCh3StatusChangeTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SOURCE CH4 Ditto Fa952AES OutAudioCh4StatusChangeTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change ISOURCE CH5 Ditto Fa952AES OutAudioCh5StatusChangeTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SOURCE CH6 Ditto Fa952AES OutAudioCh6StatusChangeTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SOURCE CH7 Ditto Fa952AES OutAudioCh7tatusChangeTrap co Od Gy Co DO NOTIFICATION TYPE OJO OJOJOJO CO Change SOURCE CH8 Ditto Fa952AES OutAudioCh8StatusChangeTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 01 6 5 Analog Audio TRAP SOURCE CH1 0 Loss 1 PCM 2 PCM 48kHz 3 PCM 44 1kHz 4 PCM 32kHz 5 PCM Other 6 Silence 7 Silence 48kHz 8 Silence 44 1kHz 9 Silence 32kHz 10 Silence Other 11 NON PCM 12 PCM Async 13 Silence Async 14 NON PCM Async 15 IN 16 Unknown Fa952Analog OutAudioCh1StatusChangeTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SOURCE CH2 Ditto Fa952Analog OutAudioCh2StatusChangeTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SOURCE CH3 Ditto Fa952Analog OutAudioCh3StatusChangeTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change SOURCE CH4
327. t Steps Description H PHASE 0 Reo 6 Wass Adjusts the horizontal and vertical 0 phases of the system referring to genlock FRAME 313 313 signal This setting is applied to SD V PHASE 172 LINE output signals LINE AVDL Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively 1 The settings are not available if there is no reference signal input In such case the menu as shown below will be displayed H V 5 PHASE NOT ADJUST PHASE NOT ADJUST PHASE NOT ADJUST C 2 The default value varies depending on the SYNCHRO setting in section 5 9 1 FS MODE SET and the IN SEL setting in section 5 6 1 FS INPUT SELECT as shown in the below table The set value will be reset to its relevant default value whenever the SYNCHRO setting is changed SYNCHRO IN SEL Default FRAME 0 SDI1 2 COMPOSITE 525 60 LINE COMPOSITE 625 50 COMPONENT Y C COMPONENT others SDI1 2 COMPOSITE 525 60 AVDL COMPOSITE 625 50 COMPONENT Y C COMPONENT others A BR ow A A Al oj 72 5 9 4 VIDEO POSITION 6 4 Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Setting range TA Parameter Default Steps Description 525 60 92 625 50 92 1080 59i 240 1080 50i 240 1080 23PsF 240 H POS 0 1080 24PsF 240 720 59p 160 720 50p 160 1080 59p 240 1080 50p 240 PIXEL Adjusts the horizontal vertical
328. t 14 9 Letterbox 16 9 Alt 14 9 Letterbox 16 9 Alt 4 3 Letterbox gt 16 9 16 9 Fullframe 16 9 Pillarbox 4 3 Fullframe 16 9 Protected Pillarbox 14 9 Pillarbox 4 3 Alt 14 9 Fullframe 16 9 Alt 14 9 Fullframe 16 9 alt 4 3 Nas QOooco oO0H amp ROhN fa952FS2ConverterAspectSD INTEGER FS1Aspect HD AFD AFD ALT Letterbox gt 16 9 Fullframe 16 9 Pillarbox 4 3 Fullframe 16 9 Protected Pillarbox 14 9 Pillarbox 4 3 Alt 4 9 Fullframe 16 9 Alt 14 9 Fullframe 16 9 alt 4 3 fa952FS2ConverterAspectHD INTEGER FS2CONV IMPROVE FS2Motion Sense Field Frame Odd 1st Frame Even 1st Adaptive BONAOONOORONACO fa952FS2ConverterMotionSense INTEGER Enhance 08 fa952FS1ConverterEnhance 42 INTEGER Antialias H 8 0 8 fa952FS1ConverterAntiAliasH INTEGER jAntialias V 8 0 8 fa952FS1ConverterAntiAliasV 44 INTEGER ada o ada O 250 Object group Front TITLE Item name Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type Read OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 2 175 1 307 2 8 AVO AVO AVO SETTING Operation Mode 0 Off 1 Auto 2 Hold fa952AvoMode INTEGER O O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 2 175 1 307 2 10 FA 9 LG FA 95LG IASSIGN FS1 ID 1 256 fa95LgFS1Assign INTEGER Keyer FS1 0 OFF 1 ON fa95LgFS1Keyer INTEGER VIDEO OPTION I
329. t Load Last Setting Default 1 settings l l Event1 Event100 Default Starts up with default settings Event1 to 100 Starts up with the settings saved as an event among events 1 to 100 Default 1 Selects the number of an event saved in EventLoad Default EVent1 Event100 the FA 9520 to load Click Submit to load Selects the mode to load the data in the event selected by the number under Event Load All Load Load Mode Load All Load FS1 Only Load ALL Loads all data in the event Load FS2 Only Load FS1 Only Loads only FS1 settings Load FS2 Only Loads only FS2 settings Selects the number of an event you want to Event Save Video Format video Formal d save Click Submit to save the settings to Event1 Event100 the FA 9520 1 Default recalls the default settings Set Event Name Click Set next to Unit Event Name A window that allows you to name the FA 9520 and events 1 through 100 as shown below opens FA 9520 Logout Video Audio System GPI Utility Status Network Event 1 20 Event21 40 Event41 60 Event61 80 Event81 100 D Unit Name Unit Name FA 9520 Event 1 10 EVENT 1 EVENT 2 EVENT 3 EVENT 4 EVENT 5 EVENT 6 EVENT 7 EVENT 8 EVENT 9 EVENT 10 Event 1 Event 2 Event 3 Event 4 Event 5 Event 6 Event 7 Event 8 Event 9 Event 10 Event 11 Event 12 Event 13 Event 14 Event 15 Event 16 Event 17 Event 18 Event 19 Event 20
330. t menus 4 2 1 The DC POWER indicator functions when the optional FA 95PS is installed 17 2 2 Rear Panel FA 9520 with the FA 95PS option installed 12 13 FA 9520 13 P 17 Pl P E Joe n q 1 i ela J S Wc SO 2 4 i 7 3 5 7 9 10 11 g E c s EB X rg N MENOS FANt SER NO 2 4 6 8 7 3 0 5 7 9 1 1 No Name Description Ref 1 SDI IN 1 Used for HD SD SDI video input 1 5 6 Used for HD SD SDI video output 1 2 SDI OUT 1 2 The input signal in SDI IN 1 is output from SDI OUT1 5 10 4 when BY PASS is enabled or the unit is turned off 3 SDI IN 2 Used for HD SD SDI video input 2 5 6 Used for HD SD SDI video output 2 4 SDI OUT 3 4 The input signal in SDI IN 2 is output from SDI OUT3 5 10 4 when BY PASS is enabled or the unit is turned off 5 COMPOSITE IN Used for analog composite video input 5 6 Used for analog composite video output COMPOSITE The input signal in COMPOSITE IN is output from An 6 5 10 4 OUT 1 2 COMPOSITE OUT1 when BY PASS is enabled or the unit is turned of
331. tartup Also if Mode is set to Off Area Display is isplay automatically set to Off 1 The FS1 FS2 LINKed setting will be disabled if AVO setting is changed to Auto or Hold while it is enabled IMPORTANT Auto Level Adjustment will provide optimal results in many cases but not always Sample Area determines the area where the data is sampled and the level adjustments are applied to whole images Sample Area Fixed area Eight available sample areas are as shown below Data is continuously sampled within each area See section 9 2 2 3 User Area 1 2 for USERA REA 1 and 2 Sample area Full Screen Sample area Top Left Sample area Letter Box Sample area Sample area Top Right Sample Sample area Pillar Box Center Sample area Bottom Left Bottom Right 157 AVO Setup Setting E Parameter Default range Description Sets the filtering strength for calculating the mean distances that are applied to histograms created using the sample data Response Level 3 Level 1 The larger the value the more gradually Filtering strength Level 5 filtering is performed with a more stable image but slower response The smaller the value the less stable the image but with a faster response Scene Cut Det off When set to On the cut transitions are Scene cut Off On detected and images are properly adjusted detection even if there are sharp luminance changes
332. te input signals Composite Out On to composite output with a relay connection Off Setting to On bypasses AIO input and output AIO Option A B Off On connectors in option slot A B with a relay connection 164 9 2 6 Converter Clicking block 6 on the video block diagram opens the Up Down Cross Converter setting dialog box for the corresponding FS Up Down Cross Converter FS1 Mozilla Firefox Eee 192168010 htm conv2 cei te l Converter Process Mode 1080i v 1080 59 94p gt gt 1080 59 94i Aspect Ratio Motion Sense Antialias Enhance AFD v Adaptive Horizontal Normal Vertical Normal Level OQ v Converter Size Converter Position H Size 100 0 i Bluniv Position o Pixe HH Y VSize 100 0 j Buy vPestio o tine E Converter Crop Side Cut Color H Left O Pixel YH i Unity Red ol H Right 0 Pixel HH Unity Green _ El V Top QlLine Unity Blue 0 ee El V Bottom 0 Line gt Unity 2 Up Down Cross Converter FS2 Mozilla Firefox amp b 1921680 10 htnl conv2 cei fs 2 Converter Process Mode t080i vw 1080 59 94p gt gt 1080 59 94i Aspect Ratio Motion Sense ntialias Enhance AFD Adaptive Horizontal v Vertical Normal Level0 v Converter Size Converter Position H Size 100 0 H Position 0 Pixel El V Size 100 0 H i V Position D Line El Converter Crop Side
333. ted under CH SEL Dolby ENCA CH1 2 3 Dolby DECB CH1 8 4 Dolby DMB L 4 Dolby DMB R Dolby ENCB CH1 2 5 L LOUD1A 8 R LOUD2A C LOUD1B 7 LFE LOUD2B 7 Ls Rs Displays the input signal from which SDI IN1 the selected embedded audio signal FROM SDI IN2 is input if ASSIGN is set to one MS among EMB1 CH1 through 16 and EMB2 CH1 through 16 1 If the AES connector is set to be used for input the selected AES channel will be displayed with an as AES CH1 and no audio signal will be output To change AES I O settings see section 6 2 4 AES I O SETUP for details 2 Not shown if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is not installed in option slot A 3 Not shown if the FA 95DE E option is not installed in option slot A 4 Not shown if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is not installed in option slot B 5 Not shown if the FA 95DE E option is not installed in option slot B 6 Not shown if the FA 95ALA option is not installed in option slot A 7 Not shown if the FA 95ALA option is not installed in option slot B Auto Channel Pairing for NON PCM Audio Inputs The FA 9520 recognizes NON PCM audio input signals in L R channel pair units and adjusts assignments according to the signal selected for the L channel Ex L R channel pairs in EMB1 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH15 CH16 The channel assignments that are changed by the adjustment will be shown with as CH1 EMB
334. ter Ancillary Setting in the FS1 FS2 Video System menu Sec 9 4 1 is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting Pass or Blank will be displayed AFD Displays Active Format Description code in bynary format Scan Displays the Scanning System and the inserted AFD type Data1 3 Displays the detected data in hexadecimal format CONV1 2 WSS Output Status Displays the status of BT1119 2 WSS in Converters 1 and 2 output signals Status Displays Present if ancillary data is inserted Displays Absent if no ancillary data is inserted If ANC Mode under Converter1 Ancillary Setting in the FS1 FS2 Video System menu Sec 9 4 1 is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting Pass or Blank will be displayed AFD Displays Active Format Description code in hexadecimal format and the AFD type Bit 13 0 Displays the inserted Bit13 to BitO in hexadecimal format CONV1 2 Ancillary Data Packet Output Status Displays the content names and inserted lines of the 4 total ancillary data packets inserted into Converter 1 and 2 output signals See section 19 FA 9520 Ancillary Data Packet Name List for details on ancillary data names and DID and SDID of formats Displays if no ancillary data is inserted 230 9 8 Network Settings FA 9520 Video System Click If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click the Network tab at the to
335. tings are disabled under the following conditions e No logo is assigned to the logo ID selected under LOGO ID in the 5 8 1 1 LOGO SELECT menu e Different formats are displayed for LOGO FORMAT and FS1 or FS2 in the 5 8 1 1 LOGO SELECT menu KEYER ON LEVEL NOT ADJ H POS NOT ADJ V POS NOT ADJ 42 5 8 1 3 Logo Position Setting Range Positional settings will vary according to the logo formats as shown below Logo Format H POS setting range V POS setting range SD 525 0 to 718 0 to 486 SD 625 0 to 718 0 to 575 HD 1080 0 to 1918 0 to 1079 HD 720 0 to 1278 0 to 719 The logo format selection is saved for each logo ID using FA 95LG GUI See the separate FA 95LG GUI Operation Manual for details 69 5 9 VIDEO SYSTEM VIDEO SYS 5 9 1 FS MODE SET Allows you to set the FS Frame Synchronizer operation modes Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK Parameter Default Setting range Description FRAME Enables horizontal and vertical alignment of video signals to a genlock signal Effective on both synchronous and asynchronous signals LINE Locks the video signal of within 1 2H to a S BO genlock signal Output delay is 1H Effective only when A FRAME video signal is synchronous to the genlock signal FRAME LINE AVDL Locks the video signal to a genlock signal with a 5 AVDL 1H delay Effective only when video signal is 4 synchronous to t
336. tings of CONTROL in the LOUDNESS CONTROL ENABLE menu 6 10 2 2 8 5 Note on Event Memory Operation Do not power off the unit while saving an event The event may not be properly stored Also the FA 9520 regularly updates the setting data Do not turn off the unit for at least 5 seconds after changing settings It is recommended to save important data into a backup file See sections 9 6 2 Backup Parameter and 9 6 4 Event Data for details on how to save setting data into a backup file 152 9 Control via WEB Browser This section describes how to control the FA 9520 from a computer via a web browser See section 3 5 Connecting a Computer for details on connecting with a computer Do not open pop up setting dialogs at the same time Doing so may disable operation 9 1 Connecting via a WEB Browser Open a web browser on your computer and enter the address as http 192 168 0 10 factory default setting in the address bar Press the Enter key to connect to the FA 9520 The login page is displayed FORA Fa 3520 Ea Click Login The authentication dialog appears Connect to 192 168 0 10 A The server 192 168 0 10 at FA 9520 requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection Re g i Enter your user name and password The default user name ii and password are set at
337. to the destination directory After unzipping the file using an unzip utility you will have the files FORA FA9520 mib mib and FOR A MIB MIB NOTE See section 18 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol for details on the MIB file 220 9 6 4 Event Data Backup The Event Memory data Events1 through 100 saved in FA 9520 mode can be saved in a file on the computer as a backup You can also move the data to another FA 9520 in FA 9520 mode 4 Save File Click Save File Download Do you want to open or save this file e Name fa9520 eventdata 952e Type HTML Document From 192 168 0 10 E While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially We harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or gt save this file What s the risk Click OK The event data will be saved to the destination directory with the file name fa9520_eventdata 952e Restore To load the backup file on the computer click Browse The Choose file to Upload dialog appears Choose File to Upload Look in a Desktop omy Documents E My Computer My Recent my Network Places Documents AZERE My Network File name fa9520_eventdata Places Files of type All Files Specify the directory and the file name and click Open The destination path will be displayed on the screen Click Load The confirmation dialog appears Message from webpage 2 j
338. tored in Event Memories oooooococccccccoococcoccccccoconnnanonnnnnonin ns 152 8 5 Note on Event Memory OperatiON coccccinnnoccoccnccccconnnononncnnonononnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 152 Control via WEB BOWS frita a e a a a a ei E A eiaa ded date teres 153 9 1 Connecting via a WEB Browser ccccccseceeeeeeeceeeeeeeceneeeeaeeeseeeetesceaeaeeeeeeeesesesiseeeeeees 153 9 2 VIDEO Settings srta is 154 9 2 1 FS Input Select eniin pna eee aeeeeeceeeeeeeaeaeneseeeeeeeeeneaaeeeeeeeeeeteeaeas 155 9 2 2 Auto Video Optimizer AVO sssssssssessseee eene 156 9 2 2 1 About Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay Settings ssss 158 922 222 User 1 5 LEVEL SET iiie liti td ten eter a Doe tpe 159 9 2 2 3 User Area 1 Zaid dera 161 9 2 3 Frame Delay 1 00 00 nn nn nnn nnn nnn nn nennen i ii i einen eterna 162 A A O 163 922 5 BY PASS Setting oe e AA t tete diues 164 9 2 6 CODVerlter a i eA te et e eed dte aeree Mi a ee Wed pde 165 9 25 Color GoOrTectOE i o e Ea p te eet voce t e dae Sete id 169 9 2 8 Vid o Test Signal noie Rn Pert c te ee b i had 172 9 2 9 YPbPr RGB Clip granie a eene enne a a E aaa A nnns 173 9 2 10 DUIPUL ASIN oi A Dee e fec Ae trs 174 9 2 11 Composite Clip ent n repe ne re Are cana acia 176 9 3 AUDIO Settings iscsi redder Aaa 177 9 3 1 SDE InDUt eet ret bee rie Pei pete eiie en trees Portes 178 9 3 2 AES Audio Input Settings
339. tory default is NORMAL mode Menus that request a setting confirmation are shown in the menu list in section 4 2 2 Menu Buttons with a black circle e IMPORTANT Make sure that the FS1 LOCK and FS2 LOCK button LEDs are lit green or unlit before starting an operation If FS1 LOCK and or FS2 LOCK button LED s are lit orange all operations on the front panel for FS1 and or FS2 except the LOCK button s are disabled Press and hold the FS1 LOCK and or FS2 LOCK button s that are lit orange to unlock the operations FS1 LOCK button FS2 LOCK button POMER Pst Ml FANALIRM s n an ADON EPOR F2 DISPLAY E ue bl a un 3 y Falo GIRS no so FRAME SyNCHRONIZeR FA 9520 d 28 4 2 1 Accessing Menus FOR Fee en mm Ey T mae ee f2 DISPLAY d 22 dud Fa Fi F2 FS Fa L Fa el nrl el CJ FANE AORA so iso Frame SYNCHRONIZER FA 9520 O O O O Menu buttons VIDEO AUDIO button Every press of the VIDEO AUDIO button alternates the menu button assignments between video menus and audio menus The button indicators light up green when the buttons are accessible to video menus that are indicated on the top row of each menu button They light up orange when they are accessibl
340. tput ASSIGN ANALOG CH1 4 Dolby DECA CH1 8 2 channel that Vene die hate Dolby DMA L CH SEL Dolby DMA R Dolby DECB CH1 8 Dolby DMB L Dolby DMB R L LOUD1A R LOUD2A 4 C LOUD1B LFE LOUD2B Ls Rs Displays the source signal input SDI IN1 channel of the embedded audio FROM SDI IN2 signal for EMB1 CH1 CH16 or Sends EMB2 CH1 CH16 selected under ASSIGN 1 Ifthe AES connector is set to be used for input the selected AES channel will be displayed with an as AES CH1 and no audio signal will be output To change AES I O settings see section 6 2 4 AES I O SETUP for details 2 Not shown if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is not installed in option slot A 3 Not shown if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is not installed in option slot B 4 Not shown if the FA 95ALA option is not installed in option slot A 5 Not shown if the FA 95ALA option is not installed in option slot B 114 6 6 AUDIO DELAY Settings 6 6 1 EMB1 IN DELAY Menu button CH SEL CLIP F F S ET Oms MASTER 4 ms DELAY TOTAL 4 ms Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an embedded audio channel CSEL em Chit CENG in FS1 for which to set delay Sets the delay for the audio channel that OFFSET Omsec 996ms 996ms ig selected under CH SEL Sets the offset to the delay for all MASTER 4msec 4ms 1000ms audio channels CH1 to 16 Displays the t
341. tput Audio Item Display Description Displays status of the output audio signal from the CH1 CH4 Silence ANALOG AUDIO connector A Out Silence Mute signal Out Output signal is present 226 9 7 3 Unit Information FA 9520 Logout Video audio system cpi utility status Network gt Unit Video Status Audio Status UnitInformation Ancillary Status Unit Version Option A Information Option B Information Option Information Serial No 14880863 Name FA 95AIO Name FA 95AIO FA 95PS None FPGA 1 1 10 FPGA 1 1 00 FPGA 1 1 00 FA 95AVO None FPGA 2 1 10 FPGA 2 1 02 FPGA 2 1 02 FA 95 3G None FPGA 3 1 00 SOFT SOFT FA 95LG None SOFT 2 00 8 00 FA 95CO None If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click Refresh to update the settings Unit Version Item Description Serial No Displays the serial number of the FA 9520 FPGA1 Displays the FPGA1 version FPGA2 Displays the FPGA2 version FPGA3 Displays the FPGAS version Displays the software version of the FA 9520 in FA 9520 mode First 4 SOFT digits digits the software version of the FA 9520 in FA 9500 mode Last 4 Option A Information Displays the information of the optional installed expansion card in SLOT A If no card is installed None will be shown Option B Information Displays the inform
342. turn to the values before the manual adjustment the values provided by the automatic level adjustment While AVO is turned on the COLOR CORRECT menu settings will automatically adjust MODE will change to BALANCE and CURVE to BLACK The fine adjustment enabled in HOLD mode is enabled only for color correction BALANCE mode To manually adjust the signal levels Set AVO MODE to OFF to manually adjust the signal levels If the AVO MODE selection is changed from AUTO to OFF the signal levels return to their values before the automatic level adjustment The adjustable items in the Color Correction menus are as shown in the table below ao ace ore Color Corrector Menu Reference Y Y WHITE LEVEL 5 2 1 WHITE LEVEL Y Y BLACK LEVEL 5 2 2 BLACK LEVEL Y Y GAMMA LEVEL 5 2 3 GAMMA LEVEL Y CORRECTION MODE CURVE 5 2 4 COLOR CORRECT Y The setting is enabled The setting is disabled The message NOT ADJUST appears when the disabled menu is opened 54 5 5 CLIP VIDEO CLIP 5 5 1 YPbPr RGB CLIP Menu button CLIP FS1 LOCK FS2 LOCK DELAY Parameter Default Setting range Description OFF Selects a mode whether to clip ME uos OFF YPbPr CLIP signals in the YPbPr color space or Clip Mode RGB CLIP RGB color space Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively 25 Parameter Default poa Description
343. tusSdiEmbiniCh7 INTEGER CH8 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbiniCh8 INTEGER CH9 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbin1Ch9 INTEGER CH10 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbiIn1Ch10 INTEGER CH11 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch11 INTEGER CH12 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch12 INTEGER CH13 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch13 INTEGER CH14 Ditto faQ52StatusSdiEmbin1Ch14 INTEGER CH15 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbin1Ch15 INTEGER CH16 Ditto fa952StatusSdiEmbin1Ch16 INTEGER QAITAAQAAGAQAggoyO OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 2 175 1 307 5 3 2 EM 2 input audio status AUDIO INPUT EMB2 IN AUDIO CH1 Loss PCM Silence NON PCM PCM Async Silence Async NON PCM Async Unknown Bypass Blank 10 Disable GHIDARON O fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch1 INTEGER CH2 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbin2Ch2 INTEGER Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch3 INTEGER CH4 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbin2Ch4 INTEGER CH5 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbin2Ch5 INTEGER CH6 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbin2Ch6 INTEGER CH7 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbiIn2Ch7 INTEGER CH8 Ditto fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch8 INTEGER CH9 Ditto fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch9 INTEGER CH10 Ditto ffa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch10 INTEGER CH11 Ditto fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch11 INTEGER CH12 Ditto
344. u list in section 4 2 2 Menu Buttons and can be respectively set for F51 and FS2 Other settings will always be loaded regardless of the selected loading mode 150 8 2 EVENT SAVE Menu button NO EVENTI LOAD START F2 UNI TY FORMAT 1080 5911 EVENT Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects the number of an event you NO EVEMT1 EVENT1 EVENT100 Wahtto sava Saves the event that is selected SIENNA E under NO when the F2 UNITY button is pressed 8 3 EVENT SETUP 313 START LAST SETTING Menu button EVENT Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an event you want to load at startup LAST SETTING LAST SETTING Loads the last settings that are used before startup START SG E DEFAULT Resets all settings to the default EVENT1 00 settings at startup EVENTI 100 Loads the selected event memory among event memory settings 1 through 100 151 8 4 Parameters That Are Not Stored in Event Memories The following parameters are not stored in event memories ON OFF settings of FREEZE in the FREEZE SET menu 5 9 5 All settings in the EVENT SETUP menu 8 3 All settings in the Other Settings amp Information OTHER menu 7 All settings in the Various Signal Status Display STATUS menu 5 10 All settings in the Network Settings menu 9 8 All settings in the LOUDNESS MEASUREMENT menu 6 10 2 1 ON OFF set
345. ue of one component If AVO Control is set to Auto in the Auto Video Optimizer AVO menu 9 2 2 the White Level setting cannot be changed Black Level Parameter Default eos Description Red Green Blue 100 0 0 0 200 0 Adjusts the black level of R G and B RGB Black Level iuis 0 596 components separately o Enables you to adjust black level R G and B n components simultaneously retaining Group Adjust Off Off separately adjusted R G and B proportion by changing the value of one component If AVO Control is set to Auto in the Auto Video Optimizer AVO menu 9 2 2 the Black Level setting cannot be changed Gamma Level Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description Red Green Blue 100 0 0 200 Adjusts the gamma level of R G and B RGB Gamma level PS 0 596 components separately Enables you to adjust gamma level R G On and B components simultaneously Group Adjust Off Off retaining separately adjusted R G and B proportion by changing the value of one component Curve Center Gamma Curve Center ar Selects a gamma curve type If AVO Control is set to Auto in the Auto Video Optimizer AVO menu 9 2 2 the all Gamma Level Curve settings cannot be changed Also if AVO Control is set to Hold the Curve setting cannot be changed Sepia The Sepia Level and Color settings can be changed if Correction Mode is set to Sepia Sepia
346. using the FRAME DELAY function The output delay varies depending on the SYNCRO MODE input signal format FRAME DELAY setting and video signal H V phase difference FRAME DELAY settings are described on the next page 48 5 4 2 1 About Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay Settings To properly perform AVO scene cut detection and adjustment the FRAME DELAY must be set in the setting range according to the menu settings 5 9 1 FS MODE SET menu as shown in the table below FRAME DELAY Setting Range Chart 2 Setting Rrange per Input Video Format 525 60i DUCES ESSE 720 59p 50p Baa 1080 59p 50p 1080 501 1080 23PsF 24PsF FRAME 1 to 8 FRAME 2 to 8 FRAME LINE AVDL Cannot be set Cannot be set INPUT 2 to 8 FRAME 3 to 8 FRAME 1 FS mode settings under SYNCRO in section 5 9 1 FS MODE SET 2 The current input video format can be verified in the VIDEO IN STATUS menu Sec 5 10 2 for each input selected in the FS INPUT SELECT menu Sec 5 6 1 IMPORTANT Adjust the audio delay as required in the AUDIO DELAY Settings menu Sec 6 6 to account for any additional video signal delay produced by changing FRAME DELAY 49 5 4 3 USER1 5 LEVEL SET Setting LEVEL of the AVO SETTING menu to one user settings from USER1 through 5 opens the USER1 5 LEVEL SET menu This menu allows you to store five sets of level settings as USER1 5 17 Menu button IN WHITE A 99 0 IN BLACK 1 0
347. utput Mode YPbPr SMPTE Power 2 Normal Input Mode YPbPr SMPTE Option B 1080 59 94i Option B 1080 59 94i Output Mode YPbPr SMPTE Input Mode YPbPr SMPTE If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click Refresh to refresh the page Video Input Status Item Display Loss 525 60 625 50 1080 59i 1080 50i 720 59p 720 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF 1080 59p 1080 50p BY PASS Unknown Description Displays the video format of the SDI1 input signal Displays Loss if there is no input signal Displays Unknown if there is an unsupported input signal Displays BY PASS if the function is enabled SDI In1 Loss 525 60 625 50 1080 59i 1080 50i 720 59p Displays the video format of the SDI2 input signal Displays Loss if there is no input signal SDI In2 720 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF 1080 59p a 1080 50p BY PASS Unknown Displays Unknown if there is an unsupported input signal Displays BY PASS if the function is enabled Displays indicating no SDI2 input detection if 9 2 1 FS Input Select is set to YPbPr SMPTE YPbPr BETACAM RGB or Y C 222 Item Display Description E Displays the video format of the COMPOSITE input signal C ite 625 50 Displays Loss if there is no input signal omposIte n ev pass Displays Unknown if there is a
348. utton Menu button Pressing the button while the buttons are lit green turns the lights orange Afterwards the audio menus displayed on the lower row on each menu button VIDEO can be selected AUDIO 6 1 SDI AUDIO Settings SDI AUDIO Allows you to set FS1 FS2 embedded audio signal settings 6 1 1 EMB1 IN GAIN Menu button PROCESS SDI AUDIO Setting range ae Parameter Default Steps Description Selects an FS1 embedded audio CAUSE a Pais Crile channel for which to adjust the gain Sets the input gain for the SDI embedded GAIN SET 0 0dB 20 0 20 0 dB Sudio channel that is selected under CH 0 1 dB SEL Sets the offset to the input gain for all MASTER 0 0dB 20 0 20 0 dB Channels CH1 to CH16 of SD embedded 0 1 dB audio 1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range If the range is exceeded the alert will be displayed as 20 0 dB or 20 0 dB 6 1 2 EMB1 OUT MONO OUT gt CHI 2 DISABLE Menu button PROCESS SDI AUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a stereo pair of F51 embedded CH SEL CH1 2 CH1 2 15 16 audio channels ENABLE Outputs the stereo pair channels DISABLE selected under CH SEL as a mono sum MONO SUM DISABLE ENABLE The signals of the selected pair channels are added and devided by two to output from each channel 98 6 1 3 EMB1 IN SET
349. value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps Embedded 1 2 Input Gain Setting range ake Parameter Default Steps Description 20 0 20 0dB Sets the offset to the input gain Master 0 0dB for all channels Ch1 to Ch16 of 0 1 dB SDI embedded audio 4 Sets the input gain for the Ch1 Ch16 0 008 20 0 120 0 dB individual SDI embedded audio 0 1 dB channel 1 Master and individual channel values cannot exceed the setting range as a total The setting value will stop at the end of the range 178 Embedded 1 2 In Audio Parameter Default Setting range Description Alignment Disable Disable Enable Enables or disables automatic phase adjustment for FS1 FS2 input embedded audio channel groups Enable Automatic adjustment normal setting Disable No adjustment HD SDI ACLK Auto Auto Sync SDI Audio Clock Selects audio clock signal to use for de embedding and processing audio data in HD SDI input signal Auto De embeds HD SDI embedded audio data using the audio clock phase data in the embedded audio Synchronous and asynchronous embedded audio signals from 4 audio groups can be de embedded separately Audio data will be processed as synchronous data if the audio clock phase data is incorrect or jitter is too great Sync SDI All audio data in 4 audio groups are always processed as
350. vas saat tema wa repere ant ne dT nare TUER Re E Toda ae 100 6 1 5 EMB2 IN GAJN iie tere cent eer hei ala o ia A Dea rad 101 6 1 6 EMB2 OUT MONO areena denena eaea tenaaa nao e eaaa aa EE EO nan nn AE EENE Eia aSa nnns nnns 101 6 127 EMBZ IN SET E MER ttu eee Pe eae eta 102 6 1 8 EMB2 AUDIO CLOCK ssssssssssssssseneneeeee eee neret n nnnm nennen tnn 103 6 2 AES AUDIO Settings AES AUDIO ssssssssssssee eene nennen 104 6 2 1 AES IN GAIN RM 104 6 2 2 AES HYSTERESIS ii tie cea a AAEL NEEDE eae 104 6 2 3 AES OUT MONO Feces iie ere ede e cen a SAO 105 0 2 4 AES VO SETUP ioo eet A eh ae dn ife 105 6 3 ANALOG AUDIO Settings ANALOG cccsccssscssssesseessessecsssesssessvessesssessseeseessetsssseeeees 106 6 3 T ANALOG IN LEVE Coir di roiie e in ai A eve ee la 106 6 3 2 ANALOG IN GAIN aaen e pi aaa A E nennen nennen nnne nennen nennen nen 106 6 3 3 ANALOG OU T EEVEL i hii rra af as o red 106 6 3 4 ANALOG OUT MONO ssssseeeeeeemmme eem nennen eere een nnne nennen rennen 107 6 3 5 ANALOG IN SYSTEM seseseeeeeme eene eene eene nennen nnne nennen ener 107 6 4 OUTPUT GAIN CONTROL 4 ennt reno 108 6 4 1 MASTER OUT GAIN iia id da a Eo eee aeu dd 108 6 4 2 EMB1 OUT GAIN ieri rf P tic eio s tie Proton 108 6 4 3 EMBZ OUT GAIN 12 dece fe pte oec pied tt E E t RO 109 6 4 4 AES OUT GAIN ido itti er en tied eed R N 109 6 4 5 ANALOG OUT GAIN esee emen nennen ener nenn
351. vel and Target Black Level The default settings of user settings User 1 through 5 are the same as those for Darker Dark Standard Bright and Brighter respectively The desirable level settings are easily obtained by adjusting values from the default values USER1 5 Default Settings Parameter SELECT LEVEL Adjustment level Custom levels User 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 Default Default Default Default Default Fixed levels Darker Dark Standard Bright Brighter In White Level 99 0 98 0 97 0 95 0 93 0 In Black Level 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 0 Target White Level 80 0 88 0 93 0 95 0 97 0 Target Black Level 3 0 5 0 7 0 12 0 17 0 159 In White Level and In Black Level These two parameters determine the highest and lowest levels of luminance in the input signal Parameter Setting range step Description In White Level 80 0 99 0 0 5 The maximum value of luminance in the sample data is defined as 100 Based on this reference value this determines the highest level of luminance for level control If the value is too large some noise may be picked up causing the results to become unstable If the value is too small it increases contrast but it may cause the images to be overexposed In Black Level 1 0 20 0 0 5 The minimum value of luminance in the sample data is defined as 0 Based on this reference value thi
352. version is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV Conversion Table see section 5 3 2 In both cases the menu as shown below will be displayed 46 5 4 Auto Video Optimizer AVO AVO settings are effective for FS1 video signals 5 4 1 AVO SETTING AVO SETTING aa Menu button MODE OFF LEVEL STANDARD AVO AREA FULL SCREEN AREA DISPLAY OFF MING Parameter Default Setting range Description AUTO Enables automatic level adjustment HOLD Stops auto level adjustment When MODE selection is changed from AUTO to HOLD the signal levels stop and remain as they iar Pro OFF Disables automate leveladkustment OFF AUTO Disables automatic level adjustment Cuerno es When MODE selection is changed from AUTO to OFF the signal levels return to their state before auto level adjustment is applied When set to OFF the signal levels can be manually adjusted See section 5 4 4 1 Manual Level Adjustment for details DARKER Selects a type of signal level adjustment DARK 10 options are available Five fixed options and STANDARD five custom options BRIGHT iy LEVEL BRIGHTER Darker lt Dark lt Standard lt Bright lt Brighter Adjustment STANDARD USER1 User1 User5 Customizable level USER2 Selecting one user settings from User1 through USER3 5 opens the USER1 5 LEVE SET page See USER4 section 5 4 3 USER1 5 LEVEL SET for USER5 details Sets the sample area to calcul
353. whether the input analog audio is silent 182 9 3 4 Audio Delay SDI AES Analog Clicking block 5 on the audio block diagram opens the Audio Delay dialog box SDI1 SDI2 Audio Delay 2 Audio Delay SDI Mozilla Firefox DER 2 Audio Delay SDI2 Mozilla Firefox 1921680 10 html sdly2 embicei 1 nl sdly2 e 2m e m 921 68010 html sdly2 e mb2 cel Audio Delay Audio Delay Master a ms fj CH1 4 ms gt i alms je 4 ms i 4 ms ib 4 Master 4 ms a Bn cat 4 ms fj CH 10 cunt alms CH 12 ms _ _ cH13 alms j CH 14 4 ms 97 q ms CH 15 4 ms gt 4 ms HH CH 16 4 ms HH 4 ms HH L 4m je 4 ms TE 00 00 100 00 00 Coe 00 100 oe 00 100 00 pue 00108 LE TE 00 00 100 00 00 00 00 100 00 00 00 00 pue 00108 LE After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps Audio Delay Parameter Default Setting range Description Master 4 1000msec CH1 CH16 4msec 4 1000msec Sets the delay for SOURCE channels
354. xcept unlocking FS1 or FS2 are disabled 36 When either FS setting is disabled the menus will display settings of another non disabled When front panel buttons are disabled the last displayed menu will remain displayed All 5 VIDEO Menus Make the menu buttons light up green using the VIDEO AUDIO button Pressing the button while the buttons are lit orange turns the lights green Then the menus displayed on the upper row on each menu button can be selected 5 1 VIDEO PROC AMP PROCESS Menu button VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO PROC AMP 1 Menu button CHROMA LEVEL 100 0 PROCESS Parameter Default E E Description VIDEO LEVEL 100 0 Eoo Adjusts the video level CHROMA LEVEL 100 0 R Adjusts the chrominance level SETUP BLACK 0 0 cane ros a Adjusts the black level HUE 0 0 nt Day Adjusts the color phase Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 separately 5 2 COLOR CORRECTOR C C Allows you to adjust the Color corrector settings 5 2 1 WHITE LEVEL Menu button RED 100 0 CC GREEN 100 0 BLUE 100 0 AES AUDIO FS UEG uBSAEODR GROUP ADJ UST Parameter Default ae Description RED GREEN BLUE 100 0 0 0 200 0 Adjusts the white level of R G RGB White Level S 0 5 and B components separately Adjusts the white level of R G GROUP ADJUST 100 0 0 0 200 0 and B components all together Group Adjustment SS 0 596 while retaining t
355. you to select the standard under which the loudness measurement and adjustment will be conducted ARIB ARIB TR B32 ATSC A85 ATSC A 85 EBU R128 EBU R128 ITU R1770 ITU R BS 1770 TARGET LVL Displays the specified target level of the selected standard MOMENTARY Displays the specified measurement duration Momentary of the selected standard SHORT TERM Displays the specified measurement duration Short Term of the selected standard Parameter Specification of Standards used in the FA 95ALA Parameter ARIB TR B32 ATSC A 85 EBU R128 ITU R BS 1770 Target Level 24 0 LKFS 24 0 LKFS 23 0 LUFS 24 0 LKFS Momentary Average Time 400 msec 125 msec 400 msec 400 msec Short Term Average Time 3000 msec 10000 msec 3000 msec 3000 msec Absolute Gating 70 0 LKFS NONE 70 0 LUFS 70 0 LKFS Relative Gating 10 LU NONE 10 LU 10 LU Overlap Size 75 0 75 75 136 6 11 AUDIO SYSTEM Settings AUDIO SYS Allows you to set basic settings on the audio system 6 11 1 FADE IN OUT Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description DISABLE Always outputs input audio signals without adding any DISABLE effect such as Fade or Mute FADE MODE DISABLE ENABLE ENABLE Sets an audio to mute with fade out if an audio error is detected and make it fade in when recovered 12 msec Sets the duratio
356. ze function is disabled if SYNCHRO in section 5 9 1 FS MODE SET is set to LINE or AVDL In such case the menu will be displayed as s FREEZE To enable FREEZE for INPUT FUNCTION be sure to set SYNCHRO to FRAME 3 Shown only if FA 95AIO option is installed in option slot A 4 Shown only if FA 95AIO option is installed in option slot B 5 Event loading will load all settings 6 Shown only if FA 95ALA option is installed in option slot A 7 Shown only if FA 95ALA option is installed in option slot B NOTE See section 14 REMOTE for details on pulse and level durations OUTPUT FUNCTION Function Description NONE No function FS1 FS2 FREEZE ON Low FOME se FREEZE FS1 FS2 FREEZE OFF High Open Collector Signal present in FS1 FS2 Low FSUESS VIDEO IN No signal present in FS1 FS2 High Open Collector Signal present Low AUDIO IN No signal present High Open Collector Signal present Low EE No signal present High Open Collector FAN failed Low GAN ALARM FAN normal High Open Collector 12 Power 1 failure Low Dec POWER Power 1 normal High Open Collector 12 Power 2 failure Low DE ROWER Power 2 normal High Open Collector FS1 FS2 SDI1 input signal is selected Low Fut S2 SDI FS1 FS2 SDI1 input signal is not selected High Open Collector FS1 FS2 SDI2 input signal is selected Low FS11F 92 SDI2 FS1 FS2 SDI2 input signal is not selected

English Manual Template - FOR

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents